Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s Man-
ual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excel-
lent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system
for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual
carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation.
For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such as details
concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the dealer from
whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual
are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES
LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any
time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to
make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This
Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, in-
cluding factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may
be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
© copyright 2004 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.
A) Legacy Sedan
B) Legacy Station wagon
C) OUTBACK Sedan
D) OUTBACK Station wagon
A
B
C
D
UBF205AB
1
– CONTINUED –
Warranties
! Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of Ameri-
ca, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU
dealer in the United States come with the following
warranties:
" SUBARU Limited Warranty
" Emission Control Systems Warranty
" Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage
and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”. Please read these warranties carefully.
! Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada,
Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU deal-
er in Canada come with the following warranties:
" SUBARU Limited Warranty
" Anti-Corrosion Warranty
" Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage
and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Service Book-
let”. Please read these warranties carefully.
This vehicle does not contain mer-
cury devices or parts.
2
How to use this owner’s manual
! Using your Owner’s manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this
manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life
of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may result in se-
rious injury and damage to your vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each
chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you
can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seat-
belt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate the keys,
locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instru-
ment panel indicators and how to use the instruments
and other switches.
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate the climate
control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate your audio
system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate interior
equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and operate your
SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU
in various conditions and explains some safety tips on
driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you have a prob-
lem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine over-
heating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU
looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need to take your
SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance
and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimension and capac-
ities of your SUBARU.
3
– CONTINUED –
Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting
safety defects
This chapter informs you about Tire information, Uni-
form tire quality grading standards and Reporting
safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in this manu-
al. You can use it to quickly find something you want
to read.
! Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and
NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards
that could result in injury to you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well as all other
portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a bet-
ter understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
A WARNING indicates a situation in which seri-
ous injury or death could result if the warning is
ignored.
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury
or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result
if the caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to
make better use of your vehicle.
! Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it in this man-
HSF019AA
4
ual. This symbol means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or
“Do not let this happen”, depending upon the context.
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may see on your
vehicle.
Mark Name
CAUTION
Passengers’ windows lock
Fuel
Front fog lights
Parking lights
Hazard warning flasher
Cigarette lighter
Seat heater
5
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint lower anchorages
Child restraint top tether anchorages
Horn
Windshield wiper deicer
Wiper intermittent
Windshield wiper and washer
Rear window wiper and washer
Lights
Parking lights, tail lights, license plate
lights and instrument panel illumina-
tion
Mark Name
Head lights
Turn signal
Illumination brightness
Engine hood
Trunk lid (Sedan)
Fan speed
Instrument panel outlets
Instrument panel outlets and foot out-
lets
Foot outlets
Windshield defroster and foot outlets
Mark Name
6
Safety precautions when driving
! Seatbelt and SRS airbag
" All persons in the vehicle should fasten their
seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move.
Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be-
comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or
accident.
" To obtain maximum protection in the event of
an accident, the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the
vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental Re-
straint System) airbag does not do away with
the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of
severe injury or death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
" The SRS airbags deploy with considerable
speed and force. Occupants who are out of
proper position when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
Windshield defroster
Rear window defogger/Outside mirror
defogger
Air recirculation
Outside air
Night illumination dimness cancella-
tion
Engine oil
Washer
Door lock (Transmitter)
Door unlock (Transmitter)
Trunk lid (Sedan) or rear gate (Station
wagon) (Transmitter)
Mark Name
7
– CONTINUED –
ment, the driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
Carefully read the sections “Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags” in chapter 1 of this owner’s manual for in-
structions and precautions concerning the seatbelt
system and SRS airbag system.
! Child safety
" Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger
cannot protect the child from injury in a colli-
sion, because the child will be caught between
the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
" While riding in the vehicle, infants and small
children should always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint system which
is appropriate for the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the REAR seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts. Accord-
ing to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating po-
sitions than in the front seating positions. Nev-
er allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
" Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not
restrained or improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk being injured from deployment is
greater.
" NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING
CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
" Always use the child safety locks whenever a
child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could
result if a child accidentally opened the door
and fell out. Refer to the “Door locks” section in
chapter 2.
" Always lock the passenger’s windows using
8
the lock switch when children are riding in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operating the power
window. Refer to the “Power windows” section
in chapter 2.
" Never leave unattended children in the vehi-
cle. They could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent operation of the
vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
" Help prevent young children from locking
themselves in the trunk. When leaving the vehi-
cle, either close all windows and lock all doors
or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make
certain that the trunk is closed. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in a trunk could quickly
become high enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including brain damage,
particularly for small children.
Carefully read the sections “Child restraint sys-
tems”,“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag)”, and “Seatbelts” in chapter 1 of this owner’s
manual for instructions and precautions concerning
the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS
airbag system.
! Engine exhaust gas (carbon monox-
ide)
" Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex-
haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color-
less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or
even lethal, if inhaled.
" Always properly maintain the engine exhaust
system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en-
tering the vehicle.
" Never run the engine in a closed space, such
as a garage, except for the brief time needed to
drive the vehicle in or out of it.
" Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a
lengthy time while the engine is running. If that
is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to
force fresh air into the vehicle.
" Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to
ensure that the ventilation system always
works properly.
" If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, have the problem
9
– CONTINUED –
checked and corrected as soon as possible. If
you must drive under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
" Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
! Drinking and driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reac-
tion and impairs your perception, judgment and
attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even
if you drink just a little – it will increase the risk
of being involved in a serious or fatal accident,
injuring or killing yourself, your passengers
and others. In addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the severity of
that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently,
you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below
the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never
drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before
getting behind the wheel.
! Drugs and driving
There are some drugs (over the counter and
prescription) that can delay your reaction time
and impair your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it
may increase your, your passengers’ and other
persons’ risk of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or
pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the
medication to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any
medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise
affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires you to take
10
drugs, please consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit
mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-be-
ing, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first
place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to
those drugs.
! Driving when tired or sleepy
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will
be delayed and your perception, judgment and
attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers’
and other persons’ chances of being involved
in a serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe
place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips,
you should make periodic rest stops to refresh your-
self before continuing on your journey. When possible,
you should share the driving with others.
! Car phone/mobile phone and driving
Do not use a hand-held phone while driving; it
may distract your attention from driving and
can lead to an accident. If you use a hand-held
phone, pull off the road and park in the safe
place before using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones may legally
be used while driving.
! Modification of your vehicle
Your vehicle should not be modified. Modifica-
tion could affect its performance, safety or du-
rability, and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from modification
may not be covered under warranties.
11
– CONTINUED –
! Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and
distract your attention from driving. In a collision or
sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be
thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your
passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under
these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets
should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain
a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se-
cured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet car-
rier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle. Never restrain
pets or pet carriers in the front passenger’s seat. For
further information, consult your veterinarian, local an-
imal protection society or pet shop.
! Tire pressures
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire
pressures can cause the tires to deform severe-
ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase
in temperature could cause tread separation,
and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss
of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each
tire (including the spare) at least once a month and be-
fore any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold.
Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to
the values shown on the tire placard.
Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in chapter 11
for detailed information.
! California proposition 65 warning
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehi-
cles and certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
14
9
12
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13
10
11
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Keys and doors
Instruments and controls
Climate control
Audio
Interior equipment
Starting and operating
Driving tips
In case of emergency
Appearance care
Maintenance and service
Specifications
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
14
Illustrated index
! Exterior
123 5 64
13 1112 8910 7
UBF200BB
1) Engine hood lock release (page
11-5)
2) Headlight switch (page 3-45)
3) Bulb replacement (page 11-74)
4) Wiper switch (page 3-52)
5) Moonroof (page 2-41)
6) Roof rail (page 8-21)
7) Door locks (page 2-6)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-52)
9) Flat tires (page 9-5)
10) Tire chains (page 8-17)
11) Fog light switch (page 3-50)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-22)
13) Towing hook (page 9-22)
15
– CONTINUED –
685
4
123
75984
123
UBF201BB
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-57)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-30)
4) Tie-down hooks (page 9-22)
5) Towing hook (page 9-22)
6) Trunk lid (page 2-35)
7) Rear gate (page 2-39)
8) Bulb replacement (page 11-76)
9) Rear wiper blade assembly and
rubber replacement (page 3-55)
18
1
14 13 121110 9 8
23 456
7
UBF510CB
1) Parking brake lever (page 7-51)
2) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-
13)
3) Select lever (AT) (page 7-16)
4) Information display (page 3-37)
5) Clock (page 3-36)
6) Dashboard storage compart-
ment (page 6-7)
7) Glove box (page 6-7)
8) Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 3-7)
9) Audio (page 5-1)
10) Climate control (page 4-1)
11) Cigarette lighter (page 6-16)
12) Ashtray (page 6-19)
13) Tilt steering(page 3-63)
14) Cup holder (page 6-12/page 6-
13)
19
– CONTINUED –
! Instrument panel
123456 7 8
9
1011121314
UBF509CB
1) Door locks (page 2-6)
2) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-47)
3) Remote control mirror (page 3-
61)
4) Windshield wiper deicer (page
3-56)
5) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch (page 7-48)
6) Light control lever (page 3-44)
7) Combination meter (page 3-7/
page 3-14)
8) Wiper control lever (page 3-51)
9) Cruise control (page 7-53)
10) Horn (page 3-64)
11) SRS airbag (page 1-59)
12) Fuse box (page 11-68)
13) Hood lock release knob (page
11-5)
14) Power window (page 2-31)
20
! Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1
67
11
10
9
8
2
3
4
5
UBF512CB
1) Parking light switch (page 3-49)
2) Windshield wiper (page 3-51)
3) Mist (page 3-53)
4) Windshield washer (page 3-52)
5) Rear window wiper and washer
switch (page 3-55)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-52)
7) Light control lever (page 3-44)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-50)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-45)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low
beam change (page 3-45)
11) Turn signal (page 3-47)
21
– CONTINUED –
! Combination meter
! U.S.-spec. vehicles
12 3
56
4
87
UBF203BB
1) Temperature gauge (page 3-13/
page 3-19)
2) Tachometer (page 3-11/page 3-
17)
3) Speedometer (page 3-9/page 3-
15)
4) Fuel gauge (page 3-11/page 3-
18)
5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-10/
page 3-16)
6) Trip meter and odometer (page
3-9/page 3-16)
7) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-34)
8) Gear position indicator (page 3-
34)
22
! Canada-spec. vehicles
12 3
56
4
87
UBF204BB
1) Temperature gauge (page 3-13/
page 3-19)
2) Tachometer (page 3-11/page 3-
17)
3) Speedometer (page 3-9/page 3-
15)
4) Fuel gauge (page 3-11/page 3-
18)
5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-10/
page 3-16)
6) Trip meter and odometer (page
3-9/page 3-16)
7) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-34)
8) Gear position indicator (page 3-
34)
23
– CONTINUED –
! Warning and indicator light
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-21
SRS airbag system warning
light
3-24
CHECK ENGINE warning
light/Malfunction indicator
lamp
3-25
Charge warning light 3-26
Oil pressure warning light 3-26
AT OIL temperature warn-
ing light (if equipped)
3-27
or
ABS warning light 3-28
or
Brake system warning light 3-29
Door open warning light 3-31
Low fuel warning light 3-30
All-wheel drive warning light
(if equipped)
3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light (if
equipped)
3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light/Vehicle Dy-
namics Control OFF indica-
tor light (if equipped)
3-32
Security indicator light 3-33
Turn signal indicator lights 3-34
High beam indicator light 3-35
Cruise control indicator light
(if equipped)
3-35
Cruise control set indicator
light (if equipped)
3-35
Mark Name Page
26
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown below to meet your personal requirements. Con-
tact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Possible settings Default set-
ting
Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-23
Monitoring start delay time (after
closure of doors)
0 second / 30 seconds 30 seconds 2-25
Impact sensor operation
(only vehicles with shock sensors
(dealer option))
Operation / Non-operation Non-opera-
tion
2-29
Passive arming Operation / Non-operation Non-opera-
tion
2-27
Remote keyless entry sys-
tem
Hazard warning flasher Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-12
Audible signal Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-15
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-11
Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 min. / Continuous
operation
Operation for
15 min.
3-57
27
– CONTINUED –
Windshield wiper deicer (if
equipped)
Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 min. / Continuous
operation
Operation for
15 min.
3-56
Dome light Operation in interlock with remote
keyless entry system
OFF / Short / Normal / Long Normal 6-2
Battery drainage prevention
function
Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-9
Item Function Possible settings Default set-
ting
Page
1-1
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats .................................................... 1-2
Manual seat ....................................................... 1-3
Power seat (if equipped) .................................. 1-5
Reclining the seatback ..................................... 1-6
Head restraint adjustment ................................ 1-8
Active head restraint ........................................ 1-8
Lumbar support (if equipped) .......................... 1-9
Seat heater (if equipped) .............................. 1-10
Rear seats ..................................................... 1-11
Folding down the rear seat – Station wagon .. 1-12
Head restraint adjustment ................................ 1-12
Armrest (if equipped) ................................... 1-14
Loading long objects (Sedan) .......................... 1-15
Seatbelts ....................................................... 1-16
Seatbelt safety tips ........................................... 1-16
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .............. 1-18
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-18
Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 1-19
Fastening the seatbelt ...................................... 1-21
Seatbelt maintenance ....................................... 1-33
Front seatbelt pretensioners ....................... 1-33
System monitors ............................................... 1-35
System servicing .............................................. 1-36
Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-37
Child restraint systems ................................ 1-38
Where to place a child restraint system ......... 1-40
Choosing a child restraint system .................. 1-41
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ............................................................ 1-42
Installing a booster seat ................................... 1-47
Installation of child restraint systems by use
of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .... 1-49
Top tether anchorages ..................................... 1-55
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag) ........................................... 1-59
Vehicle with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
restraints for driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers ....................... 1-59
Subaru advanced frontal airbag system ........ 1-65
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ........ 1-80
SRS airbag system monitors ........................... 1-89
SRS airbag system servicing .......................... 1-91
Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-92
1-2
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seat, seat belt and SRS airba gs
Front seats
" Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid
the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of
personal injury.
" Before adjusting the seat, make sure the
hands and feet of rear seat passengers are
clear of the adjusting mechanism.
" Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when
the occupant sits well back and upright in the
seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the
seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks
should be always used in the upright position
while the vehicle is running. If the front seat-
backs are not used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt
and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious in-
ternal injury or death.
" The SRS airbags deploy with considerable
speed and force. Occupants who are out of
proper position when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not
HS1034BA
1-3
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
restrained or improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from deployment is
greater. For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including those in
child seats and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in-
cluding forward facing child seat) in the REAR
seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE
TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-
ing positions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precautions con-
cerning child restraint systems, see the “Child
restraint systems” section in this chapter.
! Manual seat
! Fore and aft adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired
position. Then release the lever and move the seat
back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked
into place.
UB1500BA
1-4
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Reclining the seatback
To prevent the passenger from sliding under
the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always
put the seatback in the upright position while
the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place ob-
jects such as cushions between the passenger
and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of slid-
ing under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding
up over the abdomen will increase, and both
can result in serious internal injury or death.
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to
the desired position. Then release the lever and make
sure the seat is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring
back upward with force when released. When operat-
ing the reclining lever to return the seatback, hold it
lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.
HS1037BA
UB1501BA
1-5
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! Seat cushion height adjustment (driver’s seat)
The height of the seat can be adjusted by moving the
seat cushion adjustment lever up and down.
When the lever is pushed down, the seat is lowered.
When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises.
! Power seat (if equipped)
! Fore and aft adjustment
To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the con-
trol switch forward or backward.
NOTE
During backward-forward adjustment of the seat,
you cannot adjust the seat cushion angle or seat
height.
UB1502BA
UB1541BA
1-6
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Reclining the seatback
To prevent the passenger from sliding under
the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always
put the seatback in the upright position while
the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place ob-
jects such as cushions between the passenger
and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of slid-
ing under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding
up over the abdomen will increase, and both
can result in serious internal injury or death.
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control
switch.
HS1037BA
UB1542BA
1-7
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! Seat cushion angle adjustment (Driver’s seat
only)
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down
the front end of the control switch.
! Seat height adjustment (Driver’s seat only)
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the
rear end of the control switch.
UB1540BA
UB1519BA
1-8
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Head restraint adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push
the head restraint down while pressing the release
button on the top of the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so that the cen-
ter of the head restraint is closest to the top of the oc-
cupant’s ears.
Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints
removed because they are designed to reduce
the risk of serious neck injury in the event that
the vehicle is struck from the rear.
! Active head restraint
The front seats of your vehicle are equipped with ac-
tive head restraints. They automatically tilt forward
slightly in the event the vehicle is struck from the rear,
decreasing the amount of rearward head movement
and thus reducing the risk of whiplash. For maximum
effectiveness the head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top
of the occupant’s ears.
UB1521BA
HS1105BA
1-9
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
" Each active head restraint is effective only
when its height is properly adjusted and the
user sits in the correct position on the seat.
" Each active head restraint is designed to
work only once. If your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision, have an authorized SUBARU
dealer inspect the active head restraints.
" The active head restraints may not operate in
the event the vehicle experiences only a slight
impact in the rear.
" The active head restraints may be damaged if
they are pushed hard from behind or subjected
to shock. As a result, they may not function if
the vehicle suffers a rear impact.
! Lumbar support (if equipped)
Pull the lever forward or backward.
Pulling the lever forward will increase the amount of
support for your lower back.
UB1520BA
1-10
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seat heater (if equipped)
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is
either in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Each seat heater has four levels of adjustment. To use
the heater in the right hand seat, turn the “R” adjust-
ment knob forward until the “ ” mark reaches the
desired position. To activate the heater in the left hand
seat, turn the “L” adjustment knob forward until the
“ ” mark reaches the desired position. Each heater
warms the seat most quickly with the “ ” mark on
the adjustment knob in the furthest-forward position.
An indicator light on the adjustment knob for each seat
heater comes on when that seat heater is activated.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed enough or be-
fore you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
" There is a possibility that people with delicate
skin may suffer slight burns even at low tem-
peratures if they use the seat heater for a long
period of time. When using the heater, always
be sure to warn the persons concerned.
" Do not put anything on the seat which insu-
lates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
or similar items. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat.
NOTE
" Use of the seat heater for a long period of time
while the engine is not running can cause battery
discharge.
" When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
paint thinner, or any similar materials.
UB1208BA
1-11
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Rear seats
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the
occupant sits well back and upright in the seat.
Do not put cushions or any other materials be-
tween occupants and seatbacks or seat cush-
ions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the
lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than
the top of the seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
HG1044BA
HS8005BA
1-12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Folding down the rear seat – Station
wagon
" After returning the rear seat to its original po-
sition, be certain to place all of the seatbelts
and the tab attached to the seat cushion above
the seat cushion. And make certain that the
shoulder belts are fully visible.
" Never allow passengers to ride on the folded
rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so
may result in serious injury or death.
" Secure skis and other lengthy items properly
to prevent them from being thrown around in-
side the vehicle and causing serious injury dur-
ing a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneuver
or a rapid acceleration.
Unlock the seatback by pushing the release button
and then fold the seatback down.
To return the seatback to its original position, raise the
seatback until it locks into place and make sure that it
is securely locked.
! Head restraint adjustment
Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints
removed because they are designed to reduce
the risk of serious neck injury in the event that
UB1534CA
1-13
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
the vehicle is struck from the rear.
! Rear windows side seating position
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower it, push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so that the cen-
ter of the head restraint is closest to the top of the oc-
cupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower the head re-
straints to improve rearward visibility.
The head restraint is not intended to be used at
the lowest position. Before sitting on the seat,
raise the head restraint to the first or second
click position depending on your sitting height.
! Rear center seating position
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower it, push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the seatback.
When the rear center seating position is occupied,
UB1529BA
UB1523BA
1-14
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
place the head restraint in its highest position. When
the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower
the head restraint to improve rearward visibility.
Armrest (if equipped)
Sedan
UB1531BA
1-15
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Station wagon
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge of the arm-
rest.
To avoid the possibility of serious injury, pas-
sengers must never be allowed to sit on the
center armrest while the vehicle is in motion.
! Loading long objects (Sedan)
Folding down the armrest and opening the seatback
panel affords a loading space for long objects.
To open the seatback panel, pull the panel down while
pressing the release tab down.
" Secure long objects properly to prevent them
from shooting forward and causing serious in-
jury during a sudden stop or sharp cornering.
Tie long objects down with a rope or something
equivalent.
" Avoid loading objects longer than 6.6 ft (2 m)
UB1201BA
UB1532BA
1-16
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
and heavier than 55 lbs (25 kg). Such objects
can interfere with the driver’s proper operation
of the vehicle, possibly causing an accident
and serious injury.
Seatbelts
! Seatbelt safety tips
" All persons in the vehicle should fasten their
seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move.
Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be-
comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or
accident.
" All belts should fit snugly in order to provide
full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as ef-
fective in preventing or reducing injury.
" Each seatbelt is designed to support only
one person. Never use a single belt for two or
more persons – even children. Otherwise, in an
accident, serious injury or death could result.
" Replace all seatbelt assemblies including re-
tractors and attaching hardware worn by occu-
pants of a vehicle that has been in a serious ac-
cident. The entire assembly should be replaced
even if damage is not obvious.
" Put children aged 12 and under in the rear
seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill children, espe-
UB1533BA
1-17
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
cially if they are 12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-
cause children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. For all these reasons, we
strongly recommend that ALL children (includ-
ing those in child seats and those that have out-
grown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in-
cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR
seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE
TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-
ing positions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precautions con-
cerning the child restraint system, see the
“Child restraint systems” section in this chap-
ter.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and di-
agnostic module, which will record the use of the seat-
belt(s) by the driver and/or front passenger when any
of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploys.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your ve-
hicle. See information on “Child restraint systems” in
this chapter.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child
should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the
seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating po-
sitions than in the front seating positions. Never allow
a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or
neck, move the child closer to the belt buckle to help
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the
hips and not on the child’s waist. If the shoulder portion
of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child re-
straint system should be used. Never place the shoul-
der belt under the child’s arm or behind the child’s
back.
1-18
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts.
They should consult their doctor for specific recom-
mendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and
as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.
! Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows normal body
movement but the retractor locks automatically during
a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quick-
ly out of the retractor.
! Automatic/Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/
Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as
an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR
has an additional locking mode “Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode” intended to secure a child re-
straint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even slightly, the re-
tractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seat-
belt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor func-
tions as ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, ALR
mode is released.
When securing a child restraint system on the passen-
gers’ seats, the seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
When the child restraint system is removed, make
sure that the retractor is restored to the Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR) function by allowing the seat-
belt to retract fully.
For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the
ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode, see the
“Child restraint systems” section in this chapter.
HS1107AA
1-19
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! Seatbelt warning light and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning de-
vice at the driver’s and front passenger’s seat.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position,
this device reminds the driver and front passenger to
fasten their seatbelts by illuminating the warning lights
in the locations indicated below and sounding a chime.
Driver: Instrument panel
Front passenger: Between map lights
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/has not yet
fastened the seatbelt(s) when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning
light(s) will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seat-
belt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s seatbelt is not
fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously.
If the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/
is still not fastened 6 seconds later, both warning lights
or the warning light for the unfastened seatbelt will re-
main lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s and/or front pas-
senger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened even 15
UB7507NA
UB1582BA
1-20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
seconds later (21 seconds after turning ON the ignition
switch), the warning lights will alternate between flash-
ing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals, and
the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are
flashing.
Alternate flashing and steady illumination of the warn-
ing lights and sounding of the chime will continue until
both driver and front passenger fasten their seatbelts.
NOTE
" If the driver and/or front passenger unfasten(s)
the seatbelt(s) after fastening, the seatbelt warn-
ing device operates as follows according to the
vehicle speed.
" At speeds lower than approximately 9 mph (15
km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s)
will alternate between flashing and steady illu-
mination at 15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
" At approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher
speeds
The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s)
will alternate between flashing and steady illu-
mination at 15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flash-
ing.
" It is possible to cancel the warning operation
that follows the 6-second warning after turning ON
the ignition switch by unfastening and refastening
the driver’s seatbelt. When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the complete se-
quence of warning operation resumes. For further
details about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front passenger’s seat,
the seatbelt warning device for front passenger’s seat
will be deactivated. The front passenger’s occupant
detection system monitors whether or not there is a
passenger on the front passenger’s seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so
may prevent the device from functioning correctly or
cause the device to fail.
" Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV
onto the seatback.
" Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket.
" Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her
hands or legs on the front passenger’s seatback, or al-
low him/her to pull the seatback.
" Do not use front seats with their backward-forward
position and seatback not being locked into place se-
curely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust
them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to the
“Manual seat” in the front seats section in Chapter 1 in
this owner’s manual. (Models equipped with manual
1-21
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
seats only)
If the seatbelt warning device for front passenger’s
seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated
even when the front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passenger has not
fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions.
" Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other
than the child restraint system and the child occupant.
" Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback
pocket.
" Ensure that the backward-forward position and
seatback of front passenger’s seat are locked into
place securely by moving the seat back and forth.
(Models equipped with manual seats only)
If still the seatbelt warning device for front passenger’s
seat does not function correctly after taking relevant
corrective actions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
! Fastening the seatbelt
" Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In
an accident, this can increase the risk or sever-
ity of injury.
" Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your
hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of
across the weaker abdomen.
" Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when
the occupant sits well back and upright in the
seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the
seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks
should be always used in the upright position
while the vehicle is running. If the front seat-
backs are not used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt
and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious in-
ternal injury or death.
" Do not put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks or seat
cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over
the abdomen will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or death.
1-22
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or
behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can
increase the risk or severity of injury.
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very
hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sun-
ny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they cool.
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright posi-
tion. Move the seatback as far from the steering wheel
as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far back as possi-
ble.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly.
Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach-
ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out
more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the
belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull
it out slowly again.
HS1049BA
1-23
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder
belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips,
not on your waist.
HS1050BA HS1051BA
1-24
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
" Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor
height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to
the position best suited for you. To lower the anchor
height, push the release button and slide the anchor
down. To raise the anchor height, slide the anchor up.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked
in place.
Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder
belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without
touching the neck.
When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the
shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass
over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt an-
chor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder
belt over the neck may result in neck injury dur-
ing sudden braking or in a collision.
" Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are
UB1200BA
HS1053BA
1-25
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing
in the door.
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt on
Station wagon)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly.
Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach-
ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out
more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the
belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then
pull it out slowly again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder
belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips,
not on your waist.
HS1050BA
HS1051BA
1-26
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
" Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are
retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing
in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on Station wagon model
A) Center seatbelt tongue plate
B) Connector (tongue)
C) Connector (buckle)
D) Center seatbelt buckle
HS1053BA
A
B
C
D
UB1552BB
1-27
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted
can increase the risk or severity of injury in an
accident. When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, especially when
inserting the connector’s tongue plate into the
mating buckle (on right hand side), always
check that the webbing is not twisted.
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the re-
spective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as
a shoulder belt (with the connector’s tongue
plate not fastened to the connector’s buckle on
the right hand side), it cannot properly restrain
the wearer in position in an accident, possibly
resulting in serious injury or death.
HS1054BA HS1055BA
1-28
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceil-
ing.
1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate from the
holder located at the front of the recess by pulling the
connector (tongue) plate rearward.
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead re-
tractor.
UB1216BA UB1217BA
1-29
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
3. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, in-
sert the connector (tongue) attached at the webbing
end into the buckle on the right hand side until a click
is heard.
If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the
belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still
cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure that the
“ ” mark on the connector (tongue) and the “ ”
mark on the buckle face outwards.
UB1508DA
UB1221BA
1-30
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate in the center
seatbelt buckle marked “CENTER” on the left hand
side until it clicks.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder
belt. And place the lap belt as low as possible on your
hips, not on your waist.
HS1060BA HS1061BA
1-31
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
" Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle
(on the left hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.
0
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed object into the
HS1062BA
UB1036BA
UB1213BA
1-32
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
slot in the connector (buckle) on the right hand side
and push it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
disconnect from the buckle.
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should
hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retrac-
tor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate
in the recess in the retractor and then insert the con-
nector (tongue) plate into the slot located at the front
of the recess.
" Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seat-
belt too quickly. Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit against the trim, resulting in
damaged trim.
" Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the
tongue plates are neatly stored. A hanging
tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim
during driving, causing damage to the trim.
UB1528BA
UB1546BA
1-33
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! Seatbelt maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm
water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this
could seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the
webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts,
gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-
place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is
found.
" Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemi-
cals and particularly battery acid.
" Never attempt to make modifications or
changes that will prevent the seatbelt from op-
erating properly.
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelts have a
seatbelt pretensioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are
designed to be activated in the event of an accident in-
volving a moderate to severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a SRS frontal
airbag sensor. If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal collision, the
front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the retractor
to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively re-
strains the front seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operat-
HS1067BA
1-34
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
ing noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke
will be released. These occurrences are normal and
not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated,
the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently,
the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
NOTE
" Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to acti-
vate in minor frontal impacts, in side or rear im-
pacts or in roll-over accidents.
" The driver’s seat and passenger’s seat preten-
sioners and frontal airbag operate simultaneous-
ly.
" Pretensioners are designed to function on a
one-time-only basis. In the event that a preten-
sioner is activated, both the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seatbelt retractor assemblies must be re-
placed and only by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use
only genuine SUBARU parts.
" If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot
be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of
the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
" If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or sur-
rounding area has been damaged, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
" When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to ex-
plain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretension-
ers by alerting him to the contents of this section.
" To obtain maximum protection, occupants
should sit in an upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to “Seatbelts”
section in this chapter.
" Do not modify, remove or strike the front
seatbelt retractor assemblies or surrounding
area. This could result in accidental activation
of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the
system inoperative, possibly resulting in seri-
ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no
user-serviceable parts. For required servicing
of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seat-
belt pretensioners, see your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
" When discarding front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other reasons, consult
1-35
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
your SUBARU dealer.
! System monitors
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi-
ness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is
being driven. The seatbelt pretensioners share the
control module with the airbag system. Therefore, if
any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the
SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show normal sys-
tem operation by lighting for about 7 seconds when
the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
The following components are monitored by the indi-
cator:
" Front sub sensor (Right hand side)
" Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
" Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
" Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
" Frontal airbag module (Front passenger’s side)
" Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right hand side)
" Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left hand side)
" Side airbag module (Driver’s side)
" Side airbag module (Front passenger’s side)
" Side airbag sensor (Rear wheel house right hand
side)
" Side airbag sensor (Rear wheel house left hand
side)
" Curtain airbag module (Right side)
" Curtain airbag module (Left side)
" Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
" Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passenger’s side)
" Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)
" Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passenger’s side)
" Driver’s seat position sensor
" Front passenger’s occupant detection system
weight sensor
" Front passenger’s occupant detection control mod-
ule
UB7507JA
1-36
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
" Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indi-
cator
" All related wiring
If the warning light exhibits any of the following
conditions, there may be a malfunction in the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-
tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your
nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system
checked. Unless checked and properly re-
paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS air-
bags may inflate in a very minor collision or not
inflate in a severe collision), which may in-
crease the risk of injury.
" Flashing or flickering of the indicator light
" No illumination of the warning light when the
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” posi-
tion
" Continuous illumination of the warning light
" Illumination of the warning light while driving
! System servicing
" When discarding a seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by
a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
" Tampering with or disconnecting the sys-
tem’s wiring could result in accidental activa-
tion of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or airbag
or could make the system inoperative, which
may result in serious injury. The wiring har-
nesses of the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS
airbag systems are covered with yellow insula-
tion and the connectors of the system are yel-
low for easy identification. Do not use electrical
test equipment on any circuit related to the
seatbelt pretensioner and airbag systems. For
required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner,
see your nearest SUBARU dealer.
The front sub sensors are located in both front
fenders and the airbag control module includ-
ing the impact sensors is located under the
center console. If you need service or repair in
1-37
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
those areas or near the front seatbelt retrac-
tors, we recommend that you have an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer perform the work.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is damaged in an ac-
cident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner
does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
! Precautions against vehicle modifica-
tion
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in-
stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.
Do not perform any of the following modifica-
tions. Such modifications can interfere with
proper operation of the seatbelt pertensioners.
" Attachment of any equipment (bush bar,
winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than
genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front
end.
" Modification of the suspension system or
front end structure.
" Installation of a tire of different size and con-
struction from the tires specified on the tire
placard attached to the door jamb.
1-38
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always be placed in
an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while
riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is ap-
propriate for the child’s age and size. All child restraint
systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in this manu-
al, entitled “Installation of child restraint systems by
use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)”).
Children could be endangered in an accident if their
child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle.
When installing the child restraint system, carefully fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating positions
than in the front seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that in-
fants and small children be restrained in an approved
child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
US1590BA
HS1069BA
1-39
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her
lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger
cannot protect the child from injury in a colli-
sion, because the child will be caught between
the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms
in the front seat exposes that child to another
serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force, the child
could be injured or even killed.
Children should be properly restrained at all
times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop or in an ac-
cident and can be injured seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or kneeling
on or in front of the front seat are exposed an-
other serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
HS1070BA
1-40
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Where to place a child restraint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommendations on
where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint system due to
the hazard to children posed by the passenger’s air-
bag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating positions
Recommended positions for all types of child restraint
systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and lower anchorages (bars)
are provided for installing a child restraint system.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
Installing a child restraint system is not recommended,
although the A/ELR seatbelt is provided in this posi-
tion.
Some types of child restraints might not be able to be
secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use only a child re-
straint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly
against the contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
" Put children aged 12 and under in the rear
seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill children, espe-
cially if they are 12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-
cause children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of
child restraint devices (including forward fac-
ing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
You should choose a restraint device which is
appropriate for the child’s age, height and
weight. According to accident statistics, chil-
UG1530BA
1-41
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
dren are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions.
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A
PASSENGER’S SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT IN-
STALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
! Choosing a child restraint system
Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for
the child’s age and size (weight and height) in order to
provide the child with proper protection. The child re-
straint system should meet all applicable requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United
States or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for
Canada. It can be identified by locking for the label on
the child restraint system or the manufacture’s state-
ment of compliance in the document attached to the
HG1043BA UGS507AA
1-42
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
system. Also it is important for you to make sure that
the child restraint system is compatible with the vehi-
cle in which it will be used.
! Installing child restraint systems with
A/ELR seatbelt
" Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-
come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check the child restraint system before you
place a child in it.
" Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-
straint systems can be thrown around inside of
the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it
can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well
as result in serious injuries or death to the
child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys-
tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in
position. If it is not held tight and secure, the
danger of your child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be increased.
! Installing a rearward facing child restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating
position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around
the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
UGS508BA
1-43
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to
change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be
heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.
6. Push and pull the child restraint system forward
and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly se-
cured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and
then tightening the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm
that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
UGS509BA
UGS510BA
1-44
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
8. To remove the child restraint system, press the re-
lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt
to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR
mode.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in
use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the
retractor. That function is restored by retracting
the seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the seating posi-
tion.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around
the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
hear a click.
UG1089BA
US1581BA
1-45
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to
change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be
heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child restraint sys-
tem, move it back and forth and right and left to check
if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm
that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
US1582BA US1583BA
1-47
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
9. To remove the child restraint system, press the re-
lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt
to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR
mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in
use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the
retractor. That function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing a booster seat
" Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-
come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check the child restraint system before you
place a child in it.
" Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-
straint systems can be thrown around inside of
the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it
can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well
as result in serious injuries or death to the
child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys-
tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in
position. If it is not held tight and secure, the
danger of your child suffering personal injury in
UG1094BA
1-48
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the event of an accident may be increased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position
and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on
the booster seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around
the booster seat and the child following the instruc-
tions provided by its manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the
center of child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is posi-
tioned as low as possible on the child’s hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the release but-
ton on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.
" Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In
an accident, this can increase the risk or sever-
ity of injury to the child.
" Never place the shoulder belt under the
child’s arm or behind the child’s back. If an ac-
cident occurs, this can increase the risk or se-
verity of injury to the child.
" The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to pro-
vide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as
US1585BA
US1586BA
1-49
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
effective in preventing or reducing injury.
" Place the lap belt as low as possible on the
child’s hips. A high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal injury or
death.
" Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may result in
neck injury during sudden braking or in a colli-
sion.
! Installation of child restraint systems
by use of lower and tether anchorages
(LATCH)
" Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-
come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check the child restraint system before you
place a child in it.
" Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-
straint systems can be thrown around inside of
the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it
can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well
as result in serious injuries or death to the
child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys-
tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in
position. If it is not held tight and secure, the
danger of your child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be increased.
Some types of child restraint systems can be installed
on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seat-
belts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes re-
ferred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren).
1-50
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages
(bars) and three upper anchorages (tether anchorag-
es) for accommodating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a
child restraint system only on the rear seat window-
side seating positions. For each window-side seating
position, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cush-
ion meets the seatback.
UB1202BA UB1538CA
1-51
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Sedan
Station wagon
The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are pro-
vided for all the seating positions (middle and both
window-side ones) of the rear seat.
TOP TETHER
UB1222BA
TOP TETHER
UB1574BA
1-52
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Sedan Station wagon
You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the rear
seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of
the lower anchorages (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cush-
ion meets the seatback.
When you install a child restraint system, fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys-
tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in
position. If it is not held tight and secure, the
UB1204BA UB1203BA
1-53
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
danger of your child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be increased.
0
1. Sedan: Make the clearance between the seat
cushion and seatback a little wider to locate the two
anchorages (bars) for the position where you want to
install the child restraint system.
Station wagon: Remove the two covers from the se-
lected side of the rear seatback to expose the anchor-
ages (bars) to be used for installation of the child re-
straint system.
HS1079BA
UB1205BA
1-54
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
2. While following the instructions supplied by the
child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower
hooks onto the lower anchorages located at “ ”
marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seat-
belts are not caught.
3. [If your child restraint system is of a flexible attach-
ment type (which uses tether belts to connect the child
restraint system properly to the lower anchorages)]
While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion,
pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure
the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack
in the belt.
4. Connect the top tether hook to the tether anchor-
age and firmly tighten the tether.
For information on how to set the top tether, read the
following “Top tether anchorages”.
US1588CA UG1098BA
1-55
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
5. Before seating a child in the child restraint system,
try to move seat back and forth and left and right to
verify that it is held securely in position.
6. To remove the child restraint system, follow the re-
verse procedures of installation.
If you have any question concerning this type of child
restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer.
! Top tether anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with three top tether anchor-
ages so that a child restraint system having a top teth-
er can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a
child restraint system using top tether, proceed as fol-
lows, while observing the instructions by the child re-
straint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional stability by of-
fering another connection between a child restraint
system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use
a top tether whenever one is required or available.
! Tether anchorage location
" Sedan
Three tether anchorages are installed on the rear shelf
behind the rear seat head restraint. Open the cover
flap to use each anchorage.
US1113BA
TOP TETHER
UB1222BA
1-56
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
" Station wagon
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the right, cen-
ter and left positions, are already installed on the rear
edge of the roof.
Open the cover flap to use each anchorage.
! To hook the top tether
" Sedan
1. Remove the head restraint at the seating position
where the child seat has been installed with the seat-
belt or lower anchorages; lift up the head restraint
while pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the trunk. Avoid placing the
head restraint in the passenger compartment to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
TOP TETHER
UB1574BA
UB1535BA
1-57
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
2. Open the cover flaps to use the anchorages.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint sys-
tem to the appropriate upper anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
Do not route the top tether over the head re-
straint. It may happen that the top tether cannot
be fastened tightly.
When the child restraint system is to be se-
cured using the top tether, pass the top tether
under the head restraint between the head re-
straint stay posts. If the top tether still cannot
be fastened tightly, remove the head restraint.
TOP TETHER
UB1536BA
UB1537BA
1-58
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
" Station wagon
0
1. Remove the head restraint at the seating position
where the child restraint system has been installed
with the seatbelt or lower anchorages; lift up the head
restraint while pressing the release button. Store the
head restraint in the cargo area. Avoid placing the
head restraint in the passenger compartment to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
2. Open the cover flaps to use the anchorages.
UB1585BA
UB1207BA
UB1206BA
1-59
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint sys-
tem to the appropriate upper anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
Always remove the head restraint when mount-
ing a child restraint system with a top tether.
Otherwise, it may happen that the top tether
cannot be fastened tightly.
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system.
This name is used because the airbag system supple-
ments the vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and di-
agnostic module, which will record the use of the seat-
belt(s) by the driver and/or front passenger when any
of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploys.
! Vehicle with SRS airbags and lap/
shoulder restraints for driver, front
passenger, and window-side rear pas-
sengers
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint
system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front
seating position and each rear window-side seating
positions. The supplemental restraint system (SRS)
consists of six airbags.
The configurations are as follows:
" Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal airbags
" Driver’s and front passenger’s side airbags
" Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers)
1-60
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
These SRS airbags are designed only as a supple-
ment to the primary protection provided by the
seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners.
For operation instructions and precautions concerning
the seatbelt pretensioner, see the “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” section in this chapter.
" To obtain maximum protection in the event of
an accident, the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the
vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection
provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combina-
tion with the seatbelts, it offers the best com-
bined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of
severe injury or death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning
the seatbelt system, see the “Seatbelts” sec-
tions in this chapter.
" Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the
SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed – faster than the blink
of an eye – and force to protect in high speed
collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an
occupant whose body is too close to SRS air-
bag.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help
avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air-
bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi-
tion such as one thrown forward during pre-ac-
cident braking.
Even when properly positioned, there remains
a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and bruises to the
face or arms because of the SRS airbag deploy-
ment force.
" The SRS airbags deploy with considerable
speed and force. Occupants who are out of
proper position when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
" Do not place any objects over or near the
1-61
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS
airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could interfere with its proper operation and
could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause
injury.
" Put children aged 12 and under in the rear
seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill children, espe-
cially if they are 12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-
cause children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recommend that
ALL children (including those in child seats and
those that have outgrown child restraint devic-
es) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at
all times in a child restraint device or in a seat-
belt, whichever is appropriate for the child’s
age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in-
cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR
seats at all times.
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-
ing positions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions concerning
the child restraint system, see the “Child re-
straint systems” section in this chapter.
" NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING
CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
" Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on
HS1034BA
1-62
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the front passenger’s seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
" When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke
will be released. This smoke could cause
breathing problems for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or
your passengers have breathing problems after
SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
" A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Oc-
cupants could get burnt if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain
to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags
by alerting him to the applicable section in this
owner’s manual.
1-63
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! Components
Sedan
1
2
3
4
5
6
18
19
23
22
8
11
13
20
17
20
12
10
7
9
21
20
20
14
16
15
UB1219BB
1) Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensors)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front pas-
senger’s side)
4) Front sub sensor (left hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passen-
ger’s side)
8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left
hand side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar
right hand side)
10) Airbag wiring (yellow)
11)Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side)
13) Side airbag sensor (rear wheel
house right hand side)
14) Side airbag sensor (rear wheel
house left hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (driver’s
side)
18) Seatbelt buckle switch (front pas-
senger’s side)
19) Driver’s seat position sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system weight sensor
21) Front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion control module
22) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
23) SRS airbag system warning light
1-64
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Station wagon
1
2
3
4
5
20
20
21
9
7
10
12
20
17
20
13
6
18
19
23
22
8
11
14
15
16
UB1218BB
1) Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensors)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front pas-
senger’s side)
4) Front sub sensor (left hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passen-
ger’s side)
8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left
hand side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar
right hand side)
10) Airbag wiring (yellow)
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side)
13) Side airbag sensor (rear wheel
house right hand side)
14) Side airbag sensor (rear wheel
house left hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (driver’s
side)
18) Seatbelt buckle switch (front pas-
senger’s side)
19) Driver’s seat position sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system weight sensor
21) Front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion control module
22) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
23) SRS airbag system warning light
1-65
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem
Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru advanced
frontal airbag system that complies with the new ad-
vanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No.
208.
The Subaru advanced frontal airbag system automat-
ically determines the deployment force of the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of
the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the driver’s and
front passenger’s sun visors beginning with the phrase
“EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-
tached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase
“Even with Advanced Air Bags”. Make sure that you
carefully read the instructions on the warning labels
and tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. Subaru advanced frontal
airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and
must be used in combination with a seatbelt. All occu-
pants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appro-
priate child restraint system.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center
portion of the steering wheel. The front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dash-
board under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy and
supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact on
the driver’s and front passenger’s head and chest.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
HG1043BA
1-66
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat. The SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
force and can injure or even kill the child.
HS1070BA
HS1069BA
1-67
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force. Occupants who are out of
proper position when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help
avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air-
bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi-
tion such as one thrown toward the front of the
vehicle during pre-accident braking.
Do not put any objects over the steering wheel
pad and dashboard. If the SRS frontal airbag
deploys, those objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be propelled inside
the vehicle and cause injury.
HS1084BA
UB1512BA
1-68
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or
fit an extra-wide mirror over the rear view mir-
ror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could seriously
injure vehicle occupants.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage in-
flator. The inflator operates in different ways depend-
ing on the severity of impact, backward-forward ad-
justment of the driver’s seat position and whether or
not he/she is wearing the seatbelt.
The backward-forward adjustment of the driver’s seat
position is monitored by the driver’s seat position sen-
sor under the driver’s seat.
Whether or not the driver is wearing the seatbelt is
monitored by the seatbelt buckle switch.
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so
may cause the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the seat
position sensor to malfunction, preventing the Subaru
advanced frontal airbag system from functioning cor-
rectly or causing the system to fail.
" Do not place articles/metal objects or install any ac-
cessory other than a genuine SUBARU accessory un-
der the driver’s seat. Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to kick the driver’s seat or push up its bottom sur-
face with his/her feet.
" Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle or
under the driver’s seat.
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the driver’s seat
position sensor have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Although the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag can deploy regardless of the backward-
forward adjustment of the driver’s seat position even
when the warning light is on, have the system inspect-
ed by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light comes on.
UB1586BA
1-69
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
The driver’s SRS side airbag, SRS curtain airbag
and seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled by the
Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual
stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways
depending on the severity of impact and the total load
on the seat.
The total load on the seat is monitored by the passen-
ger’s occupant detection system weight sensor under
the seat.
The detection system monitors the total load on the
seat and, based on this, determines as to whether or
not the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should be
activated.
Depending on the weight sensor output, only the driv-
er’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy. This is normal.
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so
may prevent the Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem from functioning correctly or cause the system to
fail.
" Do not apply any strong impact to the front passen-
ger’s seat such as by kicking.
" Do not spill liquid on the front passenger’s seat. If
liquid is spilt, wipe it off immediately.
" Do not remove or disassemble the front passen-
ger’s seat.
" Do not install any accessory (such as an audio am-
plifier) other than a genuine SUBARU accessory un-
der the front passenger’s seat.
" Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under
the front passenger’s seat.
" The front passenger’s seat must not be used with
the head restraint removed.
" Do not leave any article including a child restraint
system on the front passenger’s seat or the seatbelt
tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your ve-
hicle.
" Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle.
" Do not use front seats with their backward-forward
position and seatback not being locked into place se-
curely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust
them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to the
“Manual seat” in the front seats section in Chapter 1 in
this owner’s manual. (Models equipped with manual
seats only)
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or passenger’s occu-
pant detection system weight sensor have failed, the
SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. Have
the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-
diately if the SRS airbag system warning light comes
on.
1-70
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect
the proper function of the Subaru advanced frontal air-
bag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUB-
ARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag, SRS cur-
tain airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are not con-
trolled by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indica-
tors
:Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
:Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indi-
cators show you the status of the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the clock in the cen-
tral portion of the instrument panel.
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 sec-
onds during which time the system is checked. Follow-
PASS AIR BAGPASS AIR BAG
ONON
ON
OUT.
DISP
OFF
PASS AIR BAG
OFF ON
UB3208EA
ON or
OFF or
1-71
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
ing the system check, both indicators extinguish for 2
seconds. After this, one of the indicators illuminates
depending on the status of the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag reached by the Subaru advanced frontal
airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated,
the passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator will illumi-
nate while the OFF indicator will remain extinguished.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is deacti-
vated, the passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator will
remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will illumi-
nate.
If both the ON and OFF indicators remain lit or extin-
guished simultaneously, the system is faulty. Contact
your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
! Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag is not activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag will not be
activated when any of the following conditions are met
regarding the front passenger’s seat:
" The seat is empty.
" The seat is equipped with a rearward facing child re-
straint system and an infant is restrained with it.
" The seat is equipped with a forward facing child re-
straint system and a small child is restrained with it.
" The seat is equipped with a booster seat and a small
child is in the booster seat.
" The seat is relieved of the occupant load for a time
exceeding the predetermined period.
" The seat is occupied by a child who has outgrown a
child restraint system or a small adult.
" The front passenger’s occupant detection system is
faulty.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT
EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS
FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure
to install it in the REAR seat in a correct man-
ner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any
forward facing child seat or booster seat be in-
stalled in the REAR seat, and that even children
who have outgrown a child restraint system be
also seated in the REAR seat. This is because
children sitting in the front passenger’s seat
may be killed or severely injured should the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploy.
REAR seats are the safest place for children.
When the front passenger’s seat is occupied by a
child, observe the following precautions. Failure to do
so may increase the load on the front passenger’s
1-72
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
seat, activating the front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag even though that seat is occupied by a child.
" Do not place any article on the seat other than the
child occupant and a child restraint system.
" Do not place more than one child on the seat.
" Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV
onto the seatback.
" Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket.
" Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her
hands or legs on the front passenger’s seatback, or al-
low him/her to pull the seatback.
" If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indi-
cator illuminates and the OFF indicator extin-
guishes even when an infant or a small child is
in a child restraint system (including booster
seat)
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator illumi-
nates and the OFF indicator extinguishes even when
an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system
(including booster seat). Remove the child restraint
system from the seat. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as well as the child
restraint system installation procedures in the “Child
restraint systems” section in this chapter, correctly in-
stall the child restraint system. Turn the ignition switch
to the “ON” position and make sure that the front pas-
senger’s frontal airbag ON indicator goes out and the
OFF indicator comes on.
If still the ON indicator illuminates while the OFF indi-
cator extinguishes, take the following actions.
" Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other
than the child restraint system and the child occupant.
" Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback
pocket.
" Ensure that the backward-forward position and
seatback of front passenger’s seat are locked into
place securely by moving the seat back and forth.
(Models equipped with manual seats only)
If the ON indicator still illuminates while the OFF indi-
cator extinguishes after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, relocate the child restraint sys-
tem to the rear seat and immediately contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child restraint
system or a small adult is seated in the front pas-
senger’s seat, the Subaru advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag depending on the occu-
pant’s seating posture. If the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indicator il-
luminates while the OFF indicator extinguishes),
1-73
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
take the following actions.
" Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other
than the occupant.
" Ensure that there is no article left in the seat-
back pocket.
If the ON indicator still illuminates while the OFF
indicator extinguishes despite the fact that the ac-
tions noted above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even
if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it
is recommended that on subsequent trips the
child/small adult always take the rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child restraint system
should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of wheth-
er the airbag is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag will be acti-
vated for deployment upon impact when any of the fol-
lowing conditions is met regarding the front passen-
ger’s seat.
" When the seat is occupied by an adult.
" When a heavy article is placed on the seat.
When the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an
adult, observe the following precautions. Failure to do
so may lessen the load on the front passenger’s seat,
deactivating the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
despite the fact that the seat is occupied by an adult.
" Do not allow the rear seat occupant to lift the front
passenger’s seat cushion using his/her feet.
" Do not place any article under the front passenger’s
seat, or squeeze any article from behind and under the
seat. This may lift the seat cushion.
" Do not squeeze any article between the front pas-
senger’s seat and side trim/pillar, door or center con-
sole box. This may lift the seat cushion.
" If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF indicator
illuminates and the ON indicator extinguishes
even when the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in
the front passenger’s seat. Turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the
center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seat-
belt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the
seat to the rearmost position. If the OFF indicator re-
mains illuminated while the ON indicator remains ex-
tinguished, take the following actions.
" Ensure that there is no article, book, shoe, etc.
trapped under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or on
1-74
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the side of the seat.
" Ensure that the backward-forward position and
seatback of front passenger’s seat are locked into
place securely by moving the seat back and forth.
(Models equipped with manual seats only)
" Next, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position
and let the system complete the self check. Now, the
ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains extinguished.
If the OFF indicator still illuminates while the ON indi-
cator remains extinguished, ask the occupant to move
to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBA-
RU dealer for an inspection.
! Effect vehicle modifications made for persons
with disabilities may have on Subaru advanced
frontal airbag system operation (U.S. only)
Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, seat
belts, front bumper, front side frame, instrument panel,
combination meter, steering wheel, steering column,
tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation
of the Subaru advanced airbag system. If you have
any questions, you may contact the following Subaru
distributors:
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District of Colum-
bia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Schuman Carriage Motors, Inc.
1234 South Beretania Street, Honolulu, HI 96814
808-592-4497
<Guam>
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
P. O. Box 6066, Tamuning, Guam 96931
671-646-9126
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Subaru of Puerto Rico, Inc.
P. O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00910
787-793-2828
There are no Subaru distributors in any other U.S. ter-
ritories as of May 2004. If you are in such an area,
please contact the Subaru distributor or dealer from
which you bought your vehicle.
1-75
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! Operation
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The Subaru advanced frontal airbag system is de-
signed to determine activation or deactivation condi-
tion of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
pending on the total load on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor. For this reason, only the driv-
er’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors inside both front fenders and
the impact sensors in the airbag control module detect
a predetermined amount of force during a frontal colli-
sion, the control module sends signals to the airbag
module(s) (only driver’s module or both driver’s and
front passenger’s modules) instructing the module(s)
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags use dual stage
inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered
either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on
the severity of impact, backward-forward adjustment
of the driver’s seat position and fastening/unfastening
of the seatbelt in the case of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag and depending on the severity of impact and
the total load on the seat in the case of the front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbag. After the deployment, the
SRS airbag immediately start to deflate so that the
driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required
A
B
UB1575BB
1-76
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS air-
bag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an
eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys
and the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bags deploy, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
belt pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would
activate in a non-accident situation, should it occur,
the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vi-
sion and will not interfere with the driver’s ability to
maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be
released. These occurrences are normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
Do not touch the SRS airbag system compo-
nents around the steering wheel and dash-
board with bare hands right after deployment.
Doing so can cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of deployment.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe frontal colli-
sion. It is basically not designed to deploy in lesser
frontal impacts because the necessary protection can
be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they are basi-
cally not designed to deploy in side or rear impacts or
in roll-over accidents because deployment of only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags would not help the
occupant in those situations. The driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compartment during a
collision. That level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the visible
damage done to the vehicle itself.
1-77
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
" Examples of accident in which the driver’s/driv-
er’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
will most likely deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a
vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or high-
er activates only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags.
The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is
exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and mag-
nitude to the above-mentioned collision.
" Examples of the types of accidents in which it
is possible that the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy.
The only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driv-
er’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags may be
UB1513BA
UB1544BA
1-78
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in
the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as
when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely
bumped or knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
" Examples of the types of accidents in which de-
ployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to de-
ploy.
There are many types of collisions which might not
UB1514BA
1-79
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
necessarily require deployment of driver’s/driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign
pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load bed, or if it sus-
tains an oblique offset frontal impact, the driver’s/driv-
er’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) may
not deploy depending on the level of accident forces
involved.
" Examples of the types of accidents in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) will basically not deploy.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
are designed basically not to deploy if the vehicle is
UB1515BA
1-80
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
struck from side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision.
A) First impact
B) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more
than once, the driver’s and/or front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first im-
pact.
Example: In the case of a double collision, first with an-
other vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immedi-
ate succession, once either or both of the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are activated
on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the
second impact.
! SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air-
bag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each
front seatback, which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS
side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle de-
ploys between the occupant and the door panel and
supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on
the occupant’s chest.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is
stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a
point over the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is lo-
cated at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS
curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle de-
ploys between the occupant and the side window and
supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on
the occupant’s head.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are
designed as only a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not
B
A
US1559BB
1-81
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. It is
also important to wear your seatbelt to help
avoid injuries that can result when an occupant
is not seated in a proper upright position.
" Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to ei-
ther front door. The SRS side airbag is stored in
both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and
it provides protection by deploying rapidly
(faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a
side impact collision. However, the force of
SRS side airbag deployment may cause injuries
if your head or other body parts are too close to
the SRS side airbag.
" Since your vehicle is equipped with SRS cur-
tain airbags, do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the front or rear door on either side.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cab-
in is stored in the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point over the rear seat), and it pro-
vides protection by deploying rapidly (faster
than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side
impact. However, the force of its deployment
may cause injuries if your head is too close to
it.
UB1220BA
1-82
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Do not rest your arm on either front door or its
internal trim. It could be injured in the event of
SRS side airbag deployment.
HS1093BA UB1579BA
HS1095BA
1-83
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
" Never allow a child to kneel on the front pas-
senger’s seat facing the side window or to wrap
his/her arms around the front seatback. In the
event of an accident, the force of the SRS side
airbag deployment could injure the child seri-
ously because his/her head or arms or other
body parts are too close to the SRS side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag, children aged
12 and under should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly restrained at all
times.
" Never allow a child to kneel on the front and
rear passenger’s seat facing the side window.
In the event of an accident, the force of the SRS
curtain airbag deployment could injure the
child seriously because his/her head is close to
the SRS curtain airbag.
" Do not attach accessories to the door trim or
near either SRS side airbags and do not place
objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event
of the SRS side airbag deployment, they could
be propelled dangerously toward the vehicle’s
occupants and cause injuries.
" Do not attach a hands-free microphone or
any other accessory to a front pillar, a center
pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface
that would be near a deploying SRS curtain air-
bag. A hands-free microphone or other acces-
HS1096BA
1-84
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
sory in such a location could be propelled
through the cabin with great force by the cur-
tain airbag, or it could prevent correct deploy-
ment of the curtain airbag. In either case, the re-
sult could be serious injuries.
" Do not hang coathangers or other pointed
objects on the coat hooks. If such items were
hanging on the coat hooks during deployment
of the SRS curtain airbags, they could cause
serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks
and being thrown through the cabin or by pre-
venting deployment of the curtain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks,
make sure there are no sharp objects in the
pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers.
Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other
objects over either front seatback and do not
attach labels or stickers to the front seat sur-
face on or near the SRS side airbag. They could
prevent proper deployment of the SRS side air-
bag, reducing protection available to the front
seat’s occupant.
UB1587BA
1-85
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! Operation
A) SRS curtain airbags operation
B) SRS side airbags operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag can func-
tion only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS side airbags
and SRS curtain airbags deploy independently of each
other since each has its own impact sensor. There-
fore, they may not both deploy in the same accident.
Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag de-
ploys independently of the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel and in-
strument panel.
An impact sensor is incorporated into each of the ve-
hicle’s center and rear pillars. If either sensor detects
a certain predetermined amount of force during a side
impact collision, the control module sends a signal to
the side airbag module and curtain airbag module on
the impacted side of the vehicle, instructing them to in-
flate the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag.
Then the side airbag module and curtain airbag mod-
ule produces gas, which instantly inflates the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag. After the deploy-
ment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to de-
flate. The time required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is
shorter than the blink of an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while fol-
lowing deployment then slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys
even when no one occupies the seat on the side on
which an impact is applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag de-
ploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard
and some smoke will be released. These occurrences
are normal result of the deployment. This smoke does
not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
A
B
UB1543CB
1-86
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Do not touch the SRS side airbag system com-
ponents around the front seatback with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the components can be
very hot as a result of deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any part of the
SRS curtain airbag system (from the front pillar
to the part of the roof side over the rear seat).
Doing so can cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are de-
signed to deploy in the event of an accident involving
a moderate to severe side impact collision. It is basi-
cally not designed to deploy in lesser side impact. Al-
so, it is basically not designed to deploy in frontal or
rear impacts because SRS side airbag and SRS cur-
tain airbag deployment would not help the occupant in
those situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are de-
signed to function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment
depend on the level of force experienced in the pas-
senger compartment during a side impact collision.
That level differs from one type of collision to another,
and it may have no bearing on the visible damage
done to the vehicle itself.
" Example of the type of accident in which the
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag will
most likely deploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat activates the
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag.
UB1556BA
1-87
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
" Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy.
A
B
C
D
E
UB1517BB
A) The vehicle is involved in an ob-
lique side-on impact.
B) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicin-
ity of the passenger compartment.
C) The vehicle strikes a telephone
pole or similar object.
D) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
E) The vehicle rolls onto its side or
roof.
1-88
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
There are many types of collisions which might not
necessarily require SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air-
bag may not deploy depending on the level of accident
forces involved.
" Examples of the types of accidents in which the
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag will ba-
sically not deploy.
A) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another
vehicle (moving or stationary).
A
B
UB1545BB
1-89
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
B) The vehicle is struck from behind.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are basi-
cally not designed to deploy if the vehicle is involved in
a frontal collision or is struck from behind. Examples of
such accidents are illustrated.
A) First impact
B) Second impact
a) SRS curtain airbag
b) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side
more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploys only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side impact collision,
first with one vehicle and immediately followed by an-
other from the same direction, once the SRS side air-
bag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first
impact, they will not be activated on the second.
! SRS airbag system monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi-
ness of the SRS airbag system (including front seat-
belt pretensioners) while the vehicle is being driven.
The SRS airbag system warning light “AIRBAG” will
show normal system operation by lighting for about 6
seconds when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
A
a
b
B
UB1581BB
UB7507JA
1-90
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
position.
The following components are monitored by the indi-
cator:
" Front sub sensor (Right hand side)
" Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
" Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
" Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
" Frontal airbag module (Front passenger’s side)
" Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right hand side)
" Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left hand side)
" Side airbag module (Driver’s side)
" Side airbag module (Front passenger’s side)
" Side airbag sensor (Rear wheel house right hand
side)
" Side airbag sensor (Rear wheel house left hand
side)
" Curtain airbag module (Right side)
" Curtain airbag module (Left side)
" Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
" Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passenger’s side)
" Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)
" Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passenger’s side)
" Driver’s seat position sensor
" Front passenger’s occupant detection system
weight sensor
" Front passenger’s occupant detection control mod-
ule
" Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indi-
cator
" All related wiring
If the warning light exhibits any of the following
conditions, there may be a malfunction in the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-
tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your
nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system
checked. Unless checked and properly re-
paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS air-
bags may inflate in a very minor collision or not
inflate in a severe collision), which may in-
crease the risk of injury.
" Flashing or flickering of the indicator light
" No illumination of the warning light when the
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” posi-
tion
" Continuous illumination of the warning light
" Illumination of the warning light while driving
1-91
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
! SRS airbag system servicing
" When discarding an airbag module or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
" The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable
parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the SRS airbag system.
For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see
your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with
or disconnecting the system’s wiring could re-
sult in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or
could make the system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of
the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow
insulation and system connectors are yellow
for easy identification.
If you need service or repair in areas listed be-
low, have an authorized SUBARU dealer per-
form the work. The SRS airbag control module,
impact sensors and airbag modules are stored
in these areas.
" Under the center console
" Inside each front fender
" Steering wheel and column and nearby areas
" Top of the dashboard on front passenger’s
side and nearby areas
" Each front seat and nearby area
" Inside each center pillar
" In each roof side (from the front pillar to a
point over the rear seat)
" Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel
house on each side
In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, re-
placement of the system should be performed
only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the
components of the SRS airbag system are re-
placed, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your SUBARU deal-
er as soon as possible.
" The front part of the vehicle was involved in an
accident in which the only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag or both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
" The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag, or either
1-92
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the
rear seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
" Either center pillar and rear wheel house or a
nearby area of the vehicle was involved in an acci-
dent in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag did not deploy.
" The fabric or leather of either front seatback is
cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged.
! Precautions against vehicle modifica-
tion
" To avoid accidental activation of the system
or rendering the system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components or wiring of
the SRS airbag system.
This includes following modifications:
" Installation of custom steering wheels
" Attachment of additional trim materials to
the dashboard
" Installation of custom seats
" Replacement of seat fabric or leather
" Installation of additional fabric or leather
on the front seat
" Attachment of a hands-free microphone or
any other accessory to a front pillar, a center
pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other cabin sur-
face that would be near a deploying SRS cur-
tain airbag.
" Installation of additional electrical/electronic
equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on
or near the SRS airbag system components
and/or wiring is not advisable. This could inter-
fere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system.
Do not perform any of the following modifica-
tions. Such modifications can interfere with
proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
" Attachment of any equipment (bush bar,
winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than
genuine SUBARU accessory parts.
" Modification of the suspension system or
front end structure.
" Installation of a tire of different size and con-
struction from the tires specified on the vehicle
1-93
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
placard attached to the driver’s door pillar or
specified for individual vehicle models in this
Owner’s Manual.
" Attachment of any equipment (side steps or
side sill protectors, etc.) other than genuine
SUBARU accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in-
stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.
2-1
2
Keys and doors
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
Key number ....................................................... 2-3
Immobilizer (if equipped) ............................. 2-4
Security ID plate ................................................ 2-5
Security indicator light ..................................... 2-5
Key replacement ............................................... 2-6
Door locks ..................................................... 2-6
Locking and unlocking from the outside ........ 2-6
Locking and unlocking from the inside .......... 2-8
Battery drainage prevention function ............. 2-9
Power door locking switches ...................... 2-10
Key lock-in prevention function ...................... 2-11
Remote keyless entry system
(if equipped) .............................................. 2-12
Locking the doors ............................................. 2-13
Unlocking the doors ......................................... 2-14
Unlocking the trunk lid/rear gate ..................... 2-14
Illuminated entry ............................................... 2-15
Vehicle finder function ..................................... 2-15
Sounding a panic alarm ................................... 2-15
Selecting audible signal operation .................. 2-15
Replacing the battery ....................................... 2-16
Replacing lost transmitters .............................. 2-17
Alarm system ................................................ 2-23
System alarm operation ................................... 2-23
Activating and deactivating the alarm
system ............................................................. 2-23
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................. 2-24
Arming the system ............................................ 2-24
Disarming the system ....................................... 2-26
Valet mode ......................................................... 2-27
Passive arming ................................................. 2-27
Tripped sensor identification .......................... 2-29
Shock sensors (dealer option) ........................ 2-29
Child safety locks ......................................... 2-30
Windows ........................................................ 2-31
Power windows ................................................. 2-31
Trunk lid (Sedan) ........................................... 2-35
To open and close the trunk lid from
outside ............................................................ 2-35
To open the trunk lid from inside .................... 2-36
To lock and unlock the trunk lid release
lever ................................................................. 2-36
Internal trunk lid release handle ...................... 2-37
Rear gate (Station wagon) ............................ 2-39
Moonroof (if equipped) ................................. 2-41
Tilting/sliding moonroof (Sedan) .................... 2-42
Moonroof (Station wagon) ............................... 2-44
2-2
Keys and doors
Keys and doors
Keys
Vehicle with immobilizer system
A) Master key
B) Submaster key
C) Valet key
D) Key number plate
E) Security ID plate
Vehicle without immobilizer system
A) Master key
B) Submaster key
C) Valet key
D) Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle.
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your
vehicle.
" Ignition switch
" Driver’s door
" Glove box
" Trunk lid release lever
D
E
CBA
UB2227BB
AB C
D
UB2228BB
2-3
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door
locks. You can keep the trunk and glove box locked
when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking
facility.
NOTE
If the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large
bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on
it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted
turning of the ignition switch. Also, if a large key-
holder is attached to the key, your knees or hands
may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ig-
nition switch.
! Key number
A) Key number plate
B) Security ID plate
The key number is stamped on the metal plate at-
tached to the key set. Write down the key number and
keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement key if you
lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle.
For information on making replacement keys for vehi-
cle with immobilizer system, refer to the “Immobilizer
(if equipped)” in this chapter.
A
B
UB2534BB
2-4
Keys and doors
Immobilizer (if equipped)
The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an un-
authorized person from starting the engine. Only keys
registered with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if an unregis-
tered key fits into the ignition switch and can be turned
to the “START” position, the engine will automatically
stop after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a transponder in which
the key’s ID code is stored. When a key is inserted into
the ignition switch and turned to the “ON” position, the
transponder transmits the key’s ID code to the immo-
bilizer system’s receiver. If the transmitted ID code
matches the ID code registered in the immobilizer sys-
tem, the system allows the engine to be started. Since
the ID code is transmitted and acted upon almost in-
stantly, the immobilizer system does not impede nor-
mal starting of the engine.
If the engine fails to start, pull out the key once before
trying again. (Refer to the “Ignition switch” section
[chapter 3].)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE
To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay
close attention to the following security precau-
tions:
" Never leave your vehicle unattended with its
keys inside.
" Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows
and lock the doors and rear gate.
" Do not leave spare keys or any record of your
key number in the vehicle.
Do not get the key wet. If the key gets wet, wipe
it dry with a cloth immediately.
2-5
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
! Security ID plate
A) Key number plate
B) Security ID plate
The security ID is stamped on the metal plate attached
to the key set. Write down the security ID and keep it
in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number
is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your
key or lock it inside the vehicle.
This number is also needed for replacement or repair
of the engine control unit, integrated unit, and combi-
nation meter.
! Security indicator light
The security indicator light deters potential thieves by
indicating that the vehicle is equipped with an immobi-
lizer system. It begins flashing about 60 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position or immediately after the
key is pulled out.
If the security indicator light does not flash, the immo-
bilizer system may be faulty. If this occurs, contact
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g. an imitation
key), the security indicator light comes on.
A
B
UB2534BB UB7507KA
2-6
Keys and doors
NOTE
Even if the security indicator light flashes irregu-
larly or its fuse blows (the light does not flash if its
fuse is blown), the immobilizer system will func-
tion normally.
! Key replacement
Your key number plate and security ID plate will be re-
quired if you ever need a replacement key made. Any
new key must be registered for use with your vehicle’s
immobilizer system before it can be used. Up to four
keys can be registered for use with one vehicle.
For security, all the keys registered with your vehicle’s
immobilizer system will have their ID codes erased
and re-registered when a new key is made. Therefore,
all of your vehicle’s keys must be presented when a
new key is registered. Any key that is not re-registered
when a new key is made cannot be used after the oth-
er keys are re-registered. For information on replace-
ment keys and on the registration of keys with your im-
mobilizer system, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Door locks
! Locking and unlocking from the out-
side
To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the
key toward the rear. To unlock the door, turn the key
toward the front.
Lift the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.
UB2205BA
2-7
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Locking without the key
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without the key, ro-
tate the lock lever rearward and then close the door.
Locking without the key
1) Push the power door locking switch forward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the power door
locking switch, push the switch forward (“LOCK” side)
and then close the door. In this case, all closed doors
and the rear gate (for Station wagon) are locked at the
same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are
locked before leaving your vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the
2
1
UB2535BB
LOCK
2
1
UB2535CB
2-8
Keys and doors
vehicle before locking the doors from the outside
without the key.
! Locking and unlocking from the inside
Keep all doors locked when you drive, especial-
ly when small children are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child
restraints, locking the doors reduces the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers from falling
out if a door is accidentally opened, and intrud-
ers from unexpectedly opening doors and en-
tering your vehicle.
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever
rearward.
UB2536BA
2-9
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
To unlock the door from the inside, rotate the lock le-
ver forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door
is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate
(Station wagon) are closed and locked before starting
to drive.
! Battery drainage prevention function
When a door or the rear gate is not completely closed
and the dome light, ignition switch light, and door open
warning light remain illuminated as a result, the lights
are automatically turned off by the battery drainage
prevention function after 10 minutes of illumination to
prevent the battery from going dead. The operational/
non-operational setting of this function can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer if you would like to change the set-
ting.
NOTE
" When leaving the vehicle, please make sure that
all doors and the rear gate are completely closed.
" The battery drainage prevention function does
not operate while the key is in the ignition switch.
UB2505BA
2-10
Keys and doors
Power door locking switches
Driver’s switch
A) Lock
B) Unlock
Front passenger’s switch
A) Lock
B) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate (Station wagon) can be
locked and unlocked by the power door locking switch-
es located at the driver’s side and the front passen-
ger’s side doors.
To lock all doors (including the rear gate of a Station
wagon), push the switch to the front (“LOCK”) position.
To unlock all doors (including the rear gate of a Station
wagon), pull the switch to the rear position.
When you close the doors after you set the door locks,
LOCK
A
B
UB2537BB
A
B
UB2206BB
2-11
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
the doors remain locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the
vehicle before locking the doors from the outside
using power door locking switches.
! Key lock-in prevention function
This function prevents the doors from being locked
with the key still in the ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function
operative
With the driver’s door open, the doors are automatical-
ly kept unlocked even if the door locking switch is
pushed to the front (“LOCK”) position.
! Behavior with key lock-in prevention function
non-operative
" If the lock lever is turned to the rear (“LOCK”) posi-
tion with the driver’s door open and the driver’s door is
then closed with the lock lever in that position, the driv-
er’s door is locked.
" If the spare key is used to lock the driver’s door from
the outside of the vehicle, the door is locked.
This function’s operative/non-operative setting can be
changed.
The setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for details.
NOTE
When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are hold-
ing the key before locking the doors.
2-12
Keys and doors
Remote keyless entry system (if
equipped)
" Do not expose the transmitter to severe
shocks, such as those experienced as a result
of dropping or throwing.
" Do not take the transmitter apart except when
replacing the battery.
" Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet,
wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Two transmitters are provided for your vehicle.
The keyless entry system has the following functions.
" Locking and unlocking the doors (and rear gate on
the Station wagon) without a key
" Locking and unlocking the doors (and trunk lid on
the Sedan) without key
" Unlocking the rear gate on the Station wagon with-
out key
" Unlocking the trunk lid on the Sedan without key
" Sounding a panic alarm
" Arming and disarming the security system (if your
vehicle is equipped with an optional security system).
See the next section “Alarm system” for detailed infor-
mation.
The operable distance of the keyless entry system is
approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this dis-
tance will vary depending on environmental condi-
tions. The system’s operable distance will be shorter
in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast
station, TV tower, or remote controller of home elec-
tronic appliances.
The keyless entry system does not operate when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
2-13
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
: Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button
: Unlock/disarm button
: Lock/arm button
A: Panic button
a: Front
b: Back
! Locking the doors
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and rear gate
(Station wagon). An electronic chirp will sound once
and the turn signal lights will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) is not fully
closed, an electronic chirp will sound five times and
the turn signal lights will flash five times to alert you
that the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not prop-
erly closed. When you close the door, it will automati-
cally lock and then an electronic chirp will sound once
and the turn signal lights will flash once.
ab
A
UB2207BB
UB2211CA
2-14
Keys and doors
! Unlocking the doors
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s door. An
electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal
lights will flash twice. To unlock all doors and rear gate
(Station wagon), briefly press the “ ” button a sec-
ond time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and second press-
es of the “ ” button (for unlocking of all of the
doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the
system may not respond.
! Unlocking the trunk lid/rear gate
! Sedan
The trunk lid unlocks when the “ ” button is
pressed continuously for at least 2 seconds. An elec-
tronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights
will flash twice.
! Station wagon
Pressing the “ ” button opens the rear gate.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal
lights will flash twice.
UB2211DA UB2211EA
2-15
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
! Illuminated entry
The interior (dome) light will illuminate when the
“ ” button is pressed. This light stays illuminated
for approximately 30 seconds if any of the doors or the
rear gate (Station wagon) is not opened.
If the “ ” button is pressed before 30 seconds have
elapsed, this light will go out. The interior light must be
set to the middle position in order for this function to
operate.
A SUBARU dealer can change the illumination period
setting of the interior light in accordance with your
preference. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details.
! Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle parked among
many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are
within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
“ ” button three times in a five-second period will
cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once and its turn
signal lights to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too short when
you press the “ ” button three times, the sys-
tem may not respond to the signals from the re-
mote transmitter.
! Sounding a panic alarm
A “PANIC” button is located on the back of the trans-
mitter.
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC” button once.
The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press the “ ”,
“ ”, “ ” or the “PANIC” button. Unless a but-
ton on the remote is pressed, the alarm will be deacti-
vated after approximately 30 seconds.
! Selecting audible signal operation
Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an
audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If de-
UB2222BA
2-16
Keys and doors
sired, you may turn the audible signal off.
To turn the audible signal off, unlock the doors by
pushing “ ” button and then simultaneously de-
press “ ” and “ ” buttons for more than two sec-
onds. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn
signal lights will flash twice to inform you that the audi-
ble signal has been turned off.
To turn the audible signal on, unlock the doors by
pushing “ ” button and then simultaneously de-
press “ ” and “ ” buttons for more than two sec-
onds. An electronic chirp will sound once and the turn
signal lights will flash once to inform you that the audi-
ble signal has been turned on.
You may have the above settings done by your SUB-
ARU dealer.
! Replacing the battery
Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the
transmitter when replacing the battery.
When the transmitter battery begins to get weak,
transmitter range will begin to decrease and the LED
will not illuminate. Replace the battery as soon as pos-
sible.
To replace the battery:
1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-head screw-
driver.
UB2208BA
2-17
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
2. Remove the old battery from the holder.
A) Negative (–) side facing up
3. Replace with a new battery (Type CR2025 or
equivalent) making sure to install the new battery with
the negative (–) side facing up.
4. Refit the removed half of the transmitter case.
After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must
be synchronized with the keyless entry system’s
control unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” but-
ton six times to synchronize the unit.
! Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional
UB2209BA
A
UB2210BB
2-18
Keys and doors
transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you
should re-program all of your transmitters for security
reasons. It is recommended that you have your dealer
program all of your transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with a special
code learning feature that allows you to program new
transmitter codes into the system or to delete old
ones. The system can learn up to four unique transmit-
ter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the
same or different.
Programming transmitter codes into system:
Bag containing transmitter
Transmitter circuit board
To register a new transmitter with the keyless entry
system, it is necessary to program the transmitter’s
code (identification number) into the system. A label
showing the code is affixed to the bag containing the
transmitter, and another is affixed to the circuit board
inside the transmitter. If there is no bag, open the
transmitter case and make a note of the eight-digit
number. Program the number into the system in ac-
cordance with the following procedure:
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear gate or trunk lid.
2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the driver’s seat, and
close the door.
UB2223BA
UB2224BA
2-19
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
3. Perform the following steps within 45 seconds.
1)Open and close the driver’s door once.
A) LOCK
B) ON
2)Insert the key into the ignition switch, then turn it
from the “LOCK” position to the “ON” position 10
times within 15 seconds.
NOTE
" When you complete step 2), an electronic tone
will sound once, a buzzer will continue to sound
and the interior light will continue to flash until the
transmitter codes are completely registered.
" If you do not perform steps 1) and 2) within 45
seconds, an error will occur. Neither an electronic
tone nor the buzzer will sound, and the interior
HS2019CA
B
A
UB2215CB
2-20
Keys and doors
lamp will not flash. In this event, perform the
whole procedure again beginning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within 15 seconds.
NOTE
" When part 4 of the procedure is completed, an
electronic tone will sound for 30 seconds.
" If you do not perform the operations in part 4
within 15 seconds, an error will occur and the elec-
tronic tone will not sound. In this event, perform
the registration steps again beginning with part 3
of the procedure.
5. Before the electronic tone stops sounding, press
the power door lock knob to the “LOCK” side the same
number of times as the leftmost digit of the transmitter
code. For example, press the lock knob eight times if
the leftmost digit of the code is 8.
NOTE
" The electronic tone will stop sounding when you
start entering the number.
" If you do not start entering the number using the
lock knob before the electronic tone stops sound-
ing, an error will occur. In this event, perform the
registration steps again beginning with part 3 of
the procedure.
" If the interval between one push of the knob and
the next exceeds five seconds, an error will occur.
In this event, perform the procedure again begin-
ning with part 4. If an error occurs six times, per-
form the procedure again starting with part 3.
LOCK
UB2537CA
2-21
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
6. When you have finished entering the number, pull
the lock knob to the “UNLOCK” side within five sec-
onds.
NOTE
" An electronic tone will sound.
" If you pull the lock knob to the “UNLOCK” side
when more than five seconds have passed, an er-
ror will occur. In this event, perform the procedure
again beginning with part 4. If an error occurs six
times, perform the procedure again starting with
part 3.
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure for each of
the remaining digits of the transmitter code beginning
with the second digit (counting from the left) and finish-
ing with the eighth digit.
NOTE
" When you finish entering the eighth digit, an
electronic tone will sound for 30 seconds.
" If the interval between one push of the knob and
the next exceeds five seconds, an error will occur.
In this event, perform the procedure again begin-
ning with part 4. If an error occurs six times, per-
form the procedure again starting with part 3.
8. Before the electronic tone stops sounding, use the
power door lock knob to again enter the transmitter
code beginning with the leftmost digit.
NOTE
If you do not start entering the number using the
lock knob before the electronic tone stops sound-
ing, an error will occur. In this event, perform the
procedure again beginning with part 3.
9. When you have finished entering the code a sec-
ond time, an electronic tone will sound for one second
and automatic door locking and unlocking operation
will take place once to indicate completion of registra-
tion, provided the code entered the second time is
identical to that entered the first time.
LOCK
UB2537DA
2-22
Keys and doors
NOTE
If the code entered the second time is not identical
to the code entered the first time, an error will oc-
cur. In this event, perform the procedure again be-
ginning with part 5. If an error occurs five times,
perform the procedure again starting with part 3.
10.If you wish to program another transmitter code
into the system (up to four transmitter codes can be
programmed into the system), perform the procedure
beginning with part 4. When you have finished pro-
gramming all of the necessary transmitter codes into
the system, remove the key from the ignition switch.
11.Test every registered transmitter to confirm correct
operation.
! Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the keyless entry system has four
memory locations to store transmitter codes, giving it
the ability to operate with up to four transmitters. When
you lose a transmitter, the lost transmitter’s code re-
mains in the memory. For security reasons, lost trans-
mitter codes should be deleted from the memory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program four trans-
mitter codes into the system. If you have only one cur-
rent transmitter, program it four times. If you have two
current transmitters, program each one twice. If you
have three current transmitters, program two of them
once and the third one twice. This process will leave
only current transmitter codes in the system’s memo-
ry.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating their keyless
entry system within range of your vehicle when
programming transmitters. If someone else were
to operate their remote transmitter while you are
programming your transmitters, it is possible that
their transmitter code will be programmed into
your system, allowing them unauthorized access
to your vehicle.
2-23
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and
valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the turn
signal lights flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
The system can be armed and disarmed with the re-
mote transmitter.
The system does not operate when the key is inserted
into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set for activa-
tion at the time of shipment from the factory. You can
set the system for deactivation yourself or have it done
by your SUBARU dealer.
! System alarm operation
The alarm system will give the following alarms when
triggered:
" The vehicle’s horn will sound and the turn signal
lights will flash for 30 seconds.
" If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) remains open
after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to
sound for a maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or the
rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the horn is sound-
ing, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30
seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
" Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk lid
" Physical impact to the vehicle, such as forced entry
(only vehicles with shock sensors (dealer option))
! Activating and deactivating the alarm
system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s alarm system
for activation or deactivation, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system (see “Disarming the sys-
tem” in this section).
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all doors (and the
rear gate if your vehicle is a Station wagon).
3. Cycle the ignition switch from “LOCK” to “ON” three
times within 10 seconds, finally placing it in the “ON”
position.
4. Within 10 seconds after step 3, open the driver’s
door and then close it. The current setting will be dis-
played on the odometer/trip meter screen.
5. Within 10 seconds after step 4, operate the driver’s
door locking switch as follows:
To deactivate:
Move the door locking switch to the unlock position
(toward the rear) three times. The odometer/trip meter
screen will display “AL OF”.
2-24
Keys and doors
To activate:
Repeat moving the door locking switch to the lock po-
sition (toward the front) three times. The odometer/trip
meter screen will display “AL ON”.
When the setting has been successfully changed, a
buzzer will sound and the odometer/trip meter screen
will display the new setting.
NOTE
You may have the above setting change done by
your SUBARU dealer.
! If you have accidentally triggered the
alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Do any of the following operations:
" Insert the key in the door lock of the driver’s door
and turn it to the unlock position.
" Press any button on the remote transmitter.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position (only
vehicle with immobilizer).
" Cycle the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to “ON”
position three times within 5 seconds (only vehicle
without immobilizer).
! Arming the system
! To arm the system using remote transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if so
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and the trunk lid)
are locked.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on the Station
wagon).
: Press to Arm the system.
: Press to Disarm the system.
UB2211BA
2-25
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than two sec-
onds). All doors (and the rear gate on the Station wag-
on) will lock, an electronic chirp will sound one time,
the turn signal lights will flash one time and the indica-
tor light starts flashing slowly (approximately twice ev-
ery two seconds).
The system will then be armed for surveillance after a
standby time of approximately 30 seconds.
If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid) is not fully
closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the turn
signal lights flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed. When you
close the door, the system will automatically arm and
doors will automatically lock.
NOTE
" The system can be armed even if the engine
hood, the windows and/or moonroofs are opened.
Always make sure that they are fully closed before
arming the system.
" The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if
you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU
dealer.
" If your vehicle is a Sedan and you unlock the
trunk using the remote transmitter’s “ ” but-
ton with the alarm system armed, the system will
be temporarily placed in a standby state. The sys-
tem will go back to the surveillance state upon
locking the trunk.
" The system is in the standby mode for a 30-sec-
ond period after locking the doors with the remote
transmitter. The security indicator light will flash
at short intervals during this period.
" If any of the following actions is done during the
standby period, the system will not switch to the
surveillance state.
" Doors are unlocked using the remote trans-
mitter.
" Any door (including the rear gate of a Station
wagon or the trunk of a Sedan) is opened.
" Ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
UB7507KA
2-26
Keys and doors
" The alarm system is triggered when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position during sur-
veillance. However, this does not occur if the vehi-
cle is equipped with an immobilizer and the key
used for turning the ignition switch has been reg-
istered.
" If your vehicle is not equipped with an immobi-
lizer, the engine does not start even when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “START” position once
the alarm system has been triggered.
! Disarming the system
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than two sec-
onds) on the remote transmitter. The driver’s door will
unlock, an electronic chirp will sound twice, the turn
signal lights will flash twice and the indicator light will
go off.
To unlock all other doors and the rear gate (Station
wagon), briefly press the “ ” button a second time.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and second press-
es of the “ ” button (for unlocking of all of the
doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the
system may not respond.
Or the system can be disarmed by the following
method, too.
" Insert the key in the door lock of the driver’s
door and turn it to the unlock position.
" Cycle the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the
“ON” position three times within 5 seconds (only
vehicle without immobilizer).
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter
(i.e. the transmitter is lost, broken or the transmitter
battery is too weak), you can disarm the system with-
out using the transmitter.
Vehicle with immobilizer
The system can be disarmed if you turn the ignition
switch from the “LOCK” to the “ON” position with a reg-
istered key.
Vehicle without immobilizer
1. Unlock the door with the key and then open the
door.
2. Insert the key into the ignition switch and cycle it
from the “LOCK” to the “ON” position three times with-
in 5 seconds.
All models
Insert the key in the door lock of the driver’s door and
turn it to the unlock position.
2-27
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
! Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the alarm system
does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmit-
ter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors
and rear gate (Station wagon) and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the setting of your ve-
hicle’s alarm system for deactivation mode. (Refer to
“Activating and deactivating the alarm system” in this
section.) The security indicator light will continue to
flash once every three seconds indicating that the sys-
tem is in the valet mode (only vehicle with an immobi-
lizer).
To exit valet mode, change the setting of your vehi-
cle’s alarm system for activation mode. (Refer to “Ac-
tivating and deactivating the alarm system” in this sec-
tion.)
NOTE
If your vehicle is not equipped with an immobiliz-
er, the security indicator light does not flash dur-
ing the valet mode.
! Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been programmed by
the dealer, arming of the system is automatically ac-
complished without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY
LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode
If you wish to program the passive arming mode, have
it done by your SUBARU dealer.
! Arming the system
In passive mode, the system will automatically
activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically
lock the doors. In order to lock the doors you
must either lock them as indicated in step 4 be-
low or with the key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually will result in
a higher security risk.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
2-28
Keys and doors
A) ON
B) LOCK
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to “LOCK” posi-
tion and remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the in-
side door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will automatically arm
after one minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also be armed
with the remote transmitter or with the power door
locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power
door lock switch is used to lock the vehicle, arming will
take place immediately regardless of whether or not
the passive mode has been selected.
! Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the “ ” button
on the transmitter.
A
B
UB2215BB UB2535BA
2-29
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
! Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when the alarm
system has been triggered. Also, the number of flash-
es indicates the location of unauthorized intrusion or
the severity of impact on the vehicle.
" When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, the indicator light will light for 1 second and then
flash as follows:
When a door or rear gate (Station wagon) was
opened: 5 times
When the trunk (Sedan) was opened: 4 times
When a strong impact or multiple impacts were
sensed: twice (only vehicles with shock sensors
(dealer option))
When a light impact was sensed: once (only vehi-
cles with shock sensors (dealer option))
! Shock sensors (dealer option)
The shock sensors trigger the alarm system when
they sense impacts applied to the vehicle and when
any of their electric wires is cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the turn signal lights to
flash for a short time when the sensed impact is weak,
but it warns of a strong impact or multiple impacts by
sounding the horn and flashing the turn signal lights,
both lasting approximately 30 seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can connect them
and set them for activation or deactivation.
NOTE
" The shock sensors are not always able to sense
impacts caused by breaking in, and cannot sense
an impact that does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue hammer).
" The shock sensors may sense vibration like
those shown below and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system and shock
sensors appropriately depending on where you
usually park your vehicle.
Example:
Vibration from construction site
Vibration in multistory car park
Vibration from trains
" You can have the sensitivity of the shock sen-
sors adjusted to your preference by your SUBARU
dealer.
2-30
Keys and doors
Child safety locks
Always use the child safety lock whenever a
child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could
result if a child accidentally opened the door
and fell out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents
the doors from being opened even if the inside door
handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position,
the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of
the position of the inner door handle lock lever. The
door can only be opened from the outside.
UB2501BA
2-31
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Windows
! Power windows
To avoid serious personal injury caused by en-
trapment, you must do the following.
" When operating the power windows, be ex-
tremely careful to prevent anyone’s fingers,
arms, neck or head from being caught in the
window.
" Always lock the passengers’ windows using
the lock switch when children are riding in the
vehicle.
" Before leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child to remain in
the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child operating the
power window.
The power windows operate only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
! Driver’s side switches
A) Lock switch
B) For driver’s window
C) For front passenger’s window
D) For rear left passenger’s window
E) For rear right passenger’s window
All door windows can be controlled by the power win-
dow switch cluster at the driver side door.
A
C
E
D
B
UB2538BB
2-32
Keys and doors
" Operating the driver’s window
A) Open
B) Automatically open
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window
will open as long as the switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature
that allows the window to be opened fully without hold-
ing the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and
the window will fully open. To stop the window half-
way, pull the switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will
close as long as the switch is held.
A
B
UB2539CB
UB2539DA
2-33
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
" Operating the passengers’ windows
To open the passengers’ windows, push the appropri-
ate switch down and hold it until the window reaches
the desired position.
To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until
it reaches the desired position.
UB2539FA
UB2539EA
2-34
Keys and doors
" Locking the passengers’ windows
To lock the passengers’ windows, push the lock
switch. When the lock switch is in the “LOCK” position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be opened or closed.
! Passengers’ side switches
Front passenger’s window switch
A) Open
B) Close
To open the window, push the switch down and hold it
until the window reaches the desired position.
UB2540BA
B
A
UB2206CB
2-35
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Rear passengers’ window switches
A) Open
B) Close
To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until
the window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power window switch
cluster, located on the driver’s side door, is in the
“LOCK” position, the passengers’ windows cannot be
operated with the passengers’ switches.
Trunk lid (Sedan)
" To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from en-
tering the vehicle, always keep the trunk lid
closed while driving.
" Help prevent young children from locking
themselves in the trunk. When leaving the vehi-
cle, either close all windows and lock all doors
or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make
certain that the trunk is closed. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the trunk could quickly
become high enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including brain damage,
particularly for small children.
! To open and close the trunk lid from
outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the remote keyless
entry system. Refer to “Remote keyless entry system
(if equipped)” section in this chapter.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk lid down
until the latch engages.
A
B
UB2216BB
2-36
Keys and doors
NOTE
Do not leave your valuables in the trunk when you
leave your vehicle.
! To open the trunk lid from inside
Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.
! To lock and unlock the trunk lid re-
lease lever
When you entrust your vehicle key to another person,
you can lock the trunk lid release lever to prevent lug-
gage in the trunk from being stolen. To lock the trunk
lid release lever, insert the master key or sub key into
the key cylinder at the rear of the release lever and
turn it counterclockwise. To unlock the trunk lid re-
lease lever, turn the key clockwise.
LOCK
UB2225BA
UB2226BA
2-37
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
! Internal trunk lid release handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a device de-
signed to open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. In the
event children or adults become locked inside the
trunk, the handle allows them to open the lid. The han-
dle is located on the inside of the trunk lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, press the
yellow handle downward as indicated by the arrow on
the handle. This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then,
push up the lid.
The handle is made of material that remains lumines-
cent for approximately an hour in the dark trunk space
after it is exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
Never allow any child to get in the trunk and
play with the release handle. If the driver starts
the vehicle without knowing that a child is in-
side the trunk and the child opens the lid using
the release handle, the child could fall out and
be killed or seriously injured.
" Do not close the lid while gripping the release
handle. The handle may be damaged.
" Do not use the handle as a hook to fasten
straps or ropes to secure your cargo in the
trunk. Such use may result in damage of the
handle.
" Load the trunk so that cargo can not strike
the release handle. If the cargo hits the handle
while the vehicle is being driven, the handle
may be pushed down and the trunk lid may
open. That may cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic safety haz-
ard.
UB2217BA
2-38
Keys and doors
! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice a year to
check the release handle for correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade. Slide the
screwdriver blade from the slit aperture of the lock as-
sembly fully to the end until you hear a click.
This places the latch in the locked position.
UB2218BA
UB2219BA
UB2220BA
2-39
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
3. Move the release handle, from outside the vehicle,
in the direction of the arrow to check if the latch is re-
leased.
If the latch is not released, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the latch, then
close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release handle feel re-
stricted or not entirely smooth during operation, or the
handle and/or handle base is cracked, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Rear gate (Station wagon)
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using either
the keyless entry system or the power door locking
switch.
Refer to the “Power door locking switches” and “Re-
mote keyless entry system (if equipped)” sections in
this chapter.
To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock
then pull the outside handle up.
UB2517BA
2-40
Keys and doors
To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull it down
holding the recessed grip.
" To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from en-
tering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate
closed while driving.
" Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while
holding the recessed grip. Also avoid closing
the rear gate by pulling on the recessed grip
from inside the cargo space. There is a danger
of your hand being caught and injured.
" Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cello-
phane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the
stays while loading or unloading cargo. That
could cause leakage of gas from the stays,
which may result in their inability to hold the
rear gate open.
" Be careful not to hit your head or face on the
rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate
and when loading or unloading cargo.
NOTE
Should the rear gate be unable to be unlocked due
to discharged battery, a fault in the door locking/
unlocking system or other causes, you can unlock
it by manually operating the rear gate lock release
lever.
For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the rear
gate cannot be unlocked” in chapter 9.
UB2500BA
2-41
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Moonroof (if equipped)
" Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head or any
objects protrude from the moonroof. He/she
could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is in-
volved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury caused by en-
trapment, you must do the following:
" Before closing the moonroof, make sure that
no one’s hands, arms, head or other objects
will be accidentally caught in the moonroof.
" Before leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child to remain in
the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child operating the
moonroof.
" Never try to check the anti-entrapment func-
tion by deliberately placing part of your body in
the moonroof.
" Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.
" Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow
or extremely cold conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
" The anti-entrapment function does not oper-
ate when the moonroof is being tilted down. Be
sure to confirm that it is safe to do so before tilt-
ing the moonroof down.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions.
The moonroofs operate only when the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position.
2-42
Keys and doors
! Tilting/sliding moonroof (Sedan)
! Tilt function
A) Tilt up
B) Tilt down
The tilting function will only operate when the moon-
roof is fully closed.
Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to raise the
moonroof.
Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to lower the
moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has been
raised or has been lowered completely. Pushing the
switch continuously may cause damage to the moon-
roof.
! Sliding function
A) Open
B) Close
Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to open the
moonroof. The sun shade will be also opened together
with the moonroof.
Push the “Open/Close” switch forward to close the
moonroof. The moonroof will stop halfway if you con-
tinue to press on the switch. Release the switch once
and push it again to close the moonroof completely.
PASSENGER
A
B
UB2202BB
PASSENGER
A
B
UB2202CB
2-43
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-way position
while opening or closing it, momentarily push the
switch to the “OPEN” or “CLOSE” side.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away
water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to pre-
vent water drops from falling into the passenger com-
partment.
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses an object trapped be-
tween its glass and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to either of the following po-
sitions according to the point at which it senses the ob-
ject:
" When the moonroof senses the object at a point be-
tween the halfway stop position and fully closed posi-
tion, it moves back to the halfway stop position and
stops there.
" When the moonroof senses the object at a point be-
tween the halfway stop position and fully open posi-
tion, it moves back to the fully open position and stops
there.
The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by
a strong shock on the moonroof even when there is
nothing trapped.
NOTE
" For the sake of safety, it is recommended that
you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.
" One-touch operation does not take place when
the moonroof is tilted up and down. Push the
switch continuously to tilt the moonroof up and
down.
" If the moonroof cannot be closed through the
switch operation because of system failure, it can
be closed manually using a hex-head wrench. For
the procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the moon-
roof cannot be closed” in Chapter 9.
! Sun shades
UB2532BA
2-44
Keys and doors
The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by
hand while the moonroof is closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves
back.
! Moonroof (Station wagon)
The front moonroof has a tilting function and the rear
moonroof has a sliding function.
Both moonroofs operate only when the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position.
! Tilting moonroof
A) Open
B) Close
To tilt up the front moonroof, open the sun shade and
pull the switch to the “OPEN” side.
To tilt down the front moonroof, push the switch to the
“CLOSE” side, then quickly release it. If you wish to
stop the tilting-down motion of the front moonroof part-
way, either pull the switch to the “OPEN” side or push
it to the “CLOSE” side.
! Sliding moonroof
A) Open
B) Close
To fully open the rear moonroof, tilt up the front moon-
roof then pull the switch to the “OPEN” side and quick-
ly release it. The rear moonroof will stop at a position
PASSENGER
A
B
UB2203BB
PASSENGER
A
B
UB2203BB
2-45
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
approximately 6.7 in (17 cm) from its fully closed posi-
tion.
After confirming safety, pull the switch to the “OPEN”
side again and quickly release it. The rear moonroof
will open to its fully open position. To stop the rear
moonroof at some selected mid-way point while it is
moving toward its fully open position, momentarily
push the switch to the “CLOSE” or “OPEN” side.
To fully close the rear moonroof, push the switch to the
“CLOSE” side then quickly release it.
The rear moonroof will stop at a position approximate-
ly 5.9 in (15 cm) before its fully closed position. After
confirming safety, pull the switch to the “CLOSE” side
again and quickly release it. The rear moonroof will ful-
ly close. The front moonroof can then be fully closed.
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses an object trapped be-
tween its glass and during closure, it automatically
moves back by 5.9 in (15 cm) from that point and then
stops. The anti-entrapment function may also be acti-
vated by a strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
NOTE
" For the sake of safety, it is recommended that
you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.
" Driving with the moonroof fully open can cause
an annoying sound to generate at high speeds. If
such a condition has been encountered, use the
moonroof at the initial stop position of 6.7 in (17
cm).
" If the moonroof cannot be closed through
switch operation because of system failure, it can
be closed manually using a hex-head wrench. For
the procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the moon-
roof cannot be closed” in Chapter 9.
! Sun shades
The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by
hand while the moonroof is closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves
UB2509BA
2-46
Keys and doors
back.
3-1
3
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch .............................................. 3-3
LOCK .................................................................. 3-4
ACC .................................................................... 3-4
ON ....................................................................... 3-4
START ................................................................ 3-5
Key reminder chime .......................................... 3-6
Ignition switch light .......................................... 3-6
Hazard warning flasher ................................ 3-7
Meters and gauges (Turbo models) ............ 3-7
Combination meter illumination ...................... 3-7
Canceling the function for meter/gauge
needle movement and combination meter
sequential illumination upon turning on the
ignition switch ................................................ 3-8
Speedometer ..................................................... 3-9
Odometer ........................................................... 3-9
Double trip meter .............................................. 3-10
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-11
Fuel gauge ......................................................... 3-11
Temperature gauge ........................................... 3-13
Meters and gauges (Non-turbo models) ..... 3-14
Combination meter illumination ...................... 3-14
Canceling the function for meter/gauge
needle movement upon turning on the
ignition switch ................................................ 3-15
Speedometer ..................................................... 3-15
Odometer ........................................................... 3-16
Double trip meter .............................................. 3-16
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-17
Fuel gauge ......................................................... 3-18
Temperature gauge ........................................... 3-19
Warning and indicator lights ....................... 3-20
Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 3-21
SRS airbag system warning light .................... 3-24
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators ........................................................ 3-24
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp ................................................. 3-25
Charge warning light ........................................ 3-26
Oil pressure warning light ............................... 3-26
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light
(AT vehicles) ................................................... 3-27
Low tire pressure warning light
(if equipped) .................................................... 3-27
ABS warning light ............................................. 3-28
Brake system warning light ............................. 3-29
Low fuel warning light ...................................... 3-30
Door open warning light .................................. 3-31
All-wheel drive warning light (AT vehicles) .... 3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light (if equipped) ........................................... 3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
(if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
indicator light (if equipped) ........................... 3-32
Security indicator light ..................................... 3-33
SPORT mode indicator light (AT vehicles) ..... 3-34
Selector lever position indicator
(AT vehicles) ................................................... 3-34
Gear position indicator (AT vehicles) ............. 3-34
Turn signal indicator lights .............................. 3-34
High beam indicator light ................................. 3-35
Cruise control indicator light ........................... 3-35
Cruise control set indicator light .................... 3-35
3-2
Instruments and controls
Headlight indicator light .................................. 3-35
Front fog light indicator light .......................... 3-35
Clock ............................................................. 3-36
Information display (if equipped) ................ 3-37
Outside temperature indicator ........................ 3-37
Current fuel consumption ................................ 3-39
Average fuel consumption .............................. 3-40
Driving range on remaining fuel ..................... 3-41
Journey time ..................................................... 3-43
Light control switch ..................................... 3-44
Headlights ......................................................... 3-45
High/low beam change (dimmer) .................... 3-45
Headlight flasher .............................................. 3-46
Daytime running light system ......................... 3-46
Turn signal lever ........................................... 3-47
Illumination brightness control ................... 3-47
Bright switch (Night illumination dimness
cancellation) .............................................. 3-48
Parking light switch ..................................... 3-49
Fog light switch (if equipped) ..................... 3-50
Wiper and washer ......................................... 3-51
Windshield wiper and washer switches ......... 3-52
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(Station wagon) .............................................. 3-55
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) ........ 3-56
Rear window defogger button ..................... 3-57
Mirrors ........................................................... 3-59
Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-59
Auto-dimming mirror/compass
(if equipped) ................................................... 3-59
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-61
Tilt steering wheel ........................................ 3-63
Horn ............................................................... 3-64
3-3
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch
" Never turn the ignition switch to “LOCK”
while the vehicle is being driven or towed be-
cause that will lock the steering wheel, prevent-
ing steering control. And when the engine is
turned off, it takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer.
" Before leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child to remains in
the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child or others. They
could operate the power windows, the sunroof
or other controls or even make the vehicle
move.
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC,
ON and START.
NOTE
" Keep the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position
when the engine is not running.
" Using electrical accessories for a long time with
the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position
can cause the battery to go dead.
If the ignition switch will not move from the
“LOCK” position to the “ACC” position, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you
turn the ignition switch.
" If the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large
bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on
it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted
turning of the ignition switch. Also, if a large key-
UB3546BA
3-4
Instruments and controls
holder is attached to the key, your knees or hands
may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ig-
nition switch.
! LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed in this posi-
tion. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel
when you remove the key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the right and left as you turn the key.
! Automatic transmission vehicles
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only
when the selector lever is in the “P” position.
! Manual transmission vehicles
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only
when the key is pushed in while turning it.
! ACC
In this position the electrical accessories (radio, ac-
cessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.
! ON
This is the normal operating position after the engine
is started.
UB2215DA
UB2215EA
3-5
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
! START
Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position while the engine is running.
The engine is started in this position. The starter
cranks the engine to start it. When the key is released
(after the engine has started), the key automatically
returns to the “ON” position.
! For vehicle with immobilizer
If your registered key fails to start the engine, pull out
the key once (the security indicator light will blink), and
then insert the key in the ignition switch and turn it to
the “START” position to start the engine again.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the following cases:
" The key grip is touching another key or a metal-
lic key holder.
UB3209BA
3-6
Instruments and controls
" The key is near another key that contains an im-
mobilizer transponder.
! Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the driver’s door
opens and the key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” positions.
The chime stops when the key is removed from the ig-
nition switch.
! Ignition switch light
For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the
ignition switch light comes on when any of the doors is
opened. The light remains on for a several seconds
and gradually goes out after all doors are closed or if
the key is inserted in the ignition switch.
UB3210BA
3-7
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other driv-
ers when you have to park your vehicle under emer-
gency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works
with the ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the haz-
ard warning button on the instrument panel. To turn off
the flasher, push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn
signals do not work.
Meters and gauges (Turbo models)
! Combination meter illumination
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the various parts of the combination meter are illumi-
nated in the following sequence:
1. Meter rims, gauge rims, warning lights, and indica-
tor lights light up.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles light up.
3. Meter needles and gauge needles each show MAX
position.
4. Meter needles and gauge needles each show MIN
position.
5. Dials in meters and gauges light up.
6. Regular illumination (for driving) begins.
UB9500BA
3-8
Instruments and controls
! Canceling the function for meter/
gauge needle movement and combina-
tion meter sequential illumination
upon turning on the ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the movement of
the meter needles and gauge needles and sequential
illumination of the combination meter that take place
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position. With the
A trip meter indication selected, briefly press the trip
knob twice. You can now establish the activated/deac-
tivated setting for movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least two seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
Briefly press the trip knob again. You can now estab-
lish the activated/deactivated setting for sequential il-
lumination of the combination meter when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. To change the
current setting, press the trip knob for at least two sec-
onds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
UB3533AA
UB3534AA
3-9
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip meter indi-
cation.
If you turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position,
turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position, or open
and close the driver’s door during the setting proce-
dure, the new setting will be canceled.
Also, if you do not press the trip knob for a period of 10
seconds, the new setting will be canceled.
NOTE
It is not possible to cancel sequential illumination
of the combination meter while sequential illumi-
nation is actually taking place. Cancel sequential
illumination when regular illumination (for driving)
has begun.
! Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.
! Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle
has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK” position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds
of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odome-
ter/trip meter will go off.
The odometer/trip meter will also go off if you open
and close the driver’s door or turn the ignition switch to
UB3523BA
3-10
Instruments and controls
the “ON” position within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter.
! Double trip meter
This meter display two trip meters when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or “ON” position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has
been driven since you last set it to zero.
To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob.
Each press of the knob changes the mode indication
alternately.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip
meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed
for more than 2 seconds.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK” position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. It is possible to switch between the A trip meter
and B trip meter indications while the odometer/trip
meter is lit up. If you do not press the trip knob within
10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,
the odometer/trip meter will go off. Also, if you open
and close the driver’s door within 10 seconds of illumi-
nation of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will go off.
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the
function of the indicator during driving, as an
accident could result.
UB3524AA
A trip meter
B trip meter
3-11
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter
and battery is broken for any reason such as vehi-
cle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data re-
corded on the trip meter will be lost.
! Vehicle communication system fault indication
The vehicle communication system carries various
types of information (vehicle speed, running condi-
tions, etc.) to control modules. In the event of a fault in
this communication system, the trip meter will show
“”.
If the trip meter shows “ ”, immediately contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
communication system inspected.
NOTE
If you press the trip knob while the trip meter is
showing “ ”, the trip meter indication will
appear for 10 seconds.
! Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute.
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of
the tachometer in the red zone. In this range,
fuel injection will be cut by the engine control
module to protect the engine from overrevving.
The engine will resume running normally after
the engine speed is reduced below the red
zone.
! Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel
UB3211AA
3-12
Instruments and controls
remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” po-
sition, the fuel gauge shows “E” even if the fuel tank
contains fuel.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning
or acceleration due to fuel level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK” position, the fuel gauge’s dial, needle, and
rim will light up and the needle will indicate the amount
of fuel remaining in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating the amount
of fuel remaining in the tank, you (a) do not press the
trip knob for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the driv-
er’s door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the “E” po-
sition and the dial, needle, and rim will go off.
The rim of the fuel gauge flashes five time when the
amount of remaining fuel reaches 2.6 US gal (10 liters,
2.2 lmp gal).
If you turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
and back to the “ON” position, the rim will again flash
five times.
UB3211BA
3-13
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel gauge
meter.
This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is locat-
ed on the right side of the vehicle.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is
nearly empty [About 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal)].
It only operates when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE
This light does not go out unless the tank is re-
plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about
4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 lmp gal).
! Temperature gauge
A) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temper-
ature when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with
the outside temperature and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the
pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the
middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with
UB3526AA
A
UB3527BB
3-14
Instruments and controls
the engine coolant at this temperature range and high
revving operation when the engine is not warmed up
enough should be avoided.
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating
range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble.
See the “In case of emergency” in chapter 9.
Meters and gauges (Non-turbo mod-
els)
! Combination meter illumination
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the various parts of the combination meter are illumi-
nated in the following sequence:
1. Combination meter dials light up.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles each show MAX
position.
3. Meter needles and gauge needles each show MIN
position.
4. Regular illumination (for driving) begins.
3-15
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
! Canceling the function for meter/
gauge needle movement upon turning
on the ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the movement of
the meter needles and gauge needles that takes place
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position. With the
A trip meter indication selected, briefly press the trip
knob twice. You can now establish the activated/deac-
tivated setting for movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least two seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip meter indi-
cation.
If you turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position,
turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position, or open
and close the driver’s door during the setting proce-
dure, the new setting will be canceled. Also, if you do
not press the trip knob for a period of 10 seconds, the
new setting will be canceled.
NOTE
It is not possible to cancel sequential illumination
of the combination meter while sequential illumi-
nation is actually taking place. Cancel sequential
illumination when regular illumination (for driving)
has begun.
! Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.
UB3533AA
3-16
Instruments and controls
! Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle
has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK” position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds
of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odome-
ter/trip meter will go off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s door within 10
seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the
odometer/trip meter will go off.
! Double trip meter
This meter displays the two trip meters when the igni-
tion switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or “ON” position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has
been driven since you last set it to zero.
To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob.
Each press of the knob changes the mode indication
alternately.
UB3523BA UB3524AA
3-17
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip
meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed
for more than 2 seconds.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK” position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. It is possible switch between the A trip meter and
B trip meter indications while the odometer/trip meter
is lit up. If you do not press the trip knob within 10 sec-
onds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the
odometer/trip meter will go off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s door within 10
seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the
odometer/trip meter will go off.
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the
function of the indicator during driving, as an
accident could result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter
and battery is broken for any reason such as vehi-
cle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data re-
corded on the trip meter will be lost.
! Vehicle communication system fault indication
The vehicle communication system carries various
types of information (vehicle speed, running condi-
tions, etc.) to control modules. In the event of a fault in
this communication system, the trip meter will show
“”.
If the trip meter shows “ ”, immediately contact the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle com-
munication system inspected.
NOTE
If you press the trip knob while the trip meter is
showing “ ”, the trip meter indication will ap-
pear for 10 seconds.
! Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute.
A trip meter
B trip meter
3-18
Instruments and controls
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of
the tachometer in the red zone. In this range,
fuel injection will be cut by the engine control
module to protect the engine from overrevving.
The engine will resume running normally after
the engine speed is reduced below the red
zone.
NOTE (3.0-liter models only)
To protect the engine while the “P” or “N” position
is selected, the engine is controlled such that the
engine speed does not become too high even if
the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
! Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel
remaining in the tank.
The gauge does not return to “E” even though the ig-
nition switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning
or acceleration due to fuel level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK” position, the fuel gauge’s dial will light up
and the needle will indicate the amount of fuel remain-
ing in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating the amount
of fuel remaining in the tank, you (a) do not press the
UB3212AA
3-19
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
trip knob for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the driv-
er’s door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the “E” po-
sition and the dial, needle, and rim will go off.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the combination
meter.
This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is locat-
ed on the right side of the vehicle.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is
nearly empty [About 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal)].
It only operates when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE
This light does not go out unless the tank is re-
plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about
4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3,3 lmp gal).
! Temperature gauge
A) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temper-
ature when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with
the outside temperature and driving conditions.
UB3526AA
A
UB3548BB
3-20
Instruments and controls
We recommend that you drive moderately until the
pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the
middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with
the engine coolant at this temperature range and high
revving operation when the engine is not warmed up
enough should be avoided.
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating
range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble.
See the “In case of emergency” in chapter 9.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights come on
momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch
is initially turned to the “ON” position. This permits
checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. The following lights come on:
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light goes out only when you
fasten the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light / Malfunction in-
dicator lamp
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles)
/ : ABS warning light
3-21
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
: Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light (if equipped)
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (if
equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light (if equipped)
/ : Brake system warning light
: AWD warning light (AT vehicles)
: Low tire pressure warning light (if equipped)
: SPORT mode indicator light (AT vehicles)
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indi-
cator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF in-
dicator light
: Low fuel warning light
: Door open warning light
: Security indicator light
: Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
: Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out
bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Seatbelt warning light and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning de-
vice at the driver’s and front passenger’s seat.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position,
this device reminds the driver and front passenger to
fasten their seatbelts by illuminating the warning lights
in the locations indicated below and sounding a chime.
ON
OFF
3-22
Instruments and controls
Driver: Instrument panel Front passenger: Between map lights
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/has not yet
fastened the seatbelt(s) when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning
light(s) will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seat-
belt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s seatbelt is not
fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously.
If the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/
is still not fastened 6 seconds later, both warning lights
or the warning light for the unfastened seatbelt will re-
main lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s and/or front pas-
senger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened even 15
UB7507NA UB1582BA
3-23
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
seconds later (21 seconds after turning ON the ignition
switch), the warning lights will alternate between flash-
ing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals, and
the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are
flashing.
Alternate flashing and steady illumination of the warn-
ing lights and sounding of the chime will continue until
both driver and front passenger fasten their seatbelts.
NOTE
" If the driver and/or front passenger unfasten(s)
the seatbelt(s) after fastening, the seatbelt warn-
ing device operates as follows according to the
vehicle speed.
" At speeds lower than approximately 9 mph (15
km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s)
will alternate between flashing and steady illu-
mination at 15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
" At approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher
speeds
The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s)
will alternate between flashing and steady illu-
mination at 15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flash-
ing.
" If you unfasten and refasten driver’s seatbelt
three times within six seconds after turning ON
the ignition switch, the warning operation that fol-
lows the 6-second warning after turning ON the ig-
nition switch is canceled. When the ignition switch
is turned ON next time, however, the complete se-
quence of warning operation resumes.
If there is no passenger on the front passenger’s seat,
the seatbelt warning device for front passenger’s seat
will be deactivated. The front passenger’s occupant
detection system monitors whether or not there is a
passenger on the front passenger’s seat. Observe the
following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent
the device from functioning correctly or cause the de-
vice to fail.
" Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV
onto the seatback.
" Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket.
" Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her
hands or legs on the front passenger’s seatback, or al-
low him/her to pull the seatback.
" Do not use front seats with their backward-forward
position and seatback not being locked into place se-
curely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust
them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to the
“Manual seat” in the front seats section in Chapter 1 in
this owner’s manual. (Models equipped with manual
seats only)
3-24
Instruments and controls
If the seatbelt warning device for front passenger’s
seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated
even when the front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passenger has not
fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions.
" Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other
than the child restraint system and the child occupant.
" Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback
pocket.
" Ensure that the backward-forward position and
seatback of front passenger’s seat are locked into
place securely by moving the seat back and forth.
(Models equipped with manual seats only)
If still the seatbelt warning device for front passenger’s
seat does not function correctly after taking relevant
corrective actions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
! SRS airbag system warning
light
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the SRS airbag system warning light will come on for
about seven seconds and go out. This shows the SRS
frontal airbag and SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag and seatbelt pretensioners are in normal oper-
ation.
If this light comes on while driving or remains illuminat-
ed even after a period of about 7 seconds from when
the ignition has been turned on, it may indicate that the
SRS frontal airbag system or SRS side airbag system
(if equipped) or SRS curtain airbag or seatbelt preten-
sioner system is not working properly. Contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
! Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators
“ ”: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
PASS AIR BAGPASS AIR BAG
ONON
OUT.
DISP
OFF
PASS AIR BAG
OFF ON
UB3208EA
ON or
3-25
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
“ ”: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indi-
cators show you the status of the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the clock in the cen-
tral portion of the instrument panel.
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 sec-
onds during which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators extinguish for 2
seconds. After this, one of the indicators illuminates
depending on the status of the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag reached by the Subaru advanced frontal
airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated,
the passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator will illumi-
nate while the OFF indicator will remain extinguished.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is deacti-
vated, the passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator will
remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will illumi-
nate.
If both the ON and OFF indicators remain lit or extin-
guished simultaneously, the system is faulty. Contact
your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.
! CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator lamp
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you
are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired
by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Continued vehicle operation without having the
emission control system checked and repaired
as necessary could cause serious damage,
which may not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine
is running, it may indicate that there is a problem or po-
tential problem somewhere in the emission control
system.
! If the light comes on steadily:
If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not
go out after the engine starts, an emission control sys-
tem malfunction has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer immediately.
OFF or
3-26
Instruments and controls
NOTE
This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is
not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indica-
tor lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel fill-
er cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks.
Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the
cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK EN-
GINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take
several driving trips. If the light does not go out, take
your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer im-
mediately.
! If the light is blinking:
If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire
condition has been detected which may damage the
emission control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control
system, you should do the following:
" Reduce vehicle speed.
" Avoid hard acceleration.
" Avoid steep uphill grades.
" Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
" Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking
and come on steadily after several driving trips. You
should have your vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
! Charge warning light
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it
may indicate that the charging system is not working
properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out
after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe
opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the
light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU deal-
er immediately.
! Oil pressure warning light
Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure
warning light on. This may cause serious en-
gine damage.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it
may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the
3-27
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
lubricating system is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out
after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe
opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil lev-
el is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at the
proper level but the light remains on, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
! AT OIL TEMPerature warning
light (AT vehicles)
The AT oil temperature warning light comes on when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and
goes out after about two seconds.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it
may indicate that the automatic transmission fluid tem-
perature is too hot.
If the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to
stop the vehicle, but avoid driving up steep grades or
in stop and go traffic.
! Automatic transmission control system warn-
ing
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indi-
cate that the automatic transmission control system is
not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer for service immediately.
! Low tire pressure warning light (if
equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the low tire pressure warning light will come on for
about 2 seconds to check that the tire pressure moni-
toring system (TPMS) is functioning properly. If there
is no problem and all tires are properly inflated, the
light will go out.
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning
light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly un-
der-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information plac-
ard.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-in-
flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the recom-
mended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and owner’s manual.
If this light does not come on briefly after the ig-
nition switch is turned ON or the light is flash-
3-28
Instruments and controls
ing, you should have your Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light comes on while driving, never brake
suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off
the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident
involving serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still comes on while driving after ad-
justing the tire pressure, a tire may have signif-
icant damage and a fast leak that causes the
tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is
replaced without the original pressure sensor/
transmitter being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash. This indicates the
TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble for tire and sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting. If the light flashes, promptly con-
tact a SUBARU dealer to have the system in-
spected.
The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure.
The tire pressure should be checked periodical-
ly (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. After
any change to tire pressure(s), the tire pressure
monitoring system will not re-check tire infla-
tion pressures until the vehicle is first driven
more than 20 mph (32 km/h). Be sure to install
the specified size for the front and rear tires.
! ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after
about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working
properly.
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS
system may not work properly.
When the warning light is on, the ABS function
shuts down; however, the conventional brake
system continues to operate normally.
(U.S.)
(Canada)
3-29
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
" The warning light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
" The warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, but it
does not go out even when the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
" The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by your SUBARU
dealer.
The ABS warning light comes on together with the
brake system warning light if the EBD system be-
comes faulty. For further details of the EBD system
fault warning, refer to “Brake system warning light”.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described be-
low, the ABS system may be considered normal.
" The warning light comes on right after the en-
gine is started but goes out immediately, remain-
ing off.
" The warning light remains on after the engine
has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle
speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).
" The warning light comes on during driving, but
it goes out immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such
as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning
light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt-
age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the
battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
! Brake system warning light
" Driving with the brake system warning light
on is dangerous. This indicates your brake sys-
tem may not be working properly. If the light re-
mains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUB-
ARU dealer immediately.
" If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are
operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBA-
RU dealer for repair.
This light has the following two functions:
! Parking brake warning
The light comes on with the parking brake applied
while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. It goes
out when the parking brake is fully released.
(U.S.)
(Canada)
3-30
Instruments and controls
! Brake fluid level warning
This light comes on when the brake fluid level has
dropped to near the “MIN” level of the brake fluid res-
ervoir with the ignition switch in the “ON” position and
with the parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should come on while
driving (with the parking brake fully released and with
the ignition switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads.
If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the near-
est safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the flu-
id level is below the “MIN” mark in the reservoir, do not
drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the near-
est SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) sys-
tem warning
The brake system warning light also illuminates if a
malfunction occurs in the EBD system. In that event, it
comes on together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simulta-
neously during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking
system will still function. However, the rear wheels will
be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied
harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may there-
fore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously, take the following
steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both warning lights go
out, the EBD system may be faulty.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights come on again and stay illu-
minated after the engine has been restarted, shut
down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and
check the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the “MIN” mark,
the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspect-
ed.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN” mark, DO
NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed
to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is
nearly empty about 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3-31
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
This light does not go out unless the tank is re-
plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about
3.7 US gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
! Door open warning light
When any of the doors or the rear gate (Station wag-
on) or trunk lid (Sedan) is not fully closed, it is indicat-
ed by the corresponding part of the door warning light.
Always make sure this light is out before you start to
drive.
! All-wheel drive warning light
(AT vehicles)
Continued driving with the AWD warning light
flashing can lead to powertrain damage. If the
AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a
safe place then check whether all four tires are
the same diameter and whether any of the tires
has a puncture or has lost air pressure for
some other reason.
The all-wheel drive warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes
out after the engine has started.
! For 5 speed automatic transmission vehicles
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of dif-
ferent diameters fitted on its wheels or with the air
pressure excessively low in any of its tires.
! For 4 speed automatic transmission vehicles
This light comes on when All Wheel Drive is disen-
gaged and the drive mechanism is switched to Front
Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar purposes.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of dif-
ferent diameters fitted on its wheels or with the air
pressure excessively low in any of its tires.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light (if equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is ON and
goes out about 2 seconds later.
It blinks when the skid suppression function is activat-
ed. It illuminates when only the traction control func-
tion is operating.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably
faulty under any of the following conditions. Have your
3-32
Instruments and controls
vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
" The light does not come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
" The light does not go out even after a period of
about 2 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned to the “ON” position.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light (if equipped)/Vehicle Dy-
namics Control OFF indicator
light (if equipped)
This warning light has the function of indicating faults
in the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the func-
tion of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system has been deactivated.
It comes on in the event of a fault in the system and is
on when the system is not operating.
This warning light comes on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after the
engine has started. It indicates that the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is in normal operation.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably in-
operative under any of the following conditions. Have
your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediate-
ly.
" The warning light does not come on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
" The warning light comes on while the vehicle is run-
ning.
" If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system itself becomes faulty, the warning light only
comes on. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem) remains fully operational.
" The warning light comes on when the electronic
control system of the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control
system becomes faulty.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its
ABS control through the electrical circuit of the ABS
system. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the Ve-
hicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the Vehicle Dynam-
ics Control system also becomes inoperative, causing
the warning light to come on. Though both the Vehicle
Dynamics Control and ABS systems are inoperative in
this case, the ordinary functions of the brake system
are still available. You will be safe while driving with
this condition, but have your vehicle checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as shown below,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be con-
3-33
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
sidered normal.
" The warning light comes on right after the en-
gine is started but goes out immediately, remain-
ing off.
" The warning light comes on after engine startup
and goes off while the vehicle is subsequently be-
ing driven.
" The warning light comes on during driving, but
it goes out immediately and remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
" It comes on when the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch is pressed.
" It also comes on when the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is deactivated.
NOTE
" The light may stay on for a while after the engine
has been started, especially in cold weather. This
does not indicate the existence of a problem. The
light should go out as soon as the engine has
warmed up.
" The indicator light comes on when the engine
has developed a problem and the Malfunction in-
dicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably
faulty under the following condition. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
" The light does not go out even after the lapse of sev-
eral minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the en-
gine has started.
! Security indicator light
This indicator light shows the status of the alarm sys-
tem. If your vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer, it
also indicates operation of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational status of the
alarm system. For detailed information, refer to the
“Alarm system” in Chapter 2.
! Immobilizer system (if equipped)
This light blinks about 60 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned from “ON” position to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position or immediately after the key is pulled
out. (Refer to the “Door locks” section in chapter 2.)
If the indicator light does not flash, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be faulty. Contact your near-
est SUBARU dealer immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for example, an
unauthorized duplicate) is used, the security indicator
light comes on.
3-34
Instruments and controls
! SPORT mode indicator light (AT
vehicles)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position and goes out after the engine has
started. When the selector lever is moved to the man-
ual gate, the SPORT mode is selected and the indica-
tor light comes on. (Refer to the “Automatic transmis-
sion – 4 speed” or “Automatic transmission – 5 speed”
section in chapter 7.)
! Selector lever position indicator (AT
vehicles)
This indicator shows the position of the selector lever.
! Gear position indicator (AT vehicles)
When the manual mode is selected, the gear position
indicator (which shows the current gear selection) and
the upshift/downshift indicator light up. (Refer to the
“Automatic transmission – 4 speed” or “Automatic
transmission – 5 speed” section in chapter 7.)
! Turn signal indicator lights
These lights show the operation of the turn signal or
lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the
turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb
as soon as possible. Refer to the “Replacing bulbs”
UB3532AA
UB7527CA
3-35
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
section in chapter 11.
! High beam indicator light
This light shows that the headlights are in the high
beam mode.
This indicator light also comes on when the headlight
flasher is operated.
! Cruise control indicator light
The cruise control indicator light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes
out after about three seconds.
This light comes on when the “CRUISE” main switch
is pressed.
If you move the cruise control lever while turning the
ignition switch “ON”, the cruise control function is de-
activated and the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes. To
reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition
switch back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
! Cruise control set indicator light
The cruise control set indicator light comes on when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and
goes out after about three seconds.
This light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
! Headlight indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the light switch is
turned to the “ ” position (to turn on the parking
lights) or to the “ ” position (to turn on the head-
lights).
! Front fog light indicator light
This indicator light is on while the front fog lights are
on.
3-36
Instruments and controls
Clock
The clock shows the time while the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
To adjust the time shown by the clock, press the “+”
button or the “–” button. The indicated time will change
in one-minute increments. If you keep the button
pressed, the rate at which the indicated time changes
will speed up.
The clock will also show the time if you press the
“DISP” button while the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
position. It is possible to adjust the time setting while
the time is being shown. If you do not press the “+” but-
ton or “–” button for 10 seconds while the time is being
shown, the time indication will go off.
Also, the time indication will go off if you open and
close the driver’s door while the time is being shown.
To ensure safety, do not attempt to set the time
during driving, as an accident could result.
PASS AIR BAG
ON
OUT.
DISP
OFF
UB3208BA
PASS AIR BAGPASS AIR BAG
ONON
ON
OUT.
DISP
OFF
DISP
UB3208CA
3-37
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Information display (if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, each suc-
cessive push of the “DISP” button toggles the display
in the following sequence:
! Outside temperature indicator
U.S.-spec. vehicles
PASS AIR BAGPASS AIR BAG
ONON
ON
OUT.
DISP
OFF
DISP
UB3208CA
Outside
tempera-
ture
Current
fuel con-
sumption
Average
fuel con-
sumption
Driving range
on remaining fuel
Journey time
UB3200AA
3-38
Instruments and controls
Canada-spec. vehicles
The outside temperature indicator shows the outside
temperature in a range from –22 to 122°F (–30 to
50°C).
The indicator can give a false reading under any of the
following conditions:
" When there is too much sun.
" During idling; while running at low speeds in a traffic
jam; when the engine is restarted immediately follow-
ing a shutdown.
" When the actual outside temperature falls outside
the specified indicator range.
! Road surface freeze warning indication
U.S.-spec. vehicles
UB3567AA
UB3201BA
3-39
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Canada-spec. vehicles
When the outside temperature drops to 37°F (3°C) or
lower, the temperature indication flashes to show that
the road surface may be frozen.
If the outside temperature drops to 37°F (3°C) or lower
while the display is giving an indication other than the
outside temperature, the display switches to the out-
side temperature indication and flashes for five sec-
onds before returning to its original indication.
If the display is already indicating an outside tempera-
ture of 37°F (3°C) or lower when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, the indication does not
flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication may differ
from the actual outside temperature. The road sur-
face freeze warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the condition of
the road surface before driving.
! Current fuel consumption
U.S.-spec. vehicles
UB3571BA
UB3568AA
3-40
Instruments and controls
Canada-spec. vehicles
This indication shows the rate of fuel consumption at
the present moment.
! Average fuel consumption
U.S.-spec. vehicles
UB3202AA
UB3569AA
3-41
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Canada-spec. vehicles
This indication shows the average rate of fuel con-
sumption since the trip meter was last reset.
Pressing the trip knob toggles the indication between
the average fuel consumption corresponding to the A
trip meter indication and the average fuel consumption
corresponding to the B trip meter indication.
When either of the trip meter indications is reset, the
corresponding average fuel consumption value is also
reset.
NOTE
" The indicated values vary in accordance with
changes in the vehicle’s running conditions. Also,
the indicated values may differ slightly from the
actual values and should thus be treated only as a
guide.
" When either trip meter indication is reset, the av-
erage fuel consumption corresponding to that trip
meter indication is not shown until the vehicle has
subsequently covered a distance of 1 mile (or 1
km).
! Driving range on remaining fuel
U.S.-spec. vehicles
UB3203AA
UB3570AA
3-42
Instruments and controls
Canada-spec. vehicles
The driving range indicates the distance that can be
driven taking into account the amount of fuel remain-
ing in the tank and the average rate of fuel consump-
tion.
When the low fuel warning light comes on, the driving
range indication flashes for five seconds. (The display
first switches to the driving range indication if it was
originally giving some other indication.)
U.S.-spec. vehicles
UB3538AA UB3572AA
3-43
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Canada-spec. vehicles
If the driving range is shown as “ ”, there is only
a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank. You must refuel
the vehicle immediately.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is only a
guide. The indicated value may differ from the ac-
tual driving range on remaining fuel, so you must
immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning
light comes on.
! Journey time
The journey time shows the time that has elapsed
since the ignition switch was turned to the “START”
position.
UB3542AA
UB3539AA
3-44
Instruments and controls
The journey time indication flashes each time a com-
plete hour has elapsed. If the display is giving an indi-
cation other than the journey time, the display switch-
es to the journey time, flashes for five seconds, and re-
turns to its original indication each time a complete
hour has elapsed.
NOTE
The journey time is reset when the ignition switch
is turned to the “OFF” position. It is also reset if
the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” or
“ACC” position prior to restarting of the engine.
Light control switch
To prevent battery discharge resulting from ac-
cidentally leaving your lights on when your ve-
hicle is parked, the light switch operates only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion. In any other position, the vehicle’s lights
will be out.
If you park your vehicle on a roadside at night,
use the hazard warning flasher to alert the other
drivers.
The light switch operates only when the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position.
UB3540AA
3-45
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
! Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of
the turn signal lever.
first position
Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights
and license plate light are on.
second position
Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumina-
tion, tail lights, and license plate light are on.
! High/low beam change (dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn
signal lever forward. When the headlights are on high
beam, the high beam indicator light “ ” on the in-
strument panel is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the
detent position.
UB3204BA UB3205BA
3-46
Instruments and controls
! Headlight flasher
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for
more than just a few seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and
then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long
as you hold the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the “OFF” posi-
tion.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam
indicator light “ ” on the instrument panel also
comes on.
! Daytime running light system
The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker
lights are not turned on by the daytime running
light system. The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it is dark
outside.
The low beam headlights will automatically come on at
reduced brightness when the engine has started, un-
der the following conditions:
" The parking brake is fully released.
" The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ” position.
UB3205CA
3-47
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal le-
ver up. To activate the left turn signal, push the turn
signal lever down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does not return af-
ter cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by
hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up
or down slightly and hold it during the lane change.
The turn signal indicator lights will flash in the direction
of the turn or lane change. The lever will return auto-
matically to the neutral position when you release it.
Illumination brightness control
When the lighting switch is in the “ ” or “ ”
position, you can adjust brightness of the instrument
panel illumination for better visibility.
In turbo models, you can also adjust the brightness of
the instrument panel illumination when the lighting
switch is in the OFF position.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
UB3205DA UB3206BA
3-48
Instruments and controls
When the control dial is turned upward or downward,
the instrument panel’s illumination brightness is indi-
cated by the trip meter. The brightness is shown in six
steps from “ ” (dimmest) to “ ” (brightest).
If the control dial is not turned for three seconds, the
trip meter returns to its original trip meter indication.
Bright switch (Night illumination dim-
ness cancellation)
The brightness of clock display, audio, air conditioner,
multi information display and instrument panel illumi-
nation dims when the light switch is in the “ ” or
“ ” positions.
Press the “ ” button to increase the brightness.
Press it again to return the brightness to the original,
lower level.
NOTE
The brightness setting is not cancelled when the
ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
UB3531AA
PASS AIR BAGPASS AIR BAG
ONON
OUT.
DISP
OFF
UB3208DA
3-49
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Parking light switch
The parking light switch operates regardless of the ig-
nition switch position.
By pushing the front end of this switch, following lights
will come on.
– Parking lights
– Front and rear side marker lights
– Tail lights
– License plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the parking light
switch.
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because
that will run down the battery.
UB3508BA
3-50
Instruments and controls
Fog light switch (if equipped)
The front fog lights operate only when the light switch
is in the “ ” or “ ” position.
To turn on the front fog lights, turn the fog light switch
on the turn signal lever upward to the “ ” position.
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the switch back
down to the “OFF” position.
The indicator light located on the combination meter
will illuminate when the fog lights are on.
UB3207BA
UB7507LA
3-51
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Wiper and washer
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield
washer until the windshield is sufficiently
warmed by the defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the
windshield, blocking your view.
" Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than ten seconds, or when the washer flu-
id tank is empty. This may cause overheating of
the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
" Do not operate the wipers when the wind-
shield or rear window is dry. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause
the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating
the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window,
always use the windshield washer.
" In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear
window before switching on the wipers. At-
tempting to operate the wiper with the blades
frozen to the window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be damaged but also
the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade
is frozen to the window glass, be sure to oper-
ate the defroster, wiper deicer (if equipped) or
rear window defogger before turning on the
wiper.
" If the wipers stop during operation because
of ice or some other obstruction on the window,
the wiper motor could burn out even if the wiper
switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly
stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position and clean the
window glass to allow proper wiper operation.
" Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is
unavailable. In areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
or the equivalent. (See “Windshield washer flu-
id” section in chapter 11.)
Also, when driving the vehicle when there are
freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type
wiper blades.
" Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline
or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene.
This will cause deterioration of the wiper
3-52
Instruments and controls
blades.
NOTE
" The front wiper motor is protected against over-
loads by a circuit breaker. If the motor operates
continuously under an unusually heavy load, the
circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor tempo-
rarily. If this happens, park your vehicle in a safe
place, turn off the wiper switch, and wait for ap-
proximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker will re-
set itself, and the wipers will again operate nor-
mally.
" Clean your wiper blades and window glass peri-
odically with a washer solution to prevent streak-
ing, and to remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Keep the washer button depressed at
least for 1 second so that washer solution will be
sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window.
" Grease, wax, insects or other material on the
windshield or the wiper blades results in jerky wip-
er operation and streaking on the glass. If you can-
not remove those streaks after operating the
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth
with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner.
After cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is clean if no
beads form on the glass when you rinse with wa-
ter.
" If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after
following this procedure, replace the wiper blades
with new ones. Refer to the “Replacement of wiper
blades” section (chapter 11) for replacement in-
structions.
! Windshield wiper and washer switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
3-53
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
! Windshield wipers
OFF: Park
: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever
down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the “OFF” po-
sition.
! Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward
you. The wipers operate until you release the lever.
UB3558BB UB3558DA
3-54
Instruments and controls
! Wiper intermittent time control (if equipped)
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” position, turn
the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper.
The operating interval can be adjusted continuously
from the shortest interval to the longest.
Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim
at your desired interval.
The operating interval can be adjusted in nine steps.
! Washer
To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the
end of the wiper control lever. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the washer button. The wipers oper-
ate while you push the button.
UB3558CA UB3559BA
3-55
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
! Rear window wiper and washer switch
(Station wagon)
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
ON: Continuous
INT: Intermittent
OFF: Park
: Washer
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of
the wiper control lever upward to the “INT” or “ON” po-
sition.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the
lever to the “OFF” position.
With the switch turned to the “INT” position, the rear
wiper will operate intermittently at intervals corre-
sponding to the vehicle speed (shorter when the vehi-
cle speed is low; longer when the vehicle speed is
high).
When you subsequently move the selector lever of the
automatic transmission to the “R” position, the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation. When you
move the selector lever from the “R” position to some
other position, the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is oper-
ating, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control le-
ver upward to the “ ” position. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in
use, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever
downward to the “ ” position. The washer fluid
sprays and the wiper operates until you release the
knob.
UB3558EA
3-56
Instruments and controls
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Before turning on the windshield wiper deicer, remove
any snow from the windshield. To turn on the wind-
shield wiper deicer, push the button. The indicator light
located on the button lights up while the windshield
wiper deicer is operating.
The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off
after about 15 minutes. If the windshield wiper blades
have been deiced completely before that time, push
the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
If deicing is not complete, you have to push the button
to turn the deicer on again.
Your SUBARU dealer can set your windshield wiper
deicer for continuous operation. Contact your SUBA-
RU dealer for details.
Once the windshield wiper deicer has been set for
continuous operation, pressing the button results in
continuous operation. The windshield wiper deicer au-
tomatically stops operating if any one of the following
conditions occurs during continuous operation.
" The outside temperature becomes 41°F (5°C) or
higher.
" The vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15 km/h) or
lower for 15 minutes.
" The battery voltage decreases below the permissi-
ble level.
UB3213BA
3-57
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Rear window defogger button
Vehicle with manual climate control system
Vehicle with automatic climate control system
The rear window defogger operates only when the ig-
nition switch is in the “ON” position.
The rear window defogger button is located on the cli-
mate control panel.
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15
minutes. If the window clears before that time, push
the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
If defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart
your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
UB3561BA
UB4205DA
3-58
Instruments and controls
To turn on the defogger, push the button. To turn it off,
push the button again.
The indicator light located on the button lights up while
the rear window defogger is operating.
Your SUBARU dealer can set your rear window defog-
ger for continuous operation. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
Once the rear window defogger has been set for con-
tinuous operation, the rear window defogger repeated-
ly operates for 15 minutes, stops for two minutes, and
again operates for 15 minutes. If the battery voltage
drops below the permissible level, continuous opera-
tion is canceled and operation stops as described be-
low.
" If the battery voltage drops below the permissible
level within 15 minutes of depression of the button,
continuous operation is canceled and the rear window
defogger stops operating 15 minutes later.
" If the battery voltage drops below the permissible
level after the rear window defogger has, following de-
pression of the button, operated for 15 minutes,
stopped operating for two minutes, and started operat-
ing again, the rear window defogger immediately
stops operating.
" Do not use sharp instruments or window
cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner
surface of the rear window. They may damage
the conductors printed on the window.
" To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not operate the defogger continu-
ously for any longer than necessary.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with the outside mirror
defogger, the outside mirror defogger operates
while the rear window defogger is operating.
3-59
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are
properly adjusted before you start driving.
! Inside mirror
The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the
tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you for the night
position. Push it away for the day position. The night
position reduces glare from headlights.
! Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if
equipped)
A) Left button
B) Auto dimming indicator
C) Photosensor
D) Right button
The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare coming
from headlights of vehicles behind you. It also con-
tains a built-in compass.
" By pressing and releasing the left button, the auto-
matic dimming function is toggled on or off. When the
automatic dimming function is on, the auto dimming in-
UB3517BA
A
BC
D
HS3037BC
3-60
Instruments and controls
dicator light (green) located to the right of the button
will illuminate.
" By pressing and releasing the right button, the com-
pass display is toggled on or off. When the compass is
on, an illuminated compass reading will appear in the
lower part of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror sur-
face turns bright if the transmission is shifted into re-
verse. This is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the
front and back sides. If the glare from the headlights of
vehicles behind you strikes the mirror, these sensors
detect it and make the reflection surface of the mirror
dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For
this reason, use care not to cover the sensors with
stickers, or other similar items. Periodically wipe the
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or
an applicator.
! Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all nonessential
electrical accessories (rear window defogger, heater/
air conditioning system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metal-
lic objects or structures and make certain the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3 seconds then re-
lease, and the compass will enter the calibration
mode. “CAL” and direction will be displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” disappears from
the display (about two or three circles). The compass
is now calibrated.
5. Further calibration may be necessary should out-
side influences cause the mirror to read inaccurately.
You will know that this has occurred if your compass
begins to read in only limited directions. Should you
encounter this situation, return to step one of the
above procedure and recalibrate the mirror.
HS3038BA
3-61
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
! Compass zone adjustment
1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer
to the “Compass calibration zone” map attached to the
end of this manual to verify that the compass zone set-
ting is correct for your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then
release, and the word “ZONE” will briefly appear and
then the zone number will be displayed.
3. Press the right hand button repeatedly to cycle the
display through all possible zone settings. Stop cycling
when the correct zone setting for your location is dis-
played.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the
zone setting mode.
! Outside mirrors
! Convex mirror (Passenger side)
Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and far-
ther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do
not use the convex mirror to judge the distance
of vehicles behind you when changing lanes.
Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and distance of ob-
jects that you view in convex mirror.
! Remote control mirror switch
The remote control mirrors operate only when the ig-
nition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust the left hand
mirror or to the “R” side to adjust the right hand mirror.
2. Move the knob in the direction you want to move
the mirror.
3. Return the knob to the neutral position to prevent
unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
UB3206CA
3-62
Instruments and controls
! Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
Vehicle with manual climate control system
Vehicle with automatic climate control system
The outside mirror defogger shares the button with
rear window defogger.
The outside mirror defogger operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the but-
ton.
To turn it off, push the button again. The indicator light
located on the button lights up while the outside mirror
defogger is operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15
minutes. If the mirror clears before that time, push the
button to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition
UB3561BA
UB4205DA
3-63
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If de-
frosting or defogging is desired when you restart your
vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on again.
NOTE
" While the outside mirror defogger is operating,
the rear window defogger also operates.
" When the rear window defogger has been set for
continuous operation, the outside mirror defogger
also operates continuously. Refer to the “Rear
window defogger button” section in this chapter.
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not operate the defogger continuously for
any longer than necessary.
Tilt steering wheel
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position
while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle
control and result in personal injury.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the “Front seats”
section (chapter 1).
2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.
4. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in
UB3563CA
3-64
Instruments and controls
place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely
locked by moving it up and down.
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
UB3564BA
4-1
4
Climate control
Ventilator ....................................................... 4-2
Air flow selection .............................................. 4-2
Center and side ventilators .............................. 4-3
Manual climate control system
(if equipped) ............................................... 4-4
Control panel ..................................................... 4-4
Heater operation ............................................... 4-7
Air conditioner operation ................................. 4-9
Automatic climate control system
(if equipped) ............................................... 4-10
Temperature sensors ....................................... 4-16
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner ........................................... 4-17
Cleaning ventilator grille .................................. 4-17
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 4-18
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit .............................................................. 4-18
Checking air conditioning system
before summer season .................................. 4-18
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity
and low temperature weather condition ...... 4-18
Air conditioner compressor shut-off
when engine is heavily loaded ...................... 4-18
Refrigerant for your climate control system .. 4-18
Air filtration system (if equipped) ................ 4-19
4-2
Climate control
Climate con trol
Ventilator
! Air flow selection
UB4521BA
4-3
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
! Center and side ventilators
! Center ventilators
Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the
flow direction.
! Side ventilators
A) Open
B) Close
Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the
flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille open/close
wheel upward to the “ ” position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the “ ” po-
sition.
UB4201BA
A
B
UB4500CB
4-4
Climate control
Manual climate control system (if
equipped)
! Control panel
A) Temperature control dial
B) Fan speed control dial
C) Air flow control dial
D) Air conditioner button
E) Air inlet selection button
F) Rear window defogger button (Refer to the “Rear win-
dow defogger button” in chapter 3.)
! Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the
air outlets over a range from the blue side (cool) to red
side (warm).
ABFE
D
C
UB4209BB
UB4519BA
4-5
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
! Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. The fan speed control dial
is used to select four fan speeds.
! Air flow control dial
This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets
and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets,
the foot outlets, and some through the windshield de-
froster outlets.
UB4516AA UB4515AA
4-6
Climate control
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets,
the windshield defroster outlets, and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets
and the windshield defroster outlets.
NOTE
In a vehicle equipped with an air conditioner, when
the dial is placed in the “ ” position or “ ”
position the air conditioner compressor automati-
cally operates to quickly defog the windshield.
However the indicator on the air conditioner but-
ton will not come on. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to “outside air”
mode.
In this state, you cannot select “recirculation”
mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection
button.
Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner com-
pressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
! Air conditioner button
The air conditioner operates only when the engine is
running.
Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in op-
eration to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
will come on.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
UB4518BA
4-7
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
! Air inlet selection button
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculated
inside the vehicle.
Push the air inlet button to the ON position. The indi-
cator light will come on.
Place this button in the ON position when you wish to
cool the cabin quickly (in a vehicle with an air condi-
tioner) or are driving on a dusty road.
OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is drawn into
the passenger compartment.
Push the air inlet button again to the OFF position. The
indicator light will go off.
Place this button in the OFF position when you reach
a road that is not dusty and when you wish to achieve
a comfortable temperature in the cabin.
Continued operation in the ON position may fog
up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as
soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
! Heater operation
! Defrosting or defogging the windshield
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win-
dows:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial all the way to the
right.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the highest speed.
NOTE
" In a vehicle equipped with an air conditioner,
when the dial is placed in the “ ” position or
“ ” position the air conditioner compressor au-
tomatically operates to quickly defog the wind-
shield. However the indicator on the air condition-
UB4517BA
4-8
Climate control
er button will not come on. At the same time, the
air inlet selection is automatically set to “outside
air” mode.
In this state, you cannot select “recirculation”
mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection
button.
Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner com-
pressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
" Warm air also comes out from the right and left
air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these out-
lets, turn the corresponding wheel to the “ ”
position.
! Heating and defrosting
To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield:
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the most com-
fortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
NOTE
" In a vehicle equipped with an air conditioner,
when the dial is placed in the “ ” position or
“ ” position the air conditioner compressor au-
tomatically operates to quickly defog the wind-
shield. However the indicator on the air condition-
er button will not come on. At the same time, the
air inlet selection is automatically set to “outside
air” mode.
In this state, you cannot select “recirculation”
mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection
button.
Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner com-
pressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
" Warm air also comes out from the right and left
air outlets. To stop warm air flow from these out-
lets, turn the corresponding wheel to the “ ”
position.
! Heating
To direct warm air toward the floor:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the most com-
fortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air
outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets,
turn the corresponding wheel to the “ ” posi-
tion.
4-9
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
! Bi-level heating
This setting allows you to direct air of different temper-
atures from the instrument panel and foot outlets. The
air from the foot outlets is slightly warmer than from the
instrument panel outlets.
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem-
perature level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the
red area or blue area decreases the temperature dif-
ference between the air from the instrument panel out-
lets and the air from the foot outlets.
! Ventilation
To force outside air through the instrument panel out-
lets:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet control
button to the ON position.
Continued operation in the ON position may fog
up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as
soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
! Air conditioner operation
! Cooling or dehumidifying
For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger
compartment, air flows through the instrument panel
outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.
3. Set the air conditioner button to the “ON” position.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue side.
5. Set the fan speed control dial at the desired speed.
! Defrosting or defogging
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win-
dows:
1. Set the air outlet control dial to the “ ” position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the red side.
3. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.
4-10
Climate control
NOTE
In a vehicle equipped with an air conditioner, when
the dial is placed in the “ ” position or “ ”
position the air conditioner compressor automati-
cally operates to quickly defog the windshield.
However the indicator on the air conditioner but-
ton will not come on. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to “outside air”
mode.
In this state, you cannot select “recirculation”
mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection
button.
Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner com-
pressor by pressing the air conditioner button.
Automatic climate control system (if
equipped)
NOTE
" Operate the automatic climate control system
when the engine is running.
" The blower fan rotates at a low speed when the
engine coolant temperature is low.
For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold
weather, press the “A/C” button.
" Even when cooling is not necessary, setting the
temperature much lower than the current outlet air
temperature turns on the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically and the “A/C” indicator light on
the control panel comes on.
The automatic climate control system automatically
controls outlet air temperature, fan speed, air flow dis-
tribution air-inlet control, and air conditioner compres-
sor operation. It activates when the “AUTO” button is
pressed, and is used to maintain a constant, comfort-
able climate within the passenger compartment.
The temperature can be set within a range of 65 to
85°F (18 to 32°C).
4-11
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
! Control panel
A) AUTO button
B) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)
C) Defroster button
D) Temperature control dial (passenger’s side)
E) Rear window defogger button (Refer to the “Rear win-
dow defogger button” in chapter 3.)
F) Air conditioner button
G) Air flow mode selection button
H) Fan speed control button
I) Air inlet selection button
J) OFF button
! AUTO button
AUTO mode operation:
When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the indicator light
“AUTO” on the display comes on. In this state, fan
speed, air flow distribution, air-inlet control, and air
conditioner compressor operation are automatically
controlled.
Manual mode operation:
If you operate any of the buttons on the control panel
other than the “OFF” button and temperature control
dial during automatic mode operation, the indicator
light “AUTO” on the control panel will go out. You can
then manually control the system as desired using the
AB
J IHGF E
CD
UB4202BB
UB4204BA
4-12
Climate control
button you operated.
To change the system back to the AUTO mode, press
the “AUTO” button.
! OFF button
The Automatic Climate Control system turns off (the
air conditioner compressor and fan turn off) when the
“OFF” button is pressed.
When the “OFF” button is pressed, the outside air in-
troduction mode (air inlet selection OFF) is automati-
cally selected.
! Temperature control dial
Driver’s side
UB4204CA
UB4204DA
4-13
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
Passenger’s side
It is possible to make separate temperature settings
for the driver’s side and passenger’s side. Each tem-
perature setting is shown on the display. With the dial
set at your desired temperature, the system automati-
cally adjusts the temperature of air supplied from the
outlets such that the desired temperature is achieved
and maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, the system
gives maximum cooling performance. If the dial is
turned fully clockwise, the system gives maximum
heating performance.
! – Defroster button
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield and front door
windows, push the defroster button “ ”. When the
“ ” button is pushed, regardless whether the air
conditioner is operating or not, outside air is drawn into
the passenger compartment, the air conditioner com-
pressor turns on, air flow is directed towards the wind-
shield and front door windows, and the indicator light
on the button comes on.
After eliminating the fogging from the windshield, re-
turn the climate control system to the AUTO mode by
pushing the “AUTO” button or turn off by pushing the
“OFF” button.
Alternatively, push the “ ” button again to return
UB4205BA
UB4205CA
4-14
Climate control
the system to the setting that was selected before you
activated the defroster.
! Fan speed control button
The fan speed control button has the 7 positions:
AUTO position and 6 different fan speed positions.
The fan speed is shown by the display.
With the fan speed control button in the AUTO posi-
tion, the fan speed changes automatically correspond-
ing the various conditions: air temperature inside and
outside of the passenger’s compartment, intensity of
the sunlight, etc.
! A/C – Air conditioner button
If the windshield starts to fog when the climate control
system is operated in the AUTO mode, push the air
conditioner button “A/C” to defog and dehumidify.
When this button is pushed, the air conditioner com-
pressor turns on and the indicator light “A/C” on the
display comes on. After eliminating the fogging from
the windshield, set the system back to the AUTO
mode by pushing the “AUTO” button.
NOTE
The air conditioner compressor does not operate
when the outside air temperature is below 32°F
(0°C).
UB4206BA
UB4207BA
4-15
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
! Air flow mode selection button
Select the desired air flow mode by pushing the air
flow mode selection button. The selected air flow
mode is shown by the display.
(Ventilation): Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets.
(Bi-level): Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets and the foot outlets.
(Heat): Air flows through the instrument panel out-
lets, the foot outlets, and some through the windshield
defroster outlets.
(Heat-def): Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets, the windshield defroster outlets, and the foot
outlets.
! Air inlet selection button
Select air flow by pushing the air inlet selection button
“/”.
The selected air inlet setting is shown on the control
panel.
(Recirculation): Interior air recirculates inside the
passenger compartment. Use this position when
quickly cooling down the passenger compartment or
to prevent outside air from entering the passenger
compartment. When the recirculation mode is select-
UB4207CA
UB4208BA
4-16
Climate control
ed, a “ ” indicator light appears on the display.
(Outside air): Outside air is drawn into the pas-
senger compartment. When the climate control sys-
tem is operated in the “AUTO” mode, this position is
selected automatically. (There is one exception: When
the temperature control dial is turned fully counter-
clockwise, the recirculation mode is automatically se-
lected.) When the outside air mode is selected, a
“ ” indicator light appears on the display.
Continued operation in the “ ” position
may fog up the windows. Switch to the
“ ” position as soon as the outside dusty
condition clears.
NOTE
When driving on a dusty road or behind a vehicle
that emits unpleasant exhaust gases, set the air
inlet selection button to the “ ” position.
From time to time, return the air inlet selection but-
ton to the “ ” position to draw outside air
into the passenger compartment.
! Temperature sensors
A) Solar sensor
B) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system employs several
sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are treat-
ed incorrectly and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior temperature correct-
ly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the follow-
ing precautions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
A
B
UB4210BB
4-17
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
The sensors are located as follows:
– Solar sensor: beside windshield defroster grille
– Interior air temperature sensor: on the side of the
driver-side part of the center panel
– Outside temperature sensor: behind front grille.
Operating tips for heater and air con-
ditioner
! Cleaning ventilator grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of
snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient
heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located
in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired by any ac-
cumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.
UB4203BA
4-18
Climate control
! Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows
open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate
into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling
by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during
the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cool-
ing efficiency.
! Lubrication oil circulation in the refrig-
erant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low en-
gine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few min-
utes each month during the off-season to circulate its
oil.
! Checking air conditioning system be-
fore summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks,
hose conditions, and proper operation each spring.
Have your SUBARU dealer perform this check.
! Cooling and dehumidifying in high hu-
midity and low temperature weather
condition
Under certain weather conditions (high relative humid-
ity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water
vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed.
This condition is normal and does not indicate any
problem with the air conditioning system.
! Air conditioner compressor shut-off
when engine is heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air con-
ditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off
during air conditioner operation whenever the acceler-
ator is fully depressed such as during rapid accelera-
tion or when driving on a steep upgrade.
! Refrigerant for your climate control
system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant
HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing
or checking the refrigerant is different from the method
for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for
service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong
refrigerant are not covered under warranty.
4-19
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
Air filtration system (if equipped)
If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is equipped
with an air filtration system, replace the filter element
according to the replacement schedule shown below.
This schedule should be followed to maintain the fil-
ter’s dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty con-
ditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently.
Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU
dealer. For replacement, we recommend the use of a
genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichev-
er comes first
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following
occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the
filter:
– Reduction of the air flow through the vents.
– Windshield gets easily fogged or misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heat-
ing and defroster performance if not properly
maintained.
5-1
5
Audio
Antenna system ............................................ 5-2
Printed antenna ................................................. 5-2
FM reception ..................................................... 5-2
Installation of accessories ........................... 5-3
Audio set ........................................................ 5-3
Type A audio set ............................................... 5-3
Type B audio set ............................................... 5-4
Type C audio set ............................................... 5-4
Type A audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-5
Radio operation ................................................ 5-6
Compact disc player operation ....................... 5-11
Type B audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-18
Radio operation ................................................ 5-19
Built-in CD changer operation ......................... 5-24
Type C audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-37
Radio operation ................................................ 5-38
Built-in CD changer operation ......................... 5-43
Audio control buttons (if equipped) ............ 5-56
Precautions to observe when handling
a compact disc .......................................... 5-58
MP3 audio ...................................................... 5-60
What is MP3? .................................................... 5-60
Creating MP3 files ............................................. 5-60
Saving MP3 files on a disc ............................... 5-60
Supported file systems .................................... 5-61
Compression format ......................................... 5-61
Numbers of folders and files ........................... 5-61
Copyright issues ............................................... 5-61
5-2
Audio
Audio
Antenna system
! Printed antenna
Do not use sharp instruments or window clean-
er containing abrasives to clean the inner sur-
face of the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the antenna
printed on the window.
Sedan
Station wagon
The antenna is printed on the inside of the rear window
glass.
! FM reception
Although FM is normally static free, reception can be
affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric condi-
tions, station strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause momentary stat-
ic, flutter or station interference. If reception continues
to be unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
UB5511BA
UB5220BA
5-3
Audio
– CONTINUED –
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing
a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in
your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly in-
stalled or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the fol-
lowing audio sets. See the pages indicated in this sec-
tion for operating details.
! Type A audio set
" Radio operation: refer to page 5-6
" CD (compact disc) player operation: refer to page 5-
11
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
P-201UN
BAL RPT RDM
FM AM
CD
123 456
UB5200AA
5-4
Audio
! Type B audio set
" Radio operation: refer to page 5-19
" Built-in CD changer operation: refer to page 5-24
! Type C audio set
" Radio operation: refer to page 5-38
" Built-in CD changer operation: refer to page 5-43
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
6 CD CHANGER P-201UH
BAL RPT RDM
LOAD
FM AM
CD
123 456
UB5201AA
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
FOLDER
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
MP3
6 CD CHANGER P-201UE
BAL RPT
RDM
TEXT
LOAD
FM AM
CD
123 456
UB5202AA
5-5
Audio
– CONTINUED –
Type A audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
P-201UN
BAL RPT RDM
FM AM
CD
123 456
UB5203AA
5-6
Audio
! Radio operation
! Power switch and volume control
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume
control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing
the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the di-
al. The dial can also be used for tone and balance ad-
justment.
! Tone and balance control
The volume control dial normally functions as a vol-
ume control. This dial becomes a control for Bass,
Midrange, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select
the appropriate tone and balance control mode.
Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning
the volume control dial. The control function returns to
volume control mode after about 5 seconds.
PUSH POWER-VOL
UB5206BA
PUSH POWER-VOL
UB5206CA
5-7
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" To change tone control modes
Each brief press of the “AUDIO” button changes con-
trol modes in the following sequence starting from vol-
ume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on,
the control mode is in the volume control.)
The “AUDIO” button is used for selecting the following
control modes:
AUDIO
UB5207BA
Volume
(VOLUME)
Bass
(BASS)
Midrange
(MIDDLE)
Treble
(TREBLE)
Control mode
(Range of lev-
els)
Turn
counterclockwise
Turn clockwise
Bass control
(–6 to +6)
For less bass sound For more bass
sound
Midrange con-
trol (–6 to +6)
For less midrange
sound
For more midrange
sound
Treble control
(–6 to +6)
For less treble
sound
For more treble
sound
Volume con-
trol (0 to 40)
For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-8
Audio
" To change balance control mode
Each brief press of the “BAL” button changes control
modes in the following sequence starting from volume
control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the
control mode is in the volume control.)
The “BAL” button is used for selecting the following
control modes:
BAL
UB5208BA
Volume
(VOLUME)
Balance
(BALANCE)
Fader
(FADER)
Control mode
(Range of lev-
els)
Turn
counterclockwise
Turn clockwise
Fader control
(R9 to F9)
To increase rear
speaker volume and
decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front
speaker volume and
decrease rear
speaker volume
Balance con-
trol (L9 to R9)
To increase left
speaker volume and
decrease right
speaker volume
To increase right
speaker volume and
decrease left speak-
er volume
Volume con-
trol (0 to 40)
For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-9
Audio
– CONTINUED –
! FM/AM selection button
Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is off to
turn on the radio.
Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is on to
select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM
stereo broadcast is received.
! Tuning
" Manual tuning
Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button to in-
crease the tuning frequency and press the “ ” side
of the button to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency interval
can be changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and
0.2 MHz in the FM mode.
If you hold down the “ ” side of the button, the tun-
ing frequency will increase continuously, and if you
hold down the “ ” side of the button, the tuning fre-
quency will decrease continuously. Release the button
when your desired frequency is reached.
FM AM
CD
UB5209BA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211DA
5-10
Audio
NOTE
While you are holding down either side of the
TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning frequency will not
stop changing even if the frequency of a receiv-
able station is reached.
" Seek tuning
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button and release it within 1.5 second, the radio will
automatically search for a receivable station and stop
at the first one it finds. This function may not be avail-
able, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a
situation, perform manual tuning to select the desired
station.
" Automatic tuning (SCAN)
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button for 1.5 second or longer, the radio will switch to
scan mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the
radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop
at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-
quency, after which scanning will continue until the en-
tire band has been scanned.
Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the button again to
cancel the scan mode and to stop on any displayed
frequency.
If you hold down the “ ” side of the button, the radio
will scan up the frequency band (from low frequencies
to high frequencies). If you hold down the “ ” side of
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
5-11
Audio
– CONTINUED –
the button, the radio will scan down the frequency
band (from high frequencies to low frequencies).
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta-
tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta-
tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
! Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a “preset button” allows you
to select that station in a single operation. Up to six,
AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM” or “AM” button to select FM1, FM2,
or AM reception.
2. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the button or tune
the radio manually until the desired station frequency
is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for more than 1.5
seconds to store the frequency. If the button is
pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the preceding se-
lection will remain in memory.
NOTE
" If the connection between the radio and battery
is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte-
nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec-
essary to reset the preset buttons.
" If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it
may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives
calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
! Compact disc player operation
! To playback a compact disc
" When CD is not in the player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while grip-
ping the edge of the disc, then insert it in to the slot
(with the label side up) and the player will automatical-
ly pull the disc into position.
123 456
UB5210AA
5-12
Audio
NOTE
" DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE DISC IN-
SERTION SLOT AT A TIME.
" Be sure to always insert a disc with the label
side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side
down, it might be ejected or the player might shut
off.
" After the last song finishes, the player will auto-
matically return to track 1 (the first song on the
disc).
" If you insert a disc that the player cannot read,
the player will eject the disc and revert to its previ-
ous mode.
" The player is designed to be able to play music
CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, but it may not be able
to play certain ones.
" When CD is in the player
When the “CD” button is pressed, the player will start
playback.
NOTE
After the last song finishes, the player will auto-
matically return to track 1 (the first song on the
disc).
! To stop playback of a CD
When the “POWER-VOL” button is pressed during
playback of a CD, the CD stops playing temporarily.
To let the CD resume playing, press the button again.
FM AM
CD
UB5209DA
5-13
Audio
– CONTINUED –
! To select a song from its beginning
" Forward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK but-
ton to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time
this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track
number will increase.
" Backward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK but-
ton to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each
time this side of the button is pressed, the indicated
track number will decrease.
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211BA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211CA
5-14
Audio
! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
" Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button con-
tinuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-forward the
disc.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
NOTE
If you fast-forward past the last track on the disc,
the player will select the first track on the disc and
start playing it.
" Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button con-
tinuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-reverse the
disc.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE
If you fast-reverse to the beginning of the first
track on the disc, the fast-reversing will stop and
the player will start playing the first track on the
disc.
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211BA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211CA
5-15
Audio
– CONTINUED –
! Repeat playback
Use this to play a certain track repeatedly. During
playback, press the “RPT” button. The “RPT” indicator
will come on and the track will be played continuously.
To cancel the repeat mode, press the button again.
Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal play-
back mode is restored.
NOTE
The repeat-playback mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following operations:
" Press the “RDM” button
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button
" Press the “ ” button
" Select the radio mode
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
! Random playback
Use this to play the tracks on the disc in random order.
During playback, press the “RDM” button. The “RDM”
indicator will come on and all songs on the disc will be
played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again.
Then the “RDM” indicator goes out, and normal play-
back mode is restored.
RPT
UB5213BA
RDM
UB5214BA
5-16
Audio
NOTE
The random-playback mode will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following operations:
" Press the “RPT” button
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button
" Press the “ ” button
" Select the radio mode
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
! Scan
The scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds
of each track on the disc in succession. Press the
“ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN button to start scanning
through all tracks upward beginning with the track fol-
lowing the currently selected one. Press the “ ” side
of the button to start scanning through all tracks down-
ward beginning with the track preceding the currently
selected one. After all tracks on the disc has been
scanned, normal playback mode is restored.
To cancel a scan, press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
button again.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you perform
any of the following operations:
" Press the “RPT” button
" Press the “RDM” button
" Press the “ ” button
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the TUNE/
TRACK button
" Select the radio mode
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
5-17
Audio
– CONTINUED –
! To eject a disc from the player
When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in
the player, press the eject button “ ”. The disc will
be ejected.
NOTE
" Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,
because vibration might make it fall out.
" If the disc is left ejected for more than approxi-
mately 15 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position, a disc protection
function will operate, automatically reloading the
disc. In this case, the disc is not played.
UB5215BA
5-18
Audio
Type B audio set (if equipped)
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
6 CD CHANGER P-201UH
BAL RPT RDM
LOAD
FM AM
CD
123 456
UB5204AA
5-19
Audio
– CONTINUED –
! Radio operation
! Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/
balance control
" Power switch and volume control
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume
control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing
the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the di-
al.
" Tone and balance control
The volume control dial normally functions as a vol-
ume control. This dial becomes a control for Bass,
Midrange, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select
the appropriate tone and balance control mode.
Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning
the volume control dial. The control function returns to
volume control mode after about 5 seconds.
PUSH POWER-VOL
UB5206BA
PUSH POWER-VOL
UB5206CA
5-20
Audio
To change tone control modes: Each brief press of
the “AUDIO” button changes control modes in the fol-
lowing sequence starting from volume control mode.
(When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is
in the volume control.)
The “AUDIO” button is used for selecting the following
control modes:
AUDIO
UB5207BA
Volume
(VOLUME)
Bass
(BASS)
Midrange
(MIDDLE)
Treble
(TREBLE)
Control mode
(Range of lev-
els)
Turn
counterclockwise
Turn clockwise
Bass control
(–6 to +6)
For less bass sound For more bass
sound
Midrange con-
trol (–6 to +6)
For less midrange
sound
For more midrange
sound
Treble control
(–6 to +6)
For less treble
sound
For more treble
sound
Volume con-
trol (0 to 40)
For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-21
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" To change balance control modes
Each brief press of the “BAL” button changes control
modes in the following sequence starting from volume
control mode. (When the radio is turned on, the control
mode is in the volume control.)
The “BAL” button is used for selecting the following
control modes:
BAL
UB5208BA
Volume
(VOLUME)
Balance
(BALANCE)
Fader
(FADER)
Control mode
(Range of lev-
els)
Turn
counterclockwise
Turn clockwise
Fader control
(R9 to F9)
To increase rear
speaker volume and
decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front
speaker volume and
decrease rear
speaker volume
Balance con-
trol (L9 to R9)
To increase left
speaker volume and
decrease right
speaker volume
To increase right
speaker volume and
decrease left speak-
er volume
Volume con-
trol (0 to 40)
For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-22
Audio
! FM/AM selection button (FM/AM)
Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is off to
turn on the radio.
Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is on to
select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM
stereo broadcast is received.
! Tuning
" Manual tuning
Push the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button to in-
crease the tuning frequency and press the “ ” side
of the button to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency interval
can be changed between 10 KHz in the AM mode and
0.2 MHz in the FM mode.
If you hold down the “ ” side of the button, the tun-
ing frequency will increase continuously, and if you
hold down the “ ” side of the button, the tuning fre-
quency will decrease continuously. Release the button
when your desired frequency is reached.
FM AM
CD
UB5209BA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211DA
5-23
Audio
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
While you are holding down either side of the
TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning frequency will not
stop changing even if the frequency of a receiv-
able station is reached.
" Seek tuning
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button and release it within 1.5 second, the radio will
automatically search for a receivable station and stop
at the first one it finds. This function may not be avail-
able, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a
situation, perform manual tuning to select the desired
station.
" Automatic tuning (SCAN)
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button for 1.5 second or longer, the radio will switch to
scan mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the
radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop
at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-
quency, after which scanning will continue until the en-
tire band has been scanned from the low end to the
high end.
Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the button again to
cancel the scan mode and to stop on any displayed
frequency.
If you hold down the “ ” side of the button, the radio
will scan up the frequency band (from low frequencies
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
5-24
Audio
to high frequencies). If you hold down the “ ” side of
the button, the radio will scan down the frequency
band (from high frequencies to low frequencies).
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta-
tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta-
tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
! Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button allows you to
select that station in a single operation. Up to six AM,
FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM” or “AM” selection button to select
AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.
2. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the button or tune
the radio manually until the desired station frequency
is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for at least 1.5 sec-
onds to store the frequency. The frequency of the sta-
tion will flash once on the display at this time. If the but-
ton is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the preceding
selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
" If the connection between the radio and battery
is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte-
nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec-
essary to reset the preset buttons.
" If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it
may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives
calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
! Built-in CD changer operation
NOTE
" Make sure to always insert a disc with the label
side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side
down, it might be ejected or the player might shut
123 456
UB5210AA
5-25
Audio
– CONTINUED –
off.
" The player is designed to be able to play music
CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, but it may not be able
to play certain ones.
! How to insert a CD(s)
" Inserting a CD
0
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the magazine in
the player has an idle position where you can insert a
disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle
position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle po-
sition in the magazine.
2. When the “LOAD” indicator flashes, insert the disc.
Once you have inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator
will go off. The disc will then be automatically drawn in,
and the player will begin to play the first track on the
disc.
" To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1
and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the
ascending order of position number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you
have pressed the “LOAD” button, the player will begin
to play back the first track of the last disc you have in-
serted.
" The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is al-
ready inserted in the corresponding position of the
magazine.
" While the player is in the loading mode, if you press
the “FM” or “AM” button, the player will enter the stand-
by mode. Press the “CD” button to start playback.
LOAD
UB5216BA
5-26
Audio
" Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the magazine in
the player has an idle position where you can insert a
disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle
position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indicator of which
steadily lights up are already loaded with discs.
2. Press the “Disc select” button at the position where
you want to insert a disc.
3. When the “LOAD” indicator flashes, insert the disc.
Once you have inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator
will go off. The disc will then be automatically drawn in,
and the player will begin to play the first track on the
disc.
" If you wish to insert another disc, repeat the proce-
dure beginning with step 1.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you
have pressed the “LOAD” button, the player will begin
to play back the first track of the last disc you have in-
serted.
LOAD
UB5216BA
123 456
UB5210AA
5-27
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" While the player is in the loading mode, if you press
the “FM” or “AM” button, the player will enter standby
mode. Press the “CD” button to start playback.
" Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading
mode)
0
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” button for more
than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep sound
and will enter the full disc loading mode.
2. When the disc number indicator and “ALL LOAD”
indicator start flashing, insert a disc within 15 seconds.
If a disc is successfully loaded during this period, the
disc number indicator will stop blinking and will steadi-
ly light.
3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next
disc number indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating
Steps 2 and 3, the player will start playback of the
discs, beginning with the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15-second in-
terval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and
the player will start playback of the disc inserted first.
! How to play back a CD or make a pause
" When there is no CD inserted:
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a CD(s)”.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of
the CD, beginning with the first track.
LOAD
UB5216BA
5-28
Audio
" When there are CDs loaded:
Press a desired one of the “Disc select” buttons the
disc number indicator of which steadily lights up. The
player will then start playback of the selected CD, be-
ginning with the first track.
If you have inserted a disc that the player cannot read,
the player will show the elapsed time but will not pro-
duce any sound.
! To select a song from its beginning
" Forward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK but-
ton to skip to the beginning of the next track. Each time
this side of the button is pressed, the indicated track
number will increase.
123 456
UB5210AA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211BA
5-29
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" Backward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK but-
ton to skip to the beginning of the current track. Each
time the button is pressed, the indicated track number
will decrease.
! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
" Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button con-
tinuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-forward the
disc.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
NOTE
If you fast-forward past the last track on the disc,
the player will select the first track on the disc and
start playing it.
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211CA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211BA
5-30
Audio
" Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button con-
tinuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-reverse the
disc.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE
If you fast-reverse to the beginning of the first
track on the disc, the fast-reversing will stop and
the player will start playing the first track on the
disc.
! Repeat playback
" To repeat the currently playing track
To repeat a track, press the “RPT” button while the
track is playing. The display will show “RPT”, and the
track will be repeated.
To cancel the track-repeat-play mode, press the
“RPT” button twice. The “RPT” indication will go off,
and the normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
" Each time you press the button, the mode will
change to the next one in the sequence shown be-
low.
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211CA
RPT
UB5213BA
5-31
Audio
– CONTINUED –
If you accidentally press the button and cancel the
track-repeat-play mode, press it again to reselect
the repeat play mode.
" If you perform a fast-forward or fast-reverse op-
eration while the player is in repeat-play mode, the
repeat-play mode will remain active even after you
skip tracks.
" If you perform a forward-direction or backward-
direction skip operation while the player is in re-
peat-play mode, the player will jump to the follow-
ing/previous track but the repeat-play mode will
remain active.
" The repeat-play mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps:
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/
SCAN button
" Press the “RPT” button.
" Press the “RDM” button
" Press the “ ” button
" Press the disc select button
" Select the radio mode
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
" To repeat the currently playing disc
To repeat the currently playing CD, press the “RPT”
button twice while a track is playing. The display will
show “D-RPT”, and the CD will be played repeatedly.
To cancel the disc repeat-play mode, press the “RPT”
button once more. The “D-RPT” indication will go off,
and the normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
" Each time you briefly press the button, the mode
will change to the next one in the sequence shown
below.
RPT D-RPT CANCEL
RPT
UB5213BA
5-32
Audio
If you accidentally press the button and cancel the
disc-repeat-play mode, press it again to reselect
the disc-repeat-play mode.
" The disc-repeat-play mode will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps:
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/
SCAN button
" Press the “RPT” button.
" Press the “RDM” button
" Press the “ ” button
" Press the disc select button
" Select the radio mode
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
! Random playback
Press the “RDM” button while a disc is being played
back to play all of the tracks on the disc in a random
order. The “RDM” indicator will come on and all songs
on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again.
Then the “RDM” indicator goes out, and normal play-
back mode is restored.
NOTE
" Random playback will be cancelled if you per-
form any of the following steps:
" Press the “RPT” button
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/
RPT D-RPT CANCEL
RDM
UB5214BA
5-33
Audio
– CONTINUED –
SCAN button
" Press the “ ” button
" Press the disc select button
" Select the radio mode
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
" If you fast-forward the disc during random play-
back, the player will cancel the fast-forwarding
when the end of the last track on the disc is
reached and will then return to the random play-
back mode. If you fast-reverse the disc during ran-
dom playback, the fast-reversing will be canceled
as soon as the beginning of the track being played
is reached. The player will then return to the ran-
dom playback mode.
" If you perform a forward direction skip while a
track is being played in the random playback
mode, the player will random select another track
and play it. If you perform a backward direction
skip, the disc will return to the beginning of the
currently playing track.
! Scan
The scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds
of each track on the disc in succession. Press the
“ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN button to start scanning
through all tracks upward beginning with the track fol-
lowing the currently selected one. Press the “ ” side
of the button to start scanning through all tracks down-
ward beginning with the track preceding the currently
selected one. After all tracks on the disc have been
scanned, normal playback mode is restored.
To cancel a scan, press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
button again.
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
5-34
Audio
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you perform
any of the following steps:
" Press the “RPT” button
" Press the “RDM” button
" Select the radio mode
" Press the disc select button
" Press the “ ” button
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
! How to unload CDs from the player
" Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only
one disc.
0
1. Use the disc select button to select the disc to be
ejected.
123 456
UB5210AA
5-35
Audio
– CONTINUED –
2. Briefly press the “ ” button. The selected disc
will be ejected. The disc number indicator will flash at
this time. When you remove the ejected disc, the disc
number indicator will go off.
To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1
and 2.
" Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejec-
tion mode)
0
1. If you continue to press the “ ” button, the play-
er will produce beep sound and will enter the all disc
ejection mode. At this time, the disc number indicator
and “ALL EJECT” indicator will flash.
2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other
discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If
you do not remove the disc that has been ejected, the
“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.
NOTE
" Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,
because vibration might make it fall out.
UB5215BA
UB5215BA
5-36
Audio
" If you press the “ ” button while the player is
in all disc ejection mode, the mode will be can-
celled following ejection of the disc that is current-
ly being ejected.
" If you press the “CD” button while the player is
in all disc ejection mode, the player will draw in the
discs that have been ejected and play them.
5-37
Audio
– CONTINUED –
Type C audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” positions.
PUSH POWER-VOL
SEEK
SCAN
FOLDER
TUNE
TRACK
AUDIO
MP3
6 CD CHANGER P-201UE
BAL RPT
RDM
TEXT
LOAD
FM AM
CD
123 456
UB5205AA
5-38
Audio
! Radio operation
! Power switch and volume control
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume
control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing
the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the di-
al. The dial can also be used for tone and balance ad-
justment.
! Tone and balance control
The volume control dial normally functions as a vol-
ume control. This dial becomes a control for Bass,
Midrange, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select
the appropriate tone and balance control mode.
Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning
the volume control dial. The control function returns to
volume control mode after about 5 seconds.
PUSH POWER-VOL
UB5206BA
PUSH POWER-VOL
UB5206CA
5-39
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" To change tone control modes
Each brief press of the “AUDIO” button changes con-
trol modes in the following sequence starting from vol-
ume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on,
the control mode is in the volume control.)
The “AUDIO” button is used for selecting the following
control modes:
AUDIO
UB5207BA
Volume
(VOLUME)
Bass
(BASS)
Midrange
(MIDDLE)
Treble
(TREBLE)
Control mode
(Range of lev-
els)
Turn
counterclockwise
Turn clockwise
Bass control
(–6 to +6)
For less bass sound For more bass
sound
Midrange con-
trol (–6 to +6)
For less midrange
sound
For more midrange
sound
Treble control
(–6 to +6)
For less treble
sound
For more treble
sound
Volume con-
trol (0 to 40)
For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-40
Audio
" To change balance control modes
Each brief press of the “BAL” button changes control
modes in the following sequence starting from volume
control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the
control mode is in the volume control.)
The “BAL” button is used for selecting the following
control modes:
BAL
UB5208BA
Volume
(VOLUME)
Balance
(BALANCE)
Fader
(FADER)
Control mode
(Range of lev-
els)
Turn
counterclockwise
Turn clockwise
Fader control
(R9 to F9)
To increase rear
speaker volume and
decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front
speaker volume and
decrease rear
speaker volume
Balance con-
trol (L9 to R9)
To increase left
speaker volume and
decrease right
speaker volume
To increase right
speaker volume and
decrease left speak-
er volume
Volume con-
trol (0 to 40)
For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-41
Audio
– CONTINUED –
! FM/AM selection button
Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is off to
turn on the radio.
Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is on to
select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM
stereo broadcast is received.
! Tuning
" Manual tuning
Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button to in-
crease the tuning frequency and press the tuning but-
ton marked “ ” to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency interval
can be changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and
0.2 MHz in the FM mode.
If you hold down the “ ” side of the button, the tun-
ing frequency will increase continuously, and if you
hold down the “ ” side of the button, the tuning fre-
quency will decrease continuously. Release the button
when your desired frequency is reached.
FM AM
CD
UB5209BA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211DA
5-42
Audio
NOTE
While you are holding down either side of the
TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning frequency will not
stop changing even if the frequency of a receiv-
able station is reached.
" Seek tuning (SEEK)
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button and release it within 1.5 second, the radio will
automatically search for a receivable station and stop
at the first one it finds. This function may not be avail-
able, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a
situation, perform manual tuning to select the desired
station.
" Scan tuning (SCAN)
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button for 1.5 second or longer, the radio will switch to
scan mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the
radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop
at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-
quency, after which scanning will continue until the en-
tire band has been scanned.
Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the button again to
cancel the scan mode and to stop on any displayed
frequency.
If you hold down the “ ” side of the button, the radio
will scan up the frequency band (from low frequencies
to high frequencies). If you hold down the “ ” side of
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
5-43
Audio
– CONTINUED –
the button, the radio will scan down the frequency
band (from high frequencies to low frequencies).
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta-
tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta-
tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
! Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a “preset button” allows you
to select that station in a single operation. Up to six
AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM” or “AM” button to select FM1, FM2
or AM reception.
2. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the button or tune
the radio manually until the desired station frequency
is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for more than 1.5
seconds to store the frequency. If the button is
pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the preceding se-
lection will remain in memory.
NOTE
" If the connection between the radio and battery
is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte-
nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec-
essary to reset the preset buttons.
" If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it
may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives
calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
! Built-in CD changer operation
NOTE
" Make sure to always insert a disc with the label
side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side
down, it might be ejected or the player might shut
off.
" If a disc is inserted during a radio broadcast, the
disc will interrupt the broadcast.
123 456
UB5210AA
5-44
Audio
" After the last song finishes, the disc will auto-
matically return to track 1 (the first song on the
disc) and will automatically play back.
" The player is designed to be able to play music
CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, but it may not be able
to play certain ones.
" Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not sup-
ported, and if inserted, they will be immediately
ejected.
! How to insert a CD(s)
" Inserting a CD
0
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the magazine in
the player has an idle position where you can insert a
disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle
position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle po-
sition in the magazine.
2. When the “LOAD” indicator flashes, insert the disc.
Once you have inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator
will go off. The disc will then be automatically drawn in,
and the player will begin to play back the first track of
the disc.
" To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1
and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the
ascending order of position number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you
have pressed the “LOAD” button, the player will begin
to play back the first track of the last disc you have in-
serted.
" The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is al-
ready inserted in the corresponding position of the
magazine.
" While the player is in the loading mode, if you press
“FM” or “AM” button, the player will enter the standby
mode. Press the “CD” button to start playback.
LOAD
UB5216BA
5-45
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" Inserting a disc in a desired position
0
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the magazine in
the player has an idle position where you can insert a
disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle
position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indicator of which
steadily lights up are already loaded with discs.
2. Press the “Disc select” button at the position where
you want to insert a disc.
3. When the “LOAD” indicator flashes, insert the disc.
Once you have inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator
will go off. The disc will then be automatically drawn in,
and the player will begin to play the first track on the
disc.
" If you wish to insert another disc, repeat the proce-
dure beginning with step 1.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you
have pressed the “LOAD” button, the player will begin
to play back the first track of the last disc you have in-
serted.
LOAD
UB5216BA
123 456
UB5210AA
5-46
Audio
" While the player is in the loading mode, if you press
“FM” or “AM” button, the player will enter standby
mode. Press the “CD” button to start playback.
" Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading
mode)
0
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” button for more
than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep sound
and will enter the full disc loading mode.
2. When the disc number indicator and “ALL LOAD”
indicator start flashing, insert a disc within 15 seconds.
If a disc is successfully loaded during this period, the
disc number indicator will stop blinking and will steadi-
ly light.
3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next
disc number indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating
Steps 2 and 3, the player will start playback of the
discs, beginning with the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 seconds in-
terval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and
the player will start playback of the disc inserted first.
! How to play back a CD or make a pause
" When there is no CD inserted:
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a CD(s)”.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of
the CD, beginning with the first track.
LOAD
UB5216BA
5-47
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" When there are CDs loaded:
Press a desired one of the “Disc select” buttons the
disc number indicator of which steadily lights up. The
player will then start playback of the selected CD, be-
ginning with the first track.
If a disc that the player cannot read has been loaded,
the player will eject that disc and proceed to the next
disc.
! To select a song from its beginning
" Forward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK but-
ton to skip to the beginning of the next track/file (track).
Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track/
file (track) number will increase.
NOTE
In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last track/file
(track) will take you back to the first track/file
(track) in the folder.
123 456
UB5210AA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211BA
5-48
Audio
" Backward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK but-
ton to skip to the beginning of the current track/file
(track). Each time the button is pressed, the indicated
track/file (track) number will decrease.
NOTE
In an MP3 folder, skipping past the first track/file
(track) will take you to the last track/file (track) in
the folder.
! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
" Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button con-
tinuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-forward the
disc/folder.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
NOTE
If you fast-forward to the end of the last track/file
(track), fast-forwarding will stop and the player will
start playback beginning with the first track/file
(track).
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211CA
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211BA
5-49
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK button con-
tinuously for more than 0.5 second to fast-reverse the
disc/folder.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE
If you fast-reverse to the beginning of the first
track/file (track), fast-reversing will stop and the
player will start playback.
! Repeating
" To repeat the currently playing track/file (track)
To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press the “RPT”
button while the track/file (track) is playing. The dis-
play will show “RPT”, and the track/file (track) will be
repeated.
To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play mode, brief-
ly press the “RPT” button twice. The “RPT” indication
will go off, and the normal playback mode will be re-
sumed.
NOTE
" Each time you briefly press the button, the mode
will change to the next one in the sequence shown
TUNE
TRACK
UB5211CA
RPT
RDM
UB5217BA
5-50
Audio
below.
If you accidentally press the button and cancel the
track/file (track) repeat-play mode, press it again
to reselect the repeat-play mode.
" The repeat-play mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps:
" Press the “RPT” button
" Press the “ ” button
" Press the disc select button
" Select the radio mode
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/
SCAN button
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
" To repeat the currently playing disc/folder
To repeat the currently playing disc/folder, press the
“RPT” button twice while a track/file (track) is playing.
The display will show “D-RPT”, and the disc/folder will
be played repeatedly.
To cancel the disc/folder repeat play mode, press the
“RPT” button once more. The “D-RPT” indication will
go off, and the normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
" Each time you briefly press the button, the mode
will change to the next one in the sequence shown
below.
RPT D-RPT CANCEL
RPT
RDM
UB5217BA
5-51
Audio
– CONTINUED –
If you accidentally press the button and cancel the
disc/folder repeat-play mode, press it again to re-
select the disc/folder repeat-play mode.
" The disc/folder repeat-play mode will be can-
celled if you perform any of the following steps:
" Press the “RPT” button
" Press the “ ” button
" Press the disc select button
" Select the radio mode
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/
SCAN button
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
! Random playback
Press the “RPT” button briefly during disc/folder play-
back to play all of the tracks/files (tracks) on the disc/
folder in a random order. The display will show “RDM”,
and all of the tracks on the disc/folder will be played in
a random order.
To cancel random playback, press the “RPT” button
again for at least 1.5 second. The “RDM” indication will
go off, and the normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if you perform
any of the following steps:
" Press the “RPT” button
RPT D-RPT CANCEL
RPT
RDM
UB5217BA
5-52
Audio
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button
" Press the “ ” button
" Press the disc select button
" Select the radio mode
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
! Auto tuning (scan mode)
The scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds
of each track/file (track) in succession. Press the “ ”
side of the SEEK/SCAN button for 1.5 second or long-
er to start scanning upward beginning with the track/
file (track) following the currently selected one. Press
the “ ” side of the button to start scanning down-
ward beginning with the track/file (track) preceding the
currently selected one. When all tracks/files (tracks) in
the disk/folder have been scanned, normal playback
will be resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press the
“ ” or “ ” side of the button for 1.5 second or long-
er.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you perform
any of the following steps:
" Press the “RPT” button
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the TUNE/
TRACK button
" Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
button
" Press the “ ” button
" Press the disc select button
" Select the radio mode
" Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
5-53
Audio
– CONTINUED –
! Display selection
If you press the “TEXT” button for 0.5 second or longer
during playback, the indication will change to the next
one in the sequence shown below.
! Page (track/folder title) scroll
If, having pressed the “TEXT” button to select track ti-
tle or folder title display, you press the “TEXT” button
again for less than 0.5 second, the title will be scrolled
so you can see all of it. You will see eight characters
at a time.
NOTE
The display is designed to show titles for up to
eight pages (64 characters in total). However, it
may in some cases show titles for only up to four
pages (32 characters in total).
TEXT
UB5218BA
Folder number/file (track) number Track title
Folder title
TEXT
UB5218BA
5-54
Audio
! Folder selection
Press the “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN button briefly
to select the next folder. Press the “ ” side of the
button briefly to go back to the previous folder. The
folder title will be shown each time you press one of
the buttons.
NOTE
" Selecting folders in this way is possible only
within a single disc.
" Only MP3 folders are recognized when an at-
tempt to select the next or previous folder is made.
If no appropriate folder exists on the disc, press-
ing the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN but-
ton has no effect.
! How to unload CDs from the player
" Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only
one disc.
0
1. Use the disc select button to select the disc to be
ejected.
SEEK
SCAN
UB5212DA
123 456
UB5210AA
5-55
Audio
– CONTINUED –
2. Briefly press the “ ” button. The selected disc
will be ejected. The disc number indicator will flash at
this time. When you remove the ejected disc, the disc
number indicator will go off.
To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1
and 2.
" Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejec-
tion mode)
0
1. If you continue to press the “ ” button, the play-
er will produce beep sound and will enter the all disc
ejection mode. At this time, the disc number indicator
and “ALL EJECT” indicator will flash.
2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other
discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If
you do not remove the disc that has been ejected, the
“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.
NOTE
" Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,
because vibration might make it fall out.
UB5215BA
UB5215BA
5-56
Audio
" If you press the “ ” button while the player is
in all disc ejection mode, the mode will be can-
celled following ejection of the disc that is current-
ly being ejected.
" If you press the “CD” button while the player is
in all disc ejection mode, the player will draw in the
discs that have been ejected and play them.
Audio control buttons (if equipped)
These buttons are located on the spokes of the steer-
ing wheel. They allow the driver to control audio func-
tions without taking his/her hands off the steering
wheel.
! MODE button
This button is used to select the desired audio mode.
Each time it is pressed, the mode changes to the next
one in the following sequence:
UB5559BA
FM* AM*
CD
5-57
Audio
– CONTINUED –
*: The frequency last received in the selected waveband will
be displayed.
! “ ” and “ ” buttons
" With radio mode selected
Press the “ ” button or “ ” button. The radio will
seek the next receivable station and stop on it.
That station’s frequency will be shown on the audio
display.
" With CD mode selected
Press the “ ” button to skip forward in the track/file
(track) order. Press the “ ” button to skip backward
in the track/file (track) order.
The track/file (track) number will be shown on the au-
dio display.
! Volume control buttons
Press the “+” button to increase the volume. Press the
“–” button to reduce the volume.
A number indicating the volume will be shown on the
audio display.
UB5559CA
UB5560BA
5-58
Audio
! MUTE button
Press this button if you wish to immediately cut the vol-
ume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
Precautions to observe when han-
dling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs)
that have the mark shown below. Also, some compact
discs cannot be played.
UB5560CA
UB5221AA
5-59
Audio
– CONTINUED –
" In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can form inside
the CD player, preventing normal operation. If this
happens, eject the CD and wait for the player to dry
out.
" Skipping may occur when the CD player is subject-
ed to severe vibration (for example, when the vehicle
is driven on a rough surface).
" To remove a disc from the case, press the center of
the case and hold both edges of the disc. If the disc
surface is touched directly, contamination could cause
poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface.
" Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are de-
posits, wipe the disc surface from the center outward
with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.
" Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or
cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-stan-
dard shape (for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
" A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in
places exposed to direct sunlight, near heaters or in
vehicles parked in the sun or hot days.
HS5018BA
5-60
Audio
MP3 audio
! What is MP3?
MP3 (the name is an abbreviation of ‘MPEG Audio
Layer 3’) is a compression format for digital audio. It
was developed by the Motion Picture Experts Group.
It permits audio data to be shrunk by a factor of about
10 with no loss of sound quality, meaning that the au-
dio on 10 conventional CDs can be fitted onto a single
CD-R or CD-RW (assuming a bit rate of 128 kbps and
a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz).
NOTE
" MP3 encoding and writing software is not sup-
plied with the audio system.
" CD writing software is not supplied with the au-
dio system.
! Creating MP3 files
" To create a high-quality MP3 file, it is advisable to a
high bit rate (128 kbps or higher) and a high sampling
frequency.
" If a file is created with a variable bit rate (VBR), the
elapsed time during playback may not be displayed
correctly and the sound may skip.
" The sound quality during playback depends upon
the encoder and bit rate. Detailed information can be
found in the user’s manuals for encoder software and
writing software.
" A fixed bit rate of 128 kbps or higher is recommend-
ed.
! Saving MP3 files on a disc
" Do not save any non-MP3 file on a disc. Also, do not
save any unnecessary folder on a disc.
" If many folders and/or non-MP3 files are saved on a
disc, a delay will be caused before playback begins.
" If a disc contains both Compact Disc-Digital Audio
(CD-DA) files and MP3 files, the system will play only
the CD-DA files.
" Add the extension ‘.MP3’ to the name of every MP3
file. The system will not play any file that has either no
extension or an extension other than ‘.MP3’.
" Do not add the extension ‘.MP3’ to the name of any
non-MP3 file. Doing so could lead to speaker damage.
" The system supports multi-session recording, so
disc-at-once recording is recommended.
" The system does not support packet writing soft-
ware.
" The system does not have a playlist function.
" The system may not be able to display and play cer-
tain MP3 files depending on the writing software and
CD recorder.
" Recording must be performed using a file system
5-61
Audio
– CONTINUED –
supported by the audio system. Otherwise, the audio
system may not play the MP3 files and may not display
folder titles and file titles.
! Supported file systems
The audio system supports the following file systems:
" ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2
" Apple Extension to ISO 9660
" Joliet
" Romeo
NOTE
The audio system does not support the following
file systems:
" Apple HFS
" UDF 1.50
" Mix CD (CD Extra)
! Compression format
" MPEG 1 audio layer 3 (MP3)
Bit rate: 32 kbps – 320 kbps
Sampling frequency: 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
" MPEG 2 audio layer 3 (MP3)
Bit rate: 8 kbps – 160 kbps
Sampling frequency: 16, 22.05, 24 kHz
! Numbers of folders and files
" Maximum number of folders: 255 (including root
folder)
" Maximum number of files: 999 (maximum number in
one folder: 255)
" Maximum number of layers: 8
NOTE
" Not all of the discs stored in MP3 files may be
able to be played back.
" Even if a folder contains no MP3 files, it is count-
ed as a folder.
" Writing software can rearrange folders and files
such that the playback order is different from the
desired one.
" The playback order for a given disc can be dif-
ferent with different players.
! Copyright issues
Except with respect to copies made for personal use,
duplication, distribution, and transmission of music
and other copyrighted material on a disc without per-
mission from the copyright holder is illegal.
6-1
6
Interior equipment
Interior light .................................................. 6-2
Dome light ......................................................... 6-2
Cargo area light (Station wagon) ..................... 6-3
Map light ........................................................ 6-3
Sun visors ..................................................... 6-5
Sun visor extension plate ................................ 6-5
Vanity mirror with light ..................................... 6-6
Storage compartment .................................. 6-7
Glove box ........................................................... 6-7
Center console box ........................................... 6-8
Center panel compartment .............................. 6-10
Overhead console (if equipped) ...................... 6-11
Cup holder .................................................... 6-11
Front passenger’s cup holder ......................... 6-12
Rear passenger’s cup holder ........................... 6-13
Accessory power outlets ............................. 6-14
Cigarette lighter socket ................................ 6-16
Use with a cigarette lighter .............................. 6-17
Using as an accessory power outlet ............... 6-18
Ashtray .......................................................... 6-19
Front ashtray ..................................................... 6-19
Coat hook ...................................................... 6-20
Rear passenger area ......................................... 6-20
Shopping bag hook ...................................... 6-21
Floor mat ....................................................... 6-22
Cargo area cover .......................................... 6-23
Using the cover ................................................. 6-23
To remove the cover housing .......................... 6-24
To remove the rear gate board ........................ 6-24
Stowage of the cargo area cover and rear
gate board ....................................................... 6-25
To install the cover housing ............................ 6-26
To install the rear gate board .......................... 6-27
Stowage boxes (Station wagon) .................. 6-28
Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped) .. 6-29
Under-floor storage compartment ............... 6-30
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
(if equipped) ............................................... 6-31
Garage door opener programming in the
U.S.A. ............................................................... 6-33
Programming rolling-code-protected garage
door openers in the U.S.A. ............................ 6-34
Programming for entrance gates and garage
door openers in Canada ................................ 6-36
Programming other devices ............................ 6-37
Operating the HomeLink® Wireless Control
System ............................................................ 6-37
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button .............................................................. 6-37
Erasing HomeLink® button memory .............. 6-37
In case a problem occurs ................................. 6-38
6-2
Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Interior light
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light is
turned off to avoid battery discharge.
! Dome light
The light switch has three positions:
: The light stays on continuously.
Middle position: The light comes on when any door is
opened. The light remains on for several seconds and
gradually goes out after all doors are closed or if the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
The light also can be turned on by use of the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See the “Remote keyless
entry system (if equipped)” in chapter 2 for detailed in-
formation.
The setting of the period for which the light stays on
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
: The light stays off.
UB6500BA
6-3
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
! Cargo area light (Station wagon)
The cargo area light switch has three positions:
DOOR: The light comes on only when the rear gate is
opened.
Middle position: The light stays off.
: The light stays on continuously.
Map light
Vehicle with moonroof (Sedan)
UB6234BB
PASSENGER
UB6200BA
6-4
Interior equipment
Vehicle with moonroof (Station wagon) Vehicle without moonroof
To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off,
push the switch again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned
off to avoid battery discharge.
PASSENGER
UB6201BA
PASSENGER
UB6202BA
6-5
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the
sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it
sideways.
! Sun visor extension plate
With the sun visor positioned over the side window,
you can use the sun visor extension plate to prevent
glare through the gap between the sun visor and cen-
ter pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it toward the
rear of the vehicle. When you have finished using it,
stow it by pushing it toward the front of the vehicle.
UB6546BA
UB6213BA
6-6
Interior equipment
Do not pull out the extension plate with the sun
visor positioned over the windshield. The ex-
tension plate would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
! Vanity mirror with light
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and
open the vanity mirror cover.
The light beside the vanity mirror comes on when the
ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” position
and the mirror cover is opened.
UB6214BA
UB6235BA
6-7
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
Storage compartment
" Always keep the storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury
in the event of sudden stops or an accident.
" Do not store spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive liquids or any other
dangerous items in the storage compartment.
! Glove box
A) Lock
B) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it,
push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clock-
wise.
A
B
UB6215BB
6-8
Interior equipment
! Center console box
Center console box (front)
If you remove the divider plate from the dual cuphold-
ers, you can use the center console box as a storage
space.
To use as storage space:
Slide the sliding lid (near the parking brake lever) to-
ward the rear.
UB6208BA
UB6509BA
6-9
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
Grasp the dual cupholders’ divider plate at the base.
Turn it counterclockwise to remove it.
If you hold the divider plate at the top while
turning it counterclockwise, it may break.
To use again as cupholders:
Insert the protrusion on the back of the divider plate
into the hole in the center of the console box. Grasp
the divider plate at the base, and turn it clockwise to fit
it.
If you hold the divider plate at the top while
turning it clockwise, it may break.
UB6209BA
UB6210BA
6-10
Interior equipment
Center console box (rear)
Pull up the lock release knob at the bottom of the front
edge of the lid.
! Center panel compartment
When your vehicle is parked in the sun or a
warm day, the inside of the center panel heats
up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat-vulnera-
ble or flammable articles such as a lighter in the
center panel.
To open the center panel compartment, pull up the
edge of the bottom of the panel lid.
UB6225BA
UB6203BA
6-11
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
! Overhead console (if equipped)
To open the console, push on the lid lightly and it will
automatically open.
When your vehicle is parked in the sun or a
warm day, the inside of the overhead console
heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat-
vulnerable or flammable articles such as a
lighter in the overhead console.
Cup holder
" When not in use, always keep the cup holder
stored while driving to reduce the risk of injury
in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
" Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or
put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to an accident.
" Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot,
might burn you or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage upholstery or car-
pets.
UB6537BA
6-12
Interior equipment
! Front passenger’s cup holder
The dual cup holder is built into the center console
near the parking brake lever.
To access the cup holder, pull the lid toward the rear.
UB6205BA
UB6509BA
6-13
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
! Rear passenger’s cup holder
The rear passenger’s cup holder is located on the low-
er side of the back of the center console. To use the
cup holder, open the lid by pulling its upper edge.
UB6211BA
UB6212BA
6-14
Interior equipment
Accessory power outlets
Accessory power outlets are provided in the center
console and in the cargo area.
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available
at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by con-
necting it to the socket.
When both outlets are used at the same time, the total
power consumption of the electric appliances must be
120W or less.
" Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the
UB6226BA
UB6545BA
6-15
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
accessory power outlet.
" Do not place any foreign objects, especially
metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into
the accessory power outlet. That could cause a
short circuit. Always put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in use.
" Use only electrical appliances which are de-
signed for 12V DC and which consume less
than 120W. Overloading the accessory power
outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use dou-
ble adapters or more than one electrical appli-
ance.
" If the plug on your electric appliance is either
too loose or too tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause
the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
" Use of an electric appliance in the accessory
power outlet for a long period of time while the
engine is not running can cause battery dis-
charge.
" Before driving your vehicle, make sure that
the plug and the cord on your electrical appli-
ance will not interfere with your shifting gears
and operating the accelerator and brake pedals.
If they do, do not use the electrical appliance
while driving.
NOTE
When the lid of the center console is closed, a gap
remains between the center console and the lid to
allow the power outlet in the center console to be
used. Pass the electrical appliance’s cord through
this gap.
UB6216BA
6-16
Interior equipment
Cigarette lighter socket
A cigarette lighter socket can be found behind the ash-
tray lid under the climate controls. Push gently on the
lid to open it. A cigarette lighter plug is an optional ac-
cessory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter socket may also be used as a
power source for an in-car use electrical appliance.
" The electrical power socket located on the
lower part of the instrument panel is originally
designed to use a genuine SUBARU cigarette
lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette
lighter plugs in the socket. Doing so may cause
a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a
fire.
" If the socket is ever used for a plug-in acces-
sory such as a mobile phone, that may damage
the portion of the socket’s internal mechanism
that causes a cigarette lighter plug to “pop out”
after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do
not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket
that has been used, even once, to power a plug-
in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to
stick and overheat, creating a potential fire haz-
ard.
" Do not place any foreign objects, especially
metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into
the socket. That could cause a short circuit.
UB6218BA
6-17
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
! Use with a cigarette lighter
The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” and “ACC” positions.
A cigarette lighter knob can be found behind the ash-
tray lid under the climate controls.
To open the ashtray lid, push lightly on the lid.
UB6217AA
UB6514BA
UB6217BA
6-18
Interior equipment
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait
a few moments. It will automatically spring up when
ready for use.
To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter
by the end with the heating element. Doing so
could result in injury and could also damage
the heating element.
Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it
will overheat.
! Using as an accessory power outlet
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available
at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
If you use the socket as an accessory power outlet,
take the following precautions.
When the socket is not in use, always put the cap on
the socket to prevent any foreign object from entering
it.
" Use only in-car use electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC and which con-
sume less than 120W. Overloading the socket
can cause a short circuit. Do not use double
adapters or more than one electrical appliance.
" If the plug on your electric appliance is either
too loose or too tight for the socket, this can re-
sult in a poor contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.
" Use of an electric appliance in the socket for
a long period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
" Before driving your vehicle, make sure that
the plug and the cord on your electrical appli-
ance will not interfere with your shifting gears
and operating the accelerator and brake pedals.
If they do, do not use the electrical appliance
while driving.
If the socket has been used for electrical appliances,
damage may have been done to the internal mecha-
nism that causes a cigarette lighter to “pop out” after
its element has been heated. For that reason, a ciga-
rette lighter, even if it is a genuine part, should not be
6-19
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
used in the socket. If you want to use the socket for a
cigarette lighter again, or to protect your purchaser be-
fore you sell your vehicle, have your SUBARU dealer
replace the socket with a new one.
Ashtray
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or
leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
Fully close the ashtray after using it to help reduce re-
sidual smoke.
! Front ashtray
UB6514BA
6-20
Interior equipment
To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid below the
climate controls.
Fully close the lid after using it to help reduce residual
smoke.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold the right and
left sides of the ashtray and pull it out.
Coat hook
! Rear passenger area
Do not hang coathangers or other pointed ob-
jects on the coat hooks. If such items were
hanging on the coat hooks during deployment
of the SRS curtain airbags, they could cause
serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks
and being thrown through the cabin or by pre-
venting correct airbag deployment. Before
hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure
there are no pointed objects in the pockets.
Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
Never hang anything on the coat hook that
might obstruct the driver’s view or that could
cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision.
And do not hang items on the coat hook that
weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
UB6217CA
6-21
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
The coat hook is attached to each rear passenger’s
hand grip.
Shopping bag hook
Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
! For Sedan models
A shopping bag hook is attached to each inner side
wall of the trunk near the trunk lid opening.
UB6518BA
UB6538BA
6-22
Interior equipment
! For Station wagon models
A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the
cargo area.
To use the hook, push the upper portion and the shop-
ping bag hook will appear.
Floor mat
A retaining pin is located on the driver’s side of the ve-
hicle next to the fuel filler door release. Fit the grom-
met in the carpet onto the pin to prevent the carpet
from moving.
UB6236BA
UB6237BA
6-23
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is placed back
in its proper location and correctly secured on
its retaining pin. If the floor mat slips forward
and interferes with the movement of the pedals
during driving, it could cause an accident.
Cargo area cover
The cargo area cover is provided for covering the car-
go area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight.
This cover is detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
! Using the cover
To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of
the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as
shown. To rewind it, unhook it from the catches and it
will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the
cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it
UB6204BA
UB6527BA
6-24
Interior equipment
is rewinding.
Do not place anything on the extended cover.
Putting excessive weight on the extended cov-
er can break it and an object on the cover could
tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or
collision. This could cause serious injury.
! To remove the cover housing
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Hold down the button on the right hand rear quarter
panel and lift up the right hand cover housing.
3. Remove the cover housing.
! To remove the rear gate board
0
1. Remove the top of the rear gate board from the
groove in the rear gate panel.
UB6519BA
UB6535BA
6-25
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
2. Hold both sides of the bottom edge of the rear gate
board, rotate the rear gate board toward you, and pull
it out downward.
! Stowage of the cargo area cover and
rear gate board
The cargo area cover and rear gate board can be
stowed in under the cargo floor.
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.
UB6523BA UB6525BA
UB6522BA
6-26
Interior equipment
2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook (provided on
the back of the lid) on the rear edge of the roof.
3. Remove the left and right parts of the cargo floor lid.
4. Stow the cover housing and rear gate board in the
cargo area end.
! To install the cover housing
To install the cover housing, insert both ends of the
cover housing into the retainers.
UB6524BA
UB6240BA
6-27
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
! To install the rear gate board
Insert (tipped at an angle) the hooks on the rear gate
board into the holes in the rear gate panel.
Rotate the rear gate board toward you until its top
touches the rear gate panel.
UB6523CA
UB6540BA
6-28
Interior equipment
Fit the top of the rear gate board into the groove in the
rear gate panel.
Stowage boxes (Station wagon)
A stowage box is located on each side of the cargo ar-
ea. You can access each one by pushing up and pull-
ing the knob on the lid.
UB6535CA
UB6533BA
6-29
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
Convenient tie-down hooks (if
equipped)
The convenient tie-down hooks are designed
only for securing light cargo. Never try to se-
cure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity is 44 lbs (20
kg) per hook.
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-down hooks
so that cargo can be secured with a luggage net or
ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them down out of
the storing recesses. When not in use, put the hooks
up into the storing recesses.
UB6238BA
6-30
Interior equipment
Under-floor storage compartment
The subfloor storage is located under the floor of the
trunk or cargo area and can be used to store small
items. To open the lid, pull the tab or handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor storage in
the trunk or cargo area.
" Always keep the lid of the subfloor storage
closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury
in the event of sudden stop or an accident.
" Do not store spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive liquids or any other
dangerous items in the subfloor storage.
! Sedan
UB6239BA
6-31
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
! Station wagon
Hang the hook provided on the underside of the lid on
the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open.
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
(if equipped)
A) HomeLink® buttons
B) Indicator light
C) Hand-held transmitter*
* Not part of your vehicle’s keyless entry system but of
a HomeLink®-compatible device.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System, located on
the driver’s sun visor, is a handy way to operate, from
inside of your vehicle, up to three remote-controlled in-
door and outdoor devices, such as garage door open-
ers, entrance gates, door locks, home lighting, and se-
UB6531BA
A
B
C
UB6219BB
6-32
Interior equipment
curity systems. There are three HomeLink® buttons
on the sun visor, each of which you can program for
operation of one desired device. For details on the de-
vice types which can be operated by this system, con-
sult HomeLink website at www.homelink.com or call 1-
800-355-3515.
Note of the following about this system:
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink® Wire-
less Control System, it complies with Part 15 of the
Federal Communication Commission Rules in the
U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry Canada in Canada.
Its operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
Changes and modifications to this system by anyone
other than an authorized service facility could void au-
thorization to use this equipment.
" When programming the HomeLink® Wireless
Control System, you may be operating a garage
door opener or other device. Make sure that
people and objects are out of the way of the ga-
rage door opener or other device to prevent po-
tential harm or damage.
" Do not use the HomeLink® Wireless Control
System with any garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as re-
quired by applicable safety standards. A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect an ob-
ject, signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet these safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these features in-
creases risk of serious injury or death. For
more information, consult HomeLink website
at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
When programming the HomeLink® Wireless
Control System to operate a garage door open-
er or an entrance gate, unplug the device’s mo-
tor from the outlet during programming to pre-
vent motor burnout.
NOTE
" After programming your HomeLink® Wireless
Control System for the desired devices, retain the
6-33
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
hand-held transmitters for further programming or
device testing in the event of a problem.
" It is recommended to insert a new battery in the
hand-held transmitter of a device to ensure cor-
rect programming.
! Garage door opener programming in
the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink® Wireless
Control System for a garage door opener, it is sug-
gested that you park the vehicle outside the ga-
rage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door opener from
the outlet.
2. Press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 sec-
onds). Release both buttons.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are already pro-
grammed for other devices, skip step 2 because it
clears the memory of all the three buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door opener’s hand-
held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink® buttons on the driver’s
sun visor, keeping the indicator light in view.
UB6220BA
6-34
Interior equipment
4. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-
held transmitter button and the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 5 has
been completed.
5. Hold down both buttons until the HomeLink® indi-
cator light flashes, first slowly then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be re-
leased. (The rapidly flashing light indicates successful
programming of the new frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed button and check
the HomeLink® indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously, your garage
door should activate and the programming is complet-
ed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds
and then stays on continuously, your garage door
opener may be protected by a rolling code feature. In
this case you need to perform the additional steps for
“Rolling-code-protected garage opener programming
in the U.S.A.” described below.
NOTE
Rolling-code-protected garage door openers are
manufactured after 1996. See the instruction man-
ual of your garage opener for confirmation.
7. Reconnect the motor of your garage door opener to
the outlet.
8. Test your garage door opener by pressing the pro-
grammed HomeLink® button.
! Programming rolling-code-protected
garage door openers in the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling code feature,
program the HomeLink® Wireless Control System for
it by following steps 1 through 5 in the “Programming
garage door openers in the U.S.A.” section above and
then continuing the steps below.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person may make the
programming quicker and easier.
UB6219CA
6-35
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
1. Locate the training button on the garage door open-
er motor head unit. The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage door opener. If it
is difficult to locate the training button, refer to your ga-
rage door opener’s instruction manual.
A) Training button
2. Press the training button on the garage door open-
er motor head unit (which activates the “training light”
on the unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press and release the
HomeLink® button that was programmed in the sec-
tion above. Press and release the button a second
time to complete the programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may require you to do
the above procedure a third time to complete the
programming.
UB6221BA
A
UB6222BB
6-36
Interior equipment
4. The garage door opener should now recognize the
HomeLink® Wireless Control System and your garage
door opener should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates and
garage door openers in Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate or garage
door opener from the outlet.
2. Press and hold the two outside buttons until the
HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are already pro-
grammed for other devices, skip step 2 because it
clears the memory of all three buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between 1 and 3 inch-
es (25 and 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® buttons
on the driver’s sun visor, keeping the indicator light in
view.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-held transmit-
ter button every two seconds until step 6 is complete.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly and then
UB6220BA
UB6223BA
6-37
Interior equipment
– CONTINUED –
rapidly after several seconds, release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/garage door
opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door opener by
pressing the programmed HomeLink® button.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door locks, home
lighting and security systems, contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Operating the HomeLink® Wireless
Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wireless Control
System can be used to remote-control the devices to
which its buttons are programmed. To activate a de-
vice, simply press the appropriate button. The indica-
tor light illuminates, indicating that the signal is being
transmitted.
! Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you wish to
reprogram. DO NOT release the button until step 4
has been completed.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held
transmitter of the device for which you wish to program
the button at 1 to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink® button surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, re-
lease both buttons.
The programming for the previous device is now
erased and the new device can be operated by push-
ing the HomeLink® button.
! Erasing HomeLink® button memory
NOTE
" Performing this procedure erases the memory
of all the preprogrammed buttons simultaneously.
The memory of individual buttons cannot be
erased.
" It is recommended that upon the sale of the ve-
hicle, the memory of all programmed HomeLink®
buttons be erased for security purposes.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons until the in-
dicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds).
6-38
Interior equipment
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the correspond-
ing HomeLink® button after programming, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
7-1
7
Starting and operating
Fuel ................................................................ 7-2
Fuel requirements ............................................. 7-2
Fuel filler lid and cap ........................................ 7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only) ............... 7-8
Preparing to drive ......................................... 7-10
Starting the engine ....................................... 7-10
Manual transmission vehicle ........................... 7-10
Automatic transmission vehicle ...................... 7-11
Stopping the engine ..................................... 7-12
Manual transmission .................................... 7-13
Shifting speeds ................................................. 7-14
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-15
Automatic transmission – 4 speed ............. 7-16
Selector lever .................................................... 7-17
Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ...... 7-19
Selection of manual mode ............................... 7-20
Maximum speeds .............................................. 7-21
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-23
SPORT mode ..................................................... 7-23
Shift lock release .............................................. 7-24
Automatic transmission – 5 speed ............. 7-25
Selector lever .................................................... 7-26
Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ...... 7-28
Selection of manual mode ............................... 7-30
Maximum speeds .............................................. 7-32
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-33
SPORT mode ..................................................... 7-34
Shift lock release .............................................. 7-35
Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD)
(if equipped) .............................................. 7-36
Power steering .............................................. 7-36
Braking ........................................................... 7-37
Braking tips ....................................................... 7-37
Brake system .................................................... 7-37
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........ 7-38
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................... 7-38
ABS system self-check .................................... 7-39
ABS warning light ............................................. 7-39
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ........................................................ 7-41
Steps to take if EBD system fails .................... 7-41
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
(if equipped) ............................................... 7-43
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .... 7-45
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ........... 7-48
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) ............................................... 7-49
Parking your vehicle ..................................... 7-51
Cruise control ................................................ 7-53
To set cruise control ........................................ 7-53
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ....... 7-55
To turn off the cruise control ........................... 7-56
To change the cruising speed ......................... 7-56
Cruise control indicator light ........................... 7-57
Cruise control set indicator light .................... 7-58
7-2
Starting and operating
Starting and ope rating
Fuel
Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an
inappropriate fuel additive may cause engine
damage.
! Fuel requirements
! 2.5-liter non-turbo models
The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed to operate
using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87
AKI or higher.
! 2.5-liter turbo models and 3.0-liter models
The 2.5-liter turbo engine and 3.0-liter engine are de-
signed to operate using premium unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium
unleaded gasoline is not available, regular unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may
be temporarily used.
For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is
required (for 2.5-liter turbo models), and recommend-
ed (for 3.0-liter models) that you use premium grade
unleaded gasoline.
NOTE
Be sure to use premium unleaded gasoline of 91
AKI or higher for a 2.5-liter turbo engine model. If
other gasoline (lower than 91 AKI) is used, knock-
ing, reduced output and poor accelerator re-
sponse will result.
! Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Research Oc-
tane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly re-
ferred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause
persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the
engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle some-
times knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when
you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service
technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept
only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no cir-
cumstances should leaded gasoline be used because
it will damage the emission control system and may
impair driveability and fuel economy.
! California fuel
If your vehicle was certified to California Emission
7-3
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Standards as indicated on the underhood tune-up la-
bel. It is designed to optimize engine and emission
control system performance with gasoline that meets
the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline speci-
fications. If you live in any other state than California,
your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal
specifications. Gasoline sold outside California is per-
mitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect
the performance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUB-
ARU recommends that you try a different brand of un-
leaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service. The CHECK EN-
GINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp may
also turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
SUBARU dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, re-
pairs may not be covered by your warranty.
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive
called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tri-
carbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of
the vehicle. Fuels containing alcohol may
cause paint damage, which is not covered un-
der the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your
emission control system working properly, and is a
way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continu-
ously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never need to add any
fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called
oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the
air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain
alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should con-
tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
7-4
Starting and operating
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now produc-
ing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to re-
duce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should
ask your service station operators if their gasolines
contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your
vehicle as explained below.
" Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating
no lower than that specified in this manual.
" Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes
mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used
in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the
fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient
quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion in-
hibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system.
Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under
these conditions.
" If undesirable driveability problems are experienced
and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a differ-
ent brand of gasoline before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
" Fuel system damage or driveability problems which
result from the use of improper fuel are not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
! Fuel filler lid and cap
! Refueling
0
UB7500CA
7-5
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid release lever
up.
2. Open the fuel filler lid.
UB7205BA
UB7500BA
7-6
Starting and operating
A) Open
B) Close
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly coun-
terclockwise.
" Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before
refueling, always first stop the engine and make
sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open
flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
" When opening the cap, do not remove the
cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and
spray out of the fuel filler neck especially in hot
weather, which may cause injury.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump auto-
matically clicks off. Do not add any more fuel.
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear
a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether un-
der the cap while tightening.
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off
immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be
damaged.
NOTE
A
B
UB7501CB
UB3526AA
7-7
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
" You will see the “ ” sign in the combination
meter. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is
located on the right side of the vehicle.
" If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks
or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK
ENGINE warning light may come on. Refer to the
“Warning and indicator lights” section located in
chapter 3.
(Turbo model only) Promptly put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning light comes on. If
the engine misfired as a result of an empty tank,
resulting catalyzer damage could cause damage
to the turbocharger.
" Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel
tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may
cause damage to the fuel system.
" Make sure that the cap is tightened until it
clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
" Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of
the vehicle. Fuels may cause paint damage,
which is not covered under the SUBARU Limit-
ed Warranty.
" Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap.
If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting, and your fuel tank and emis-
sion control system might be damaged.
7-8
Starting and operating
State emission testing (U.S. only)
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must
NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy-
namometer. Attempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause
an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
Resultant vehicle damage due to improper test-
ing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited
Warranty and is the responsibility of the state
inspection program or its contractors or licens-
ees.
At state inspection time, remember to tell your in-
spection or service station in advance not to place
your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna-
mometer. Otherwise, serious transmission dam-
age will result.
Some states have started using dynamometers in
their state inspection programs in order to meet their
obligation under federal law to implement stricter vehi-
cle emission standards to reduce air pollution from ve-
hicles. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like test-
ing device that allows your vehicle’s wheels to turn
while the vehicle remains in one place. Depending on
the severity of a state’s air pollution problems, the
states must adopt either a “basic” or “enhanced” vehi-
cle emission inspection test. Normally, a portion of the
basic emission test consists of an emission inspector
inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an
idling vehicle for a short period of time. States with
more severe air pollution problems are required to
adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This test
simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer
and permits more accurate measurement of tailpipe
emitted pollution than the basic emission test.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and
states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emis-
sion testing programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program
that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel dynamom-
eters in their testing programs. When properly used,
that equipment will not damage an AWD SUBARU ve-
hicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be
7-9
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be dis-
connected for state emission testing.
The EPA has issued regulations for inspecting the On-
Board Diagnostic (OBD) system as part of the state
emissions inspection. The OBD system is designed to
detect engine and transmission problems that might
cause vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits.
These inspections apply to all 1996 model year and
newer passenger cars and light trucks. About 30
states plus the District of Columbia have implemented
the OBD system inspection.
" The inspection of the OBD system consists of a vi-
sual operational check of the “CHECK ENGINE” warn-
ing light/malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an ex-
amination of the OBD system with an electronic scan
tool while the engine is running.
" A vehicle passes
the OBD system inspection if
proper the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL illumi-
nation is observed, there is no stored diagnostic trou-
ble codes, and the OBD system readiness monitors
are complete.
" A vehicle fails
the OBD inspection if the “CHECK
ENGINE” warning light/MIL is not properly operating
or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored
in vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK ENGINE”
warning light/MIL illuminated.
" A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or
fail) a vehicle if the number of OBD system readiness
monitors “Not Ready” is greater than three. Under this
condition, the vehicle operator should be instructed to
drive his/her vehicle for a few days to set the monitors
and return for an emission re-inspection.
" Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact
their SUBARU Dealer for service.
7-10
Starting and operating
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks and adjust-
ments every day before you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are
clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires.
Also check tires for proper inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk and rear gate are fully
closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mir-
rors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers
have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator
lights when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
sition.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights af-
ter starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer flu-
id and other fluid levels should be checked daily,
weekly or at fuel stops.
Starting the engine
Do not operate the starter motor continuously
for more than ten seconds. If the engine fails to
start after operating the starter for five to ten
seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before
trying again.
! Manual transmission vehicle
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift
lever into neutral.
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the en-
gine. The starter motor will only operate when the
clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and
check the operation of the warning and indicator lights.
Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section
(chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position
without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release
the key immediately after the engine has started.
7-11
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
If the engine does not start, try the following:
1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and
wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to
the “START” position while depressing the acceler-
ator pedal slightly (about a quarter of the full stroke).
Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the en-
gine starts.
2)If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition
switch back to the “OFF” position and wait for at
least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator
pedal and turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac-
celerator pedal.
3)If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition
switch again to the “OFF” position. After waiting for
10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
4)If the engine still refuses to start, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have
gone off after the engine has started. The fuel injection
system automatically lowers the idle speed as the en-
gine warms up.
! Automatic transmission vehicle
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift the selector lever into the “N” po-
sition. Do not attempt to place the selector lever
of a moving vehicle into the “P” position.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” position
(preferably “P” position). The starter will only operate
when the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and
check the operation of the warning and indicator lights.
Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section
(chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position
without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release
the key immediately after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the following:
1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and
wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to
the “START” position while depressing the acceler-
ator pedal slightly (about a quarter of the full stroke).
7-12
Starting and operating
Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the en-
gine starts.
2)If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition
switch back to the “OFF” position and wait for at
least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator
pedal and turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac-
celerator pedal.
3)If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition
switch again to the “OFF” position. After waiting for
10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
4)If the engine still refuses to start, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have
gone out after the engine has started. The fuel injec-
tion system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the
selector lever is at the “P” or “N” position and that the
parking brake is applied.
Stopping the engine
Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is mov-
ing. This will cause loss of power to the power
steering and the brake booster, making steer-
ing and braking more difficult. It could also re-
sult in accidental activation of the “LOCK” po-
sition on the ignition switch, causing the steer-
ing wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off only when the
engine is idling.
7-13
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Manual transmission
Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disen-
gaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed)
or with the shift lever in the neutral position.
Engine braking has no effect in either of these
conditions and the risk of an accident is conse-
quently increased.
Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has
completely stopped. It may cause damage to
the transmission to try shifting into reverse
when the vehicle is moving.
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed, 5-
forward-speed and 1-reverse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob.
When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first re-
turn the shift lever to the neutral position then shift into
reverse gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move
the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in
neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and
then try again.
UB7521BA
7-14
Starting and operating
! Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and ve-
hicle performance during normal driving is ensured by
shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table.
! Maximum allowable speeds
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve-
hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the
Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which
is about to be selected. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to engine over-revving and
this in turn can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine
brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip-
pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost
and the risk of an accident increased.
The following table shows the maximum speeds that
are possible with each different gear.
Never exceed the speed limit below for each gear po-
sition except for brief acceleration in an emergency.
The tachometer’s needle (if so equipped) will enter the
red area if these speeds are exceeded. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution can lead to excessive engine
wear and poor fuel economy.
Non-turbo models
mph (km/h)
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (65)
4th to 5th 45 (73)
Gear Except
OUTBACK
OUTBACK
1st 30 (48) 30 (48)
2nd 50 (81) 52 (82)
3rd 71 (116) 71 (116)
7-15
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Turbo models
mph (km/h)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
! Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal
and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a
standstill on an upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever.
This may cause wear on the transmission compo-
nents.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to
slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills,
downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to
4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to main-
tain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Re-
member, if you “ride” (over use) the brakes while de-
scending a hill, they may overheat and not work prop-
erly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the
vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from
a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
A slight reduction in output torque may occur in the
models with a 3.0-liter or 2.5-liter turbo engine before
the engine warms up.
Gear Except
OUTBACK
OUTBACK
1st 32 (52) 32 (52)
2nd 54 (88) 54 (88)
3rd 80 (129) 78 (127)
7-16
Starting and operating
Automatic transmission – 4 speed
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled
and provides 4 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed.
Also, it has a manual mode and a SPORT mode.
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into
the “D” or “R” position while depressing the ac-
celerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to
jump forward or backward.
" Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after
the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting
while the vehicle is moving may cause damage
to the transmission.
" Do not race the engine for more than five sec-
onds in any position except the “N” or “P” po-
sition when the brake is set or when wheels are
used blocks. This may cause the automatic
transmission fluid to overheat.
" Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving
positions into the “R” position or vice versa un-
til the vehicle has completely stopped. Such
shifting may cause damage to the transmis-
sion.
NOTE
Immediately after ATF (automatic transmission
fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the automatic
transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from invalidation of data which the
on-board computer has collected and stored in
memory to allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current condition
of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored
as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.
7-17
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
! Selector lever
: Shift possible with brake pedal depressed
: Shift possible with brake pedal not depressed
The selector lever has four positions, “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”
and also has manual gate for using “SPORT” mode or
manual mode.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the
engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically
locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake
fully, then shift into the “P” position. Do not hold the ve-
hicle with only the transmission.
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to any other po-
sition, you should depress the brake pedal fully then
move the selector lever. This prevents the vehicle
from lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the vehicle
completely then move the lever to the “R” position.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not
locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the
vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline un-
less the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral.
During coasting, there is no engine braking effect.
NOTE
If the selector lever is in the “N” position when you
stop the engine for parking, you may not subse-
quently be able to move it to the “R” and “P” posi-
tions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able to move
UB7522BA
7-18
Starting and operating
the selector lever to the “P” position.
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever
in the “N” (neutral) position. Engine braking
has no effect in this condition and the risk of an
accident is consequently increased.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable
gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed
and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position,
press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold
that position. The transmission will automatically
downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the pedal, the transmission will return to the original
gear position.
To use the “SPORT” mode, move the lever from this
position into the manual gate.
To use the manual mode, move the lever from this po-
sition into the manual gate then move it toward the “+”
and “–” ends.
" While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is
prevented from taking place when the accelerator is
released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again.
This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting re-
sulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st
gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal
is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.
" While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake
pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 3rd or
2nd gear, thus applying engine braking. Reaccelera-
tion for a short time will cause the transmission to up-
shift normally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a
downhill grade does not result in an automatic
downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear. This can happen
when the automatic transmission fluid tempera-
ture is very low, for example, during driving short-
ly after the vehicle has been parked for an extend-
ed period of time. When the ATF temperature has
7-19
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
risen to a certain level, automatic downshift nor-
mally takes place. In the meantime, downshift
manually for engine braking as required.
Also, a 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift will not oc-
cur at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-
to-2nd automatic downshift will not occur at
speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).
! Selector lever reverse inhibiting func-
tion
This function prevents accidental movement of the se-
lector lever to the “R” position while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
The function becomes operational when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Once operational, it prevents the selector lever from
being moved from the “N” position to the “R” position.
When the vehicle speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h),
the function is canceled. The selector lever can then
be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.
When the ignition switch has been turned to the “OFF”
position, movement of the selector lever from the “N”
position to the “R” position is possible for a limited time
period and then becomes impossible. Also, the selec-
tor lever cannot be moved to the “R” position when it
has been placed in the “P” position and then placed
again in the “N” position. When movement of the se-
lector lever from the “N” position to the “R” position has
become impossible, turn the ignition switch back to the
“ON” position then move the selector lever to the “P”
position. Pressing the selector lever release button
also makes it possible to move the selector lever to the
“P” position at this time.
! Selector lever release button
If you inadvertently have turned the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position with the selector lever in the “N” po-
sition, proceed as follows. By referring to the “Shift
lock release” section in this chapter, remove the shift
lock release cover. Then, with the screwdriver inserted
UB7207BA
7-20
Starting and operating
into the hole, move the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion. If the selector lever reverse inhibiting function
fails, have the vehicle inspected by the nearest SUB-
ARU dealer.
! Selection of manual mode
With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the
selector lever from the “D” position to the manual gate
then move it to the “+” end or “–” end of the manual
gate to select manual mode.
A) Upshift indicator
B) Downshift indicator
C) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the gear position
indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indica-
tor in the tachometer come on. The gear position indi-
cator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-
4th-gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators
show when a gearshift is possible. When the upshift
indicator “ ” is on, upshifting is possible. When the
downshift indicator “ ” is on, downshifting is possi-
ble. When both indicators are on, upshifting and down-
shifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for
example, at traffic signals), the downshift indicator
UB7206CA
A
B
C
UB7527BB
7-21
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
goes off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the selector lever.
Using the selector lever
Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly pushing the se-
lector lever toward the “+” end of the manual gate.
Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly pulling the selec-
tor lever toward the “–” end of the manual gate.
NOTE
Please read the following points carefully and bear
them in mind when using the manual mode.
" Automatic gearshifts do not take place in the
manual mode. Perform gearshifts in accordance
with road conditions so that the tachometer nee-
dle does not enter the red zone. If the engine
speed reaches a predetermined level, a fuel-cut
function will operate. Shift up if this happens.
" If you attempt to shift down when the engine
speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would
push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone,
beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
" If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed
is too low, the transmission will not respond.
" You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from
4th to 2nd) by operating the selector lever twice in
rapid succession.
" The transmission automatically selects 1st gear
when the vehicle stops moving.
" If the temperature of the automatic transmission
fluid becomes too high, the “AT OIL TEMP” warn-
ing light will come on and upshifts to 4th gear will
not be possible. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and let the engine idle until the warning
light goes off.
! Maximum speeds
When down shifting, ensure that the vehicle is
UB7206BA
7-22
Starting and operating
not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maxi-
mum Allowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to engine over-revving and
this in turn can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brak-
ing caused by down shifting when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can lead to
wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the
vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
The following tables show the maximum speeds that
are possible with each different gear.
When down shifting, it is important to confirm that the
current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum
Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be se-
lected.
mph (km/h)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
NOTE (The following notes do not apply
to when the manual mode is selected.)
" In order to prevent over-revving during acceler-
ation of the vehicle, the transmission will automat-
ically shift to the next highest gear if the Maximum
Allowable Speed for the current gear is exceeded.
" Similarly, in order to prevent over-revving dur-
ing deceleration of the vehicle, the transmission
will remain in the current gear if the speed of the
vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has
been moved.
Position 2.5-liter non-turbo models
Except OUTBACK OUTBACK
1 35 (57) 34 (56)
2 64 (103) 62 (101)
3 98 (159) 96 (156)
7-23
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
! Driving tips
" On a road surface where there is a risk of wheelspin
(for example, a snow- or gravel-covered road), you
can pull away from a standstill (safely and easily) by
first selecting the 2nd gear of the manual mode.
" Always apply the foot or parking brake when the ve-
hicle is stopped in the “D” or “R” position.
" Always set the parking brake when parking your ve-
hicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-
sion.
" Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on
an uphill grade by using the “D” position. Use the
brake instead.
" The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the
vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from
a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
! SPORT mode
SPORT mode is used when power is needed for rapid
acceleration or for uphill driving. To select this mode,
move the selector lever from the “D” position to the
manual gate.
UB7206DA
7-24
Starting and operating
When selected, the SPORT mode indicator light on
the instrument panel will turn on.
To deselect SPORT mode, move the selector lever to
the “D” position or select manual mode.
To subsequently reselect SPORT mode, move the se-
lector lever to the “D” position and from there to the
manual gate.
In this mode, the transmission shifts up at higher vehi-
cle speeds and shifts down more responsively than in
normal mode.
! Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from the “P” posi-
tion with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition
switch in the “ON” position, perform the following
steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bucket.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with a flat-
head screwdriver.
UB7507CA
UB7200BA
7-25
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selec-
tor lever from the “P” to the “N” position.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress
the brake pedal and start the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im-
mediately to have the system repaired.
Automatic transmission – 5 speed
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled
and provides 5 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed.
Also, it has a manual mode and a SPORT mode.
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into
the “D” or “R” position while depressing the ac-
celerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to
jump forward or backward.
" Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after
the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting
while the vehicle is moving may cause damage
to the transmission.
" Do not race the engine for more than five sec-
onds in any position except the “N” or “P” po-
sition when the brake is set or when wheels are
used blocks. This may cause the automatic
transmission fluid to overheat.
" Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving
positions into the “R” position or vice versa un-
UB7201BA
7-26
Starting and operating
til the vehicle has completely stopped. Such
shifting may cause damage to the transmis-
sion.
NOTE
Immediately after ATF (automatic transmission
fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the automatic
transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from invalidation of data which the
on-board computer has collected and stored in
memory to allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current condition
of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored
as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.
! Selector lever
: Shift possible with brake pedal depressed
: Shift possible with brake pedal not depressed
The selector lever has four positions, “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”
and also has manual gate for using “SPORT” mode or
manual mode.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the
engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically
locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake
UB7522BA
7-27
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
fully, then shift into the “P” position. Do not hold the ve-
hicle with only the transmission.
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to any other po-
sition, you should depress the brake pedal fully then
move the selector lever. This prevents the vehicle
from lurching when it is started.
NOTE (3.0-liter models only)
To protect the engine while the “P” position is se-
lected, the engine is controlled such that the en-
gine speed does not become too high even if the
accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the vehicle
completely then move the lever to the “R” position.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not
locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the
vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline un-
less the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral.
During coasting, there is no engine braking effect.
NOTE (3.0-liter models only)
To protect the engine while the “N” position is se-
lected, the engine is controlled such that the en-
gine speed does not become too high even if the
accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
NOTE
If the selector lever is in the “N” position when you
stop the engine for parking, you may not subse-
quently be able to move it to the “R” and “P” posi-
tions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able to move
the selector lever to the “P” position.
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever
in the “N” (neutral) position. Engine braking
has no effect in this condition and the risk of an
accident is consequently increased.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable
gear from 1st to 5th according to the vehicle speed
and the acceleration you require.
7-28
Starting and operating
When more acceleration is required in this position,
press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold
that position. The transmission will automatically
downshift to 4th, 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you re-
lease the pedal, the transmission will return to the orig-
inal gear position.
To use the SPORT mode, move the lever from this po-
sition into the manual gate.
To use the manual mode, move the lever from this po-
sition into the manual gate then move it toward the “+”
and “–” ends.
" While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th or 5th
gear is prevented from taking place when the acceler-
ator is released. This minimizes the chance of subse-
quent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating
again. This prevents repeated upshifting and down-
shifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehi-
cle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st
gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal
is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.
" While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake
pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 4th or
3rd gear, thus applying engine braking. Reaccelera-
tion for a short time will cause the transmission to up-
shift normally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a
downhill grade does not result in an automatic
downshift to 4th or 3rd gear. This can happen
when the automatic transmission fluid tempera-
ture is very low, for example, during driving short-
ly after the vehicle has been parked for an extend-
ed period of time. When the ATF temperature has
risen to a certain level, automatic downshift nor-
mally takes place. In the meantime, downshift
manually for engine braking as required.
Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not
occur at speeds above approximately 50 mph (80
km/h).
! Selector lever reverse inhibiting func-
tion
This function prevents accidental movement of the se-
lector lever to the “R” position while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
The function becomes operational when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
7-29
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Once operational, it prevents the selector lever from
being moved from the “N” position to the “R” position.
When the vehicle speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h),
the function is canceled. The selector lever can then
be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.
When the ignition switch has been turned to the “OFF”
position, movement of the selector lever from the “N”
position to the “R” position is possible for a limited time
period and then becomes impossible. Also, the selec-
tor lever cannot be moved to the “R” position when it
has been placed in the “P” position and then placed
again in the “N” position. When movement of the se-
lector lever from the “N” position to the “R” position has
become impossible, turn the ignition switch back to the
“ON” position then move the selector lever to the “P”
position. Pressing the selector lever release button
also makes it possible to move the selector lever to the
“P” position at this time.
! Selector lever release button
If you inadvertently have turned the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position with the selector lever in the “N” po-
sition, proceed as follows. By referring to the “Shift
lock release” section in this chapter, remove the shift
lock release cover. Then, with the screwdriver inserted
into the hole, move the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion. If the selector lever reverse inhibiting function
fails, have the vehicle inspected by the nearest SUB-
ARU dealer.
UB7207BA
7-30
Starting and operating
! Selection of manual mode
With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the
selector lever from the “D” position to the manual gate
then move it to the “+” end or “–” end of the manual
gate to select manual mode.
A) Upshift indicator
B) Downshift indicator
C) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the gear position
indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indica-
tor in the tachometer come on. The gear position indi-
cator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-
5th-gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators
show when a gearshift is possible. When the upshift
indicator “ ” is on, upshifting is possible. When the
downshift indicator “ ” is on, downshifting is possi-
ble. When both indicators are on, upshifting and down-
shifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for
example, at traffic signals), the downshift indicator
UB7206CA
A
B
C
UB7527BB
7-31
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
goes off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the selector lever
or the shift switch on the steering wheel (turbo model
only).
Using the selector lever
Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly pushing the se-
lector lever toward the “+” end of the manual gate.
Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly pulling the selec-
tor lever toward the “–” end of the manual gate.
Using the shift switch (turbo models)
Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly pressing the “+”
button of the shift switch.
Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly pressing the “–”
button of the shift switch.
To deselect the manual mode, return the selector le-
ver to the “D” position from the manual gate.
If you press the “+” button or “–” button of the shift
switch while driving with the selector lever in the “D”
position, the manual mode will be selected. At this
time, the currently selected gear will be shown by the
gear position indicator and the upshift indicator and
downshift indicator will come on.
UB7206BA
UB7505BA
7-32
Starting and operating
If you subsequently ease off the accelerator pedal and
then accelerate again, the transmission will automati-
cally switch back from manual mode to normal mode.
NOTE
Please read the following points carefully and bear
them in mind when using the manual mode.
" When the temperature of the automatic trans-
mission fluid is higher than normal, warning
beeps are emitted and the shift position indicator
shows “–”. If these warnings are issued, deselect
the manual mode to protect the automatic trans-
mission from damage.
" When the temperature of the engine oil is higher
than normal, warning beeps are emitted and the
shift position indicator shows “–”. If these warn-
ings are issued, deselect the manual mode to pro-
tect the engine from damage. (3.0-liter models
only)
" Automatic gearshifts do not take place in the
manual mode. Perform gearshifts in accordance
with road conditions so that the tachometer nee-
dle does not enter the red zone. If the engine
speed reaches a predetermined level, a fuel-cut
function will operate. Shift up if this happens.
" If you attempt to shift down when the engine
speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would
push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone,
beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
" If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed
is too low, the transmission will not respond.
" You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from
4th to 2nd) by operating the selector lever or a
steering-wheel switch twice in rapid succession.
" The transmission automatically selects 1st gear
when the vehicle stops moving.
" If the temperature of the automatic transmission
fluid becomes too high, the “AT OIL TEMP” warn-
ing light will come on and upshifts to 5th gear will
not be possible. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and let the engine idle until the warning
light goes off.
! Maximum speeds
When down shifting, ensure that the vehicle is
not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maxi-
mum Allowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to engine over-revving and
this in turn can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brak-
7-33
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
ing caused by down shifting when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can lead to
wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the
vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
The following tables show the maximum speeds that
are possible with each different gear.
When down shifting, it is important to confirm that the
current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum
Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be se-
lected.
mph (km/h)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
NOTE
" In order to prevent over-revving during acceler-
ation of the vehicle, the transmission will automat-
ically shift to the next highest gear if the Maximum
Allowable Speed for the current gear is exceeded.
" Similarly, in order to prevent over-revving dur-
ing deceleration of the vehicle, the transmission
will remain in the current gear if the speed of the
vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has
been moved.
! Driving tips
" On a road surface where there is a risk of wheelspin
(for example, a snow- or gravel-covered road), you
can pull away from a standstill safely and easily by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual mode.
" Always apply the foot or parking brake when the ve-
hicle is stopped in the “D” or “R” position.
" Always set the parking brake when parking your ve-
hicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-
sion.
" Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on
an uphill grade by using the “D” position. Use the
brake instead.
" The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the
vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from
Position 2.5-liter turbo models 3.0-liter
models
Except
OUTBACK
OUTBACK
1 36 (59) 35 (57) 42 (68)
2 59 (92) 55 (90) 66 (107)
3 88 (142) 86 (139) 102 (165)
7-34
Starting and operating
a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
! SPORT mode
SPORT mode is used when power is needed for rapid
acceleration or for uphill driving. To select this mode,
move the selector lever from the “D” position to the
manual gate.
When selected, the SPORT mode indicator light on
the instrument panel will turn on.
To deselect SPORT mode, move the selector lever to
the “D” position or select manual mode. To subse-
quently reselect SPORT mode, move the selector le-
ver to the “D” position and from there to the manual
gate.
In this mode, the transmission shifts up at higher vehi-
cle speeds and shifts down more responsively than in
normal mode.
UB7206DA
UB7507CA
7-35
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
! Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from the “P” posi-
tion with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition
switch in the “ON” position, perform the following
steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bucket.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with a flat-
head screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selec-
tor lever from the “P” to the “N” position.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress
the brake pedal and start the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im-
mediately to have the system repaired.
UB7200BA
UB7201BA
7-36
Starting and operating
Rear viscous limited slip differential
(LSD) (if equipped)
" Never start the engine while a tire on one side
is jacked up, as the vehicle may move.
" If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid con-
tinued spinning at high speed as this could ad-
versely affect the LSD.
" If a different size rear tire is temporarily used
(as in an emergency), it will adversely affect the
LSD. Always replace it with a regular size tire as
soon as possible.
The LSD provides optimum distribution of power ac-
cording to the difference in revolutions between the
right and left rear wheels that may be caused by cer-
tain driving conditions, thereby improving driving sta-
bility on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.
Power steering
Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully
locked position left or right for more than five
seconds. This may damage the power steering
pump.
The power steering system operates only when the
engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system fails to function, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started and before
it has warmed up, you may hear a noise coming
from areas adjacent to the power steering pump
which is located at the right-front area of the en-
gine compartment. This noise is normal. It does
not indicate power steering system trouble.
7-37
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Braking
! Braking tips
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This can cause dangerous overheating
of the brakes and needless wear on the brake
pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping dis-
tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehi-
cle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking in addition
to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the
foot brake is used, the brakes may start working im-
properly because of brake fluid overheating, caused
by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift
into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire
is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the
vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
! Brake system
! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake system. Each cir-
cuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit
of the brake system should fail, the other half of the
system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal
will go down much closer to the floor than usual and
you will need to press it down much harder. And a
much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehi-
cle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to
assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while
driving because that will turn off the brake booster, re-
sulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even when the brake
booster completely stops functioning. If this happens,
however, you will have to push the pedal much harder
7-38
Starting and operating
than normal and the braking distance will increase.
! Disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the
disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads
are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc
brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Always use the utmost care in driving – over-
confidence because you are driving with an
ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a se-
rious accident.
" The ABS system does not always decrease
stopping distance. You should always maintain
a safe following distance from other vehicles.
" When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel
roads, icy road, or over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle
with the ABS system than one without. When
driving under these conditions, therefore, re-
duce your speed and leave ample distance from
other vehicles.
" When you feel the ABS system operating,
you should maintain constant brake pedal pres-
sure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing
so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.
HS7012BA
7-39
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which
may occur during sudden braking or braking on slip-
pery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability caused by
wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a
chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
! ABS system self-check
You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and
hear the operating sound of ABS from the engine com-
partment just after the vehicle is started. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS sys-
tem being carried out and does not indicate any abnor-
mal condition.
! ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after
about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working
properly.
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS
system may not be working properly.
When the warning light is on, the ABS function
shuts down; however, the conventional brake
system continues to operate normally.
UB7507PA
7-40
Starting and operating
" The warning light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
" The warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, but it
does not go out even when the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
" The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by your SUBARU
dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described be-
low, the ABS system may be considered normal.
" The warning light comes on right after the en-
gine is started but goes out immediately, remain-
ing off.
" The warning light remains on after the engine
has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle
speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).
" The warning light comes on during driving, but
it goes out immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such
as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning
light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt-
age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the
battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
7-41
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system
The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the
brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater
proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjust-
ing the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels
in accordance with the vehicle’s loading condition and
speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS system
and uses some of the ABS system’s components to
perform its function of optimizing the distribution of
braking force. If any of the ABS components used by
the EBD function fails, the EBD system also stops
working.
When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a
chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
! Steps to take if EBD system fails
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system
stops working and the brake system warning light and
ABS warning light come on simultaneously.
The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simulta-
neously during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking
system will still function. However, the rear wheels will
be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied
harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may there-
fore become somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS warning
UB7507QA
7-42
Starting and operating
light illuminate simultaneously, take the following
steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both warning lights go
out, the EBD system may be faulty.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights come on again and stay illu-
minated after the engine has been restarted, shut
down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and
check the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the “MIN” mark,
the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspect-
ed.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN” mark, DO
NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed
to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
" Driving with the brake system warning light
on is dangerous. This indicates your brake sys-
tem may not be working properly. If the light re-
mains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUB-
ARU dealer immediately.
" If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are
operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBA-
RU dealer for repair.
7-43
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle Dynamics Control system (if
equipped)
Always use the utmost care in driving – over-
confidence because you are driving with a Ve-
hicle Dynamics Control system equipped vehi-
cle could easily lead to a serious accident.
" Even if your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle
Dynamics Control, winter tires or snow chains
should be used when driving on snow-covered
or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should
be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control system does not guaran-
tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid acci-
dents in any situation.
" Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is an indication that the road being trav-
elled on has a slippery surface; since having
Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee that
full vehicle control will be maintained at all
times and under all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that the speed of the
vehicle should be reduced considerably.
" Whenever suspension components, steering
components, or an axle are removed from a ve-
hicle equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control,
have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform an
inspection of that system.
" The following precautions should be ob-
served in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be fitted with tires of
the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore,
the amount of wear should be the same for all
four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as
shown on the vehicle placard attached to the
driver’s side door pillar.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery
road surface and/or during cornering and/or an eva-
sive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the wheels’ respective
braking forces to help maintain traction and directional
control.
" Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to prevent
7-44
Starting and operating
spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfac-
es, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional
control. Activation of this function is shown by steady
illumination of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light.
" Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed to help
maintain directional stability by suppressing the
wheels’ tendency to slide sideways during steering op-
erations. Activation of this function is shown by flash-
ing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indica-
tor light.
NOTE
" Slight twitching of the brake pedal may be felt
when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper-
ates; a small degree of vehicle or steering wheel
shaking may also be noticed in this situation.
These are normal characteristics of Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation and are no cause for
alarm.
" When driving off immediately after starting the
engine, a short-lived operation noise may be no-
ticed coming from the engine compartment. This
noise is generated as a result of a check being per-
formed on the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
and is normal.
" Depending on the timing of activation of the
brakes, certain situations may occur just after
driving off where the brake pedal seems to exhibit
a jolting motion. This too is a consequence of the
Vehicle Dynamics Control operational check and
is normal.
" In the circumstances listed below, the vehicle
may be more unstable than it feels to the driver.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control System may there-
fore operate. Such operation does not indicate a
system fault.
" on gravel-covered or rutted roads
" on unfinished roads
" when the vehicle is towing a trailer
" when the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or
winter tires
" Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem will cause operation of the steering wheel to
feel slightly different compared to that for normal
conditions.
" Even if the vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, it is important that win-
ter tires be used when driving on snow-covered or
icy roads. (All four wheels should be fitted with
tires of the same size and brand). Furthermore, if
snow chains are to be used, they should be fitted
on the front wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with
7-45
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
snow chains, however, the effectiveness of the Ve-
hicle Dynamics Control system is reduced and
this should be taken into account when driving the
vehicle in such a condition.
" It is always important to reduce speed when ap-
proaching a corner, even if the vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control.
" All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the
same size, type, and brand; furthermore, the
amount of wear should be the same for all four
tires. If these precautions are not observed and
non-matching tires are used, it is quite possible
that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be
unable to operate correctly as intended.
" Always turn off the engine before replacing a
tire as failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system unable to operate correct-
ly.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control system
monitor
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light
The indicator light turns on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position; it turns off approximately
two seconds later. This indicator light flashes during
activation of the skid suppression function and is illu-
minated steadily during activation of the traction con-
trol function.
The following two situations could indicate a malfunc-
tion of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system; if either
UB7507GA
7-46
Starting and operating
should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer
carry out an inspection of that system at the first avail-
able opportunity.
" The indicator light does not turn on when the ignition
key is turned to the ON position.
" The indicator light does not turn off approximately
two seconds after the ignition key has been turned to
the ON position.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
This single light has the function of indicating malfunc-
tions in the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the
function of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is not operating. It comes on in the event
of a malfunction in the system and is illuminated when-
ever the system is not operating.
" Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and goes off several sec-
onds after engine startup. This lighting pattern indi-
cates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is op-
erating normally.
The following situations could indicate a malfunction of
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system; if any should
occur, we recommend that you have an authorized
SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of the system
at the first available opportunity.
" The warning light does not turn on when the ignition
key is turned to the ON position.
" The warning light turns on while the vehicle is being
driven.
" When a malfunction has occurred in the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control electrical system, only the warning
light will turn on. In such an event, the ABS will still be
operating normally.
" The warning light will also turn on when a problem
occurs with the ABS or Vehicle Dynamics Control
electronic control systems.
Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control system con-
UB7507FA
7-47
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
trols each brake through the ABS, whenever the ABS
stops operating due to a malfunction in that electrical
system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will also be-
come unable to control all four brakes. Thus Vehicle
Dynamics Control system operation halts and the
warning light turns on. Although both the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system and the ABS will be inoperable
in this situation, it will still be possible to stop the vehi-
cle using normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system and the ABS do not adversely affect oper-
ation of the vehicle in any way when they are inopera-
ble; however should such a situation occur, drive with
care and have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
out an inspection of those systems at the first available
opportunity.
NOTE
When the warning light turns on and off in the fol-
lowing way, it indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is operating normally.
" Although turning on after the engine has been
started, the warning light quickly turns off and
stays off.
" The warning light turns on when the vehicle is
being driven; it then turns off and stays off.
" Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
This light comes on to indicate that the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is in non-operation mode. This
does not constitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system.
NOTE
" The indicator light may stay on for a while after
the engine has been started, especially in cold
weather. This occurs because the engine has not
yet warmed up and is completely normal. The light
will turn off when the engine has reached a suit-
able operating temperature.
" When an engine problem occurs and the mal-
function indicator lamp turns on, the indicator
light will also come on.
The following two situations could indicate malfunction
of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system; if either
should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer
carry out an inspection of that system at the first avail-
able opportunity.
" The indicator light does not turn on when the ignition
key is turned to the ON position.
" The indicator light fails to turn off after the engine is
started, even when several minutes have passed to al-
low the engine to heat up sufficiently.
7-48
Starting and operating
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
Pressing the switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynam-
ics Control system can facilitate the following opera-
tions:
" a standing start on a steeply sloping road with a
snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface
" extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck
in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed during engine operation,
the indicator light illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will be deactivated and the vehicle will
behave like a model not equipped with the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system. When the switch is pressed
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, the indicator light goes off.
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system deactivat-
ed, traction and stability enhancement offered by Ve-
hicle Dynamics Control system is unavailable. There-
fore you should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system except under above-mentioned situa-
tions.
NOTE
" When the switch has been pressed to deactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition key is turned
to the OFF position and the engine is restarted.
" If the switch is held down for 10 seconds or
longer, the indicator light goes off, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is activated, and the sys-
tem ignores any further pressing of the switch. To
make the switch usable again, turn the ignition key
to the OFF position and restart the engine.
" When the switch is pressed to deactivate the Ve-
hicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicle’s run-
ning performance is comparable with that of a ve-
hicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynam-
ics Control system except when absolutely neces-
sary.
UB3213CA
7-49
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driv-
er with a warning message by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pres-
sure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only
when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph
(32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediate-
ly to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a
blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on
while driving, never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradually reducing
speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place. Otherwise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust
the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown
on the tire placard on the door pillar on the driv-
er’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a very short
distance, the tires get warm and their pressures
increase accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
cool thoroughly before adjusting their pres-
sures to the standard values shown on the tire
placard. (Refer to the “Tires and wheels” sec-
tion in chapter 11.) The tire pressure monitoring
system does not function when the vehicle is
stationary. After adjusting the tire pressures,
increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph
(32 km/h) to start the TPMS re-checking of the
tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are
now above the severe low pressure threshold,
the low tire pressure warning light should go
UB7507RA
7-50
Starting and operating
off a few minutes later.
If this light still comes on while driving after ad-
justing the tire pressure, a tire may have signif-
icant damage and a fast leak that causes the
tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is
replaced without the original pressure sensor/
transmitter being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash. This indicates the
TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble for tire and sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire seal-
ant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunc-
tion of the tire pressure sensors. If the light
flashes, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
Do not place metal film or any metal parts under
the driver’s seat. This may cause poor recep-
tion of the signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, which are located there, and the tire pres-
sure monitoring system will not function prop-
erly.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
7-51
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Parking your vehicle
" Never leave unattended children or pets in
the vehicle. They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through inadvertent oper-
ation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
the temperature in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause severe
or possibly fatal injuries to them.
" Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate-
rials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come near hot en-
gine or exhaust system parts.
" Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in
the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occupants in the ve-
hicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO)
contained in the exhaust gas.
Never drive while the parking brake is set be-
cause this will cause unnecessary wear on the
brake linings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake has been fully
released.
To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly
and hold it down while fully pulling up the parking
brake lever.
To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly,
press the release button, then lower the lever while
keeping the button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the engine is run-
ning, the parking brake warning light comes on. After
starting the vehicle, be sure that the warning light has
gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to the
UB7525BA
7-52
Starting and operating
“Warning and indicator lights” section (chapter 3).
When parking your vehicle, always set the parking
brake firmly and put the shift lever in the “1” (1st) for an
upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a downgrade for manual
transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) position for
automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the park-
ing brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never rely
on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel.
When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels should be
turned into the curb.
UB7510AA
UB7511AA
7-53
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Cruise control
Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant ve-
hicle speed without holding your foot on the accelera-
tor pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is
25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch
is turned “OFF” when the cruise control is not in use to
avoid unintentionally setting the cruise control.
Do not use the cruise control under any of the
following conditions. This may cause loss of
vehicle control:
" driving up or down a steep grade
" driving on slippery or winding roads
" driving in heavy traffic
! To set cruise control
0
1. Push the main switch button.
UB7202BA
7-54
Starting and operating
The “ ” indicator light on the combination
meter will come on.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the “SET/
COAST” direction and release it. Then release the ac-
celerator pedal.
UB7507HA
UB7203BA
7-55
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
At this time, the “ ” indicator light is illuminated in
the combination meter.
The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while
driving with the cruise control activated. Simply de-
press the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle
will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.
! To temporarily cancel the cruise con-
trol
There are four ways to cancel the cruise control tem-
porarily:
" Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction (if
so equipped).
" Depress the brake pedal.
" Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission ve-
hicles only).
" Shift the selector lever into the “N” position (auto-
matic transmission vehicles only).
The “ ” indicator light in the combination meter
goes off when the cruise control is cancelled.
To resume the cruise control after it has been tempo-
rarily canceled and with vehicle speed of about 20
mph (32 km/h) or more, push the control lever upward
in the “RES/ACC” direction to return to the original
UB7507IA
UB7204BA
7-56
Starting and operating
cruising speed automatically.
The “ ” indicator light in the combination meter will
automatically come on at this time.
! To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
" Push the main switch again.
" Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” po-
sition (but only when the vehicle is completely
stopped).
! To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direc-
tion and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired
speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehicle
speed at that moment will be memorized and treated
as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed
and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each
time by pressing the control lever upward in the “RES/
ACC” direction quickly within 0.25 second.
! To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the ve-
hicle to the desired speed.
2. Push the control lever downward in the “SET/
COAST” direction once. Now the desired speed is set
and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual vehicle speed
when the control lever is pushed downward and
the speed last time you set it is less than 4 mph
(6.8 km/h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1
mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the cruise
control system unit regards this lever operation as
that intended to decrease the vehicle speed.
UB7203CA
7-57
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
! To decrease the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST”
direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the de-
sired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehi-
cle speed at that moment will be memorized and treat-
ed as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed
and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the control lever downward in the “SET/
COAST” direction quickly within 0.25 second.
! To decrease the speed (by brake pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control
temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed,
press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST”
direction once. Now the desired speed is set and the
vehicle will keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
! Cruise control indicator light
The cruise control indicator light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes
out after about three seconds.
UB7203BA
UB7507HA
7-58
Starting and operating
The light comes on when the “CRUISE” main switch is
pressed.
If you move the cruise control lever while turning the
ignition switch “ON”, the cruise control function is de-
activated and the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes. To
reactivate the cruise control function, turn the ignition
switch back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
! Cruise control set indicator light
The cruise control set indicator light comes on when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and
goes out after about three seconds.
The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
UB7507IA
8-1
8
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving –
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ................ 8-2
Fuel economy hints ...................................... 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .... 8-3
Catalytic converter ....................................... 8-4
Periodic inspections .................................... 8-6
Driving in foreign countries ......................... 8-7
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ..................... 8-7
Off road driving ............................................ 8-9
Winter driving ............................................... 8-12
Operation during cold weather ........................ 8-12
Driving on snowy and icy roads ...................... 8-13
Corrosion protection ........................................ 8-14
Snow tires .......................................................... 8-15
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-17
Rocking the vehicle .......................................... 8-17
Loading your vehicle ................................... 8-18
Vehicle capacity weight .................................... 8-19
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........ 8-20
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ............... 8-21
Trailer hitch (if equipped) ............................ 8-27
Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-27
When you do not tow a trailer .......................... 8-30
Trailer towing ................................................ 8-31
Warranties and maintenance ........................... 8-31
Maximum load limits ......................................... 8-31
Trailer hitches ................................................... 8-37
Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-38
Trailer towing tips ............................................. 8-40
8-2
Driving tips
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the
first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
The performance and long life of your vehicle are de-
pendent on how you handle and care for your vehicle
while it is new. Follow these instructions during the
first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):
" Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine
speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.
" Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle
speed for a long time, either fast or slow.
" Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, ex-
cept in an emergency.
" Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to a
newly installed or overhauled engine or when brake
pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.
" Select the proper gear position for the speed and
road conditions.
" Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always
accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed.
Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.
" Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the
engine.
" Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
" Keep the engine properly tuned.
" Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown
on the tire placard, which is located under the door
latch on the driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
" Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
" Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
" Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
8-3
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monox-
ide)
" Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex-
haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color-
less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or
even lethal, if inhaled.
" Always properly maintain the engine exhaust
system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en-
tering the vehicle.
" Never run the engine in a closed space, such
as a garage, except for the brief time needed to
drive the vehicle in or out of it.
" Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a
lengthy time while the engine is running. If that
is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to
force fresh air into the vehicle.
" Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to
ensure that the ventilation system always
works properly.
" If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon as possible. If
you must drive under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
" Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction of the met-
als used in the manufacture of the exhaust sys-
tem, you may hear a crackling sound coming from
the exhaust system for a short time after the en-
gine has been shut off. This sound is normal.
8-4
Driving tips
Catalytic converter
" Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the
vehicle anywhere near flammable materials
(e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the
catalytic converter operates at very high tem-
peratures.
" Keep everyone and flammable materials
away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is
running. The exhaust gas is very hot.
2.5-liter non-turbo models (other than California-
spec.)
HS8002BA
8-5
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
2.5-liter turbo models 2.5-liter non-turbo models (California-spec.) and 3.0-
liter models
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust sys-
tem. It serves as catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx
in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
" Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount
of leaded gasoline will damage the catalytic converter.
" Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the ve-
hicle.
" Avoid racing the engine.
" Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is
moving.
UG8501BA UB8029BA
8-6
Driving tips
" Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine
running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete
combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired
by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
" Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treat-
ment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the
exhaust system.
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times,
always have the recommended maintenance services
listed in the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified
time or mileage intervals.
8-7
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in another country:
" Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to
the “Fuel requirements” section in chapter 7.)
" Comply with all regulations and requirements of
each country.
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
" Always maintain a safe driving speed accord-
ing to the road and weather conditions in order
to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn,
during sudden braking or under other similar
conditions.
" Always use the utmost care in driving – over-
confidence because you are driving an all
wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri-
ous accident.
8-8
Driving tips
All wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four
wheels. AWD vehicles provide better traction when
driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting
power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU
AWD can also provide added traction during acceler-
ation, and added engine braking force during deceler-
ation.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle
differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle
and it contains some features unique to AWD. For
safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the
AWD system, you should keep the following tips in
mind:
" An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper
roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two
wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in han-
dling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sud-
den braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or
turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and
maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
" When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the
same size, circumference, construction, brand, and
load range as the original tires listed on the tire plac-
ard. Using other sizes, circumferences or construction
may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and
clearance between the body and tires. It also may be
dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
" If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat
tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire
stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
" Always check the cold tire pressure before starting
to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided
on the tire placard, which is located under the door
latch on the driver’s side.
" Tire chains should always be placed on the front
wheels only.
HS8003BA
8-9
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
" There are some precautions that you must observe
when towing your vehicle. For detail information, see
“Towing” section in chapter 9.
Off road driving
" Always maintain a safe driving speed accord-
ing to the road and weather conditions in order
to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn,
during sudden braking or under other similar
conditions.
" Always use the utmost care in driving – over-
confidence because you are driving an all
wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri-
ous accident.
! All AWD models except OUTBACK
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road
vehicle nor an all terrain vehicle. It is a passenger car
designed primarily for on-road use. The AWD feature
gives it some limited off-road capabilities in situations
in which driving surfaces a relatively level, obstruction-
free and otherwise similar to on-road driving condi-
tions. Operating it under other than those conditions
could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which
might result in damage not eligible for repair under
warranty. If you do take your SUBARU off road, you
should review the common sense precautions in the
8-10
Driving tips
next section (applicable to the OUTBACK) for general
guidance. But please keep in mind that your vehicle’s
off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the
OUTBACK.
Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or
roads flooded with water. Water entering the engine
air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may
cause it to stall.
! OUTBACK
Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clear-
ance, your SUBARU can be driven on ordinary roads
or off-road. But please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither a conven-
tional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you
do take your SUBARU off-road, certain common
sense precautions such as the following should be
taken:
" Make certain that you and all of your passengers
are wearing seatbelts.
" Carry some emergency equipment, such as a tow-
ing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit
and cell phone or citizens band radio.
" Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain.
" Slow down and employ extra caution at all times.
When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of
marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
" Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive ei-
ther straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle
can much more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes
that are too steep.
" Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher
speeds.
" Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering
wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure
your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
" If driving through water, such as when crossing
shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and
the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure
that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and com-
pletely through the stream. The water should be shal-
low enough that it does not reach the vehicle’s under-
carriage. Water entering the engine air intake or the
exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts
may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall.
Never attempt to drive through rushing water; regard-
less of its depth, it can wash away the ground from un-
der your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and
even vehicle rollover.
8-11
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
" Always check your brakes for effectiveness immedi-
ately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by
driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Re-
peat that process several times to dry out the brake
discs and brake pads.
" Do not drive or park over or near flammable materi-
als such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may
burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after engine stops. This
could create a fire hazard.
" After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand,
rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under-
body. If the vehicle is used with these materials
trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical
breakdown or fire could occur.
" Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make
certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks.
During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could
be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do
not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the
vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to
tip over.
" If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or
mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move
the selector lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best pos-
sible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
" When the road surface is extremely slippery, you
can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with
the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
" Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those
specified in this manual.
" Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-road driving.
Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt
buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.
" Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driv-
ing conditions such as rough roads or off roads will ne-
cessitate more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that specified in
the maintenance schedule described in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while
operating it off-road and not using common sense pre-
cautions such as those listed above is not eligible for
warranty coverage.
8-12
Driving tips
Winter driving
! Operation during cold weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire
chains, a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a
small shovel, and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures re-
duce battery capacity. The battery must be in good
condition to provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for
cold weather. Heavy summer oil will cause harder
starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them
with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate
the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door
is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an anti-
freeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other
substitutes because they may damage the paint of the
vehicle.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice
from your shoes because that could make the pedals
slippery and dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before driving, check
that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other
controls operate smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under
the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During
severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe
to do so and check under the fenders periodically.
UB8500AA
8-13
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
! Parking in cold weather
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under
your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine running.
Do not use the parking brake when parking for long
periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that po-
sition. Instead, observe the following:
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for manual trans-
mission vehicles, and in “P” for automatic transmission
vehicles.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle
from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows,
raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage
to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked after use on
roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left
parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause poor braking action.
Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc
brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful
not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and
ABS harness.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel sys-
tem and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze ad-
ditive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold
weather.
Use only additives that are specifically designed for
this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its
effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extend-
ed period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capac-
ity.
! Driving on snowy and icy roads
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads
such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause
loss of vehicle control.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden brak-
8-14
Driving tips
ing, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and
sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sud-
den braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake
effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a
lower gear when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can
cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of
vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehi-
cle’s braking performance on snowy and icy roads.
Refer to the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” and “Ve-
hicle Dynamics Control system (if equipped)” section
in chapter 7 for information on braking on slippery sur-
faces.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear
window, use the defroster with the airflow control but-
ton/dial in the “ ” position and the temperature
control dial set for maximum warmth until the wiper
blades are completely thawed out. If your vehicle is
equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blades. To thaw out the rear wiper
blade, use the rear window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on
the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation,
use the defroster with the airflow control button/dial in
“ ” and the temperature control dial set for maxi-
mum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed
enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away us-
ing the windshield washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from
working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm,
pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you
stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning
flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades
(winter blades) during the seasons you could have
snow and sub-zero temperatures. Blades of this type
give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions.
Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehi-
cle.
! Corrosion protection
Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section (chapter
10).
8-15
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
! Snow tires
! All models except OUTBACK
" When replacing original tires with winter
(snow) tires, make sure you use only the same
size, construction and load range as the origi-
nal tires listed on the tire placard. Using other
sizes and construction may affect speedome-
ter/odometer calibration and clearance be-
tween the body and tires. It also may be danger-
ous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
" You must install four winter tires that are of
the same size, circumferences, construction,
brand, and load range. Mixing other sizes, cir-
cumferences or constructions may result in se-
vere mechanical damage to the drive train of
your vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
braking and speedometer/odometer calibra-
tion. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss
of vehicle control.
" Do not use a combination of radial, belted
bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead to an acci-
dent.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” which
are designed to provide an adequate measure of trac-
tion, handling and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance per-
formance through use of tires designed specifically for
winter driving conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be
sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must in-
stall four winter tires that are of the same size, con-
struction, brand and load range and you should never
mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may re-
sult in dangerous handling characteristics. When you
choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clear-
ance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of
the type of tires on your vehicle.
! OUTBACK models only
" When replacing original tires with winter
(snow) tires, make sure you use only the same
size and construction as recommended. Using
other sizes or construction may affect speed-
ometer/odometer calibration and clearance be-
tween the body and tires. It also may be danger-
8-16
Driving tips
ous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
" You must install four winter tires that are of
the same size, circumferences, construction,
brand, and load range. Mixing other sizes, cir-
cumferences or constructions may result in se-
vere mechanical damage to the drive train of
your vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
braking and speedometer/odometer calibra-
tion. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss
of vehicle control.
" Do not use a combination of radial, belted
bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead to an acci-
dent.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” which
are designed to provide an adequate measure of trac-
tion, handling and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance per-
formance through use of tires designed specifically for
winter driving conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be
sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must in-
stall four winter tires that are of the same size, con-
struction, brand and load range and you should never
mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may re-
sult in dangerous handling characteristics. When you
choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clear-
ance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of
the type of tires on your vehicle.
Your OUTBACK comes with P225/60R16 or P225/
55R17 “all season tires” as original equipment.
You should be aware that some winter tires with
that same size designation may actually be too
large for the vehicle and may cause rubbing on
sharp turns. Listed below is the winter tire size
that we recommend.
Recommended winter (snow) tire size
2.5-liter non-turbo models: P225/60R16 or P215/
60R16 Studless
All models other than 2.5-liter non-turbo models:
P215/55R17, P225/60R16 or P215/60R16 Studless
8-17
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
! Tire chains
Tire chains cannot be used on tires listed below
because of lack of clearance between the tires
and vehicle body.
" 2.5-liter non-turbo models (except OUT-
BACK): P205/55R16 tires
" 2.5-liter turbo models (except OUTBACK):
215/45ZR17 tires
" 2.5-liter non-turbo models (OUTBACK): P225/
60R16 tires
" 2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models (OUT-
BACK): P225/55R17 tires
" 2.5-liter non-turbo and 3.0-liter models (OUT-
BACK): P225/60R16 winter (snow) tires
" 2.5-liter non-turbo and 3.0-liter models (OUT-
BACK): P215/60R16 winter (snow) tires
" 2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models (OUT-
BACK): P215/55R17 winter (snow) tires
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the
use of tire chains, in which case put the chains on the
front wheels only. Use only SAE class S type chains
that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to
damage the vehicle body or suspension.
When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below
19 mph (30 km/h). When a temporary spare tire is on
a front wheel, replace the temporary spare tire with the
rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit
chains on the front tires.
Always use the utmost care when driving with tire
chains – overconfidence because you are driving with
tire chains could easily lead to a serious accident.
! Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand,
or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and
move the selector lever back and forth between “D”
and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when
trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can
obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the
transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
Refer to the “Automatic transmission” section in chap-
ter 7 for information on holding the transmission in 2nd
position.
8-18
Driving tips
Loading your vehicle
Never allow passengers to ride on the folded
rear seatback, in the trunk or in the cargo area.
Doing so may result in serious injury.
" Never stack luggage or other cargo higher
than the top of the seatback because it could
tumble forward and injure passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep lug-
gage or cargo low, as close to the floor as pos-
sible.
" When you carry something inside the vehicle,
secure it whenever you can to prevent it from
being thrown around inside the vehicle during
sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
" Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These
loads raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and
make it more prone to tip over.
" Secure lengthy items properly to prevent
them from shooting forward and causing seri-
ous injury during a sudden stop.
" Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you
do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
" Do not place anything on the rear shelf be-
hind the rear seatback (for Sedan) or the ex-
tended luggage cover (for Station wagon). Such
items could tumble forward in the event of a
sudden stop or a collision. This could cause se-
rious injury.
HS8005BA
8-19
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flam-
mable or corrosive liquids or any other danger-
ous items inside the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded
cargo.
! Vehicle capacity weight
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by
weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum
load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the ve-
hicle placard attached to the driver’s side door pillar. It
includes the total weight of driver and all passengers
and their belongings, any optional equipment such as
a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the
tongue load of a trailer.
UB8200BA
UB8201BA
8-20
Driving tips
! GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
Certification label
The certification label attached to the driver’s side
door shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed
the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the
vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any op-
tional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore,
the GVW changes depending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and
rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage in-
side the vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than
the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW
may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution
of the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly distributed
throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should con-
firm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the
GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi-
cle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range
than the originals because they may lower the GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a high-
er load range than the originals do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
UB8222BA
8-21
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
! Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped)
A) Crossbar kit
" For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail
must be used together with a roof crossbar kit
and the appropriate carrying attachment. The
roof rail must never be used alone to carry car-
go. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a
dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
" When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure
that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying
attachment and cargo does not exceed the
maximum load limit. Overloading may cause
damage to the vehicle and create a safety haz-
ard.
The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself.
Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar
kit to the roof rail and installing the appropriate carry-
ing attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof cross-
bar kit and a carrying attachment, never exceed the
maximum load limit explained below. You should also
be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the “Loading
your vehicle” section in this chapter for information on
loading cargo into or onto your vehicle. The maximum
load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach-
ment must not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg). Place the
heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and
evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all
cargo.
A
UB8202BB
8-22
Driving tips
! Installing carrying attachments on the cross-
bars
When installing any carrying attachment such as a
bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket,
etc. on the crossbars, follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions and make sure that the attachment is se-
curely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments
designed specifically for the crossbars. A set of the
crossbars is designed to carry loads (cargo and at-
tachment) of not more than 100 lbs (45 kg). Before
operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is
properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is al-
tered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus
affecting the driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering
and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be in-
creased.
! Removal and installation of the crossbars
The crossbars can be removed when you do not use
the roof to carry cargo.
" To remove the crossbar
1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx® head screw
from the top of each crossbar end support.
Loosen the lower clamps.
UB8203BA
8-23
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
2. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof rails.
" To install the front crossbar
Front crossbar:
Front crossbar has 100 LBS Load Label on left hand
side.
A) T-25 torx® head screw
1. Make sure that the T-25 torx® head screw on the
back of each crossbar end support is tightened cor-
rectly.
2. Before placing the crossbar on the roof rails, make
sure that the T-30 torx® head screw is removed from
the top of each crossbar end support.
UB8204BA
A
UB8213BB
8-24
Driving tips
3. The crossbar with the 100 LBS Load Label at-
tached onto it is the front crossbar. An arrow is marked
on the back of the front crossbar for correct installa-
tion. Install the front crossbar so that the arrow faces
the front of the vehicle.
A) 10 in (250 mm)
4. Install the front crossbar so that the crossbar end
supports are located approximately 10 in (250 mm)
rearward from the joints between the roof rails and the
front roof rail supports.
B
A
UB8205BB
A
UB8214BB
8-25
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
A) Lower clamp
B) T-30 torx® head screw
5. Tighten the lower clamps onto the crossbar. Using
a torque wrench, loosely tighten the T-30 torx® head
screws.
NOTE
It may be necessary to squeeze the lower clamp
and the end support together to compress the
pads and gain a better alignment of the pieces
while trying to start the screw. Use care not to
crossthread the screw in the insert.
6. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on the roof
rails, and if available, use a T-30 torx® bit and torque
wrench and tighten the T-30 torx® head screws to 30
to 35 lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of
torque (or tighten securely with the torx® wrench pro-
vided).
A
B
UB8215BB
UB8203CA
8-26
Driving tips
Rear crossbar:
A) Zero gap
Install the rear cross bar so that the rear edges of both
crossbar end supports are aligned (zero gap) with the
front edges of both rear roof rail supports.
Install the rear crossbar in the same manner as the
front crossbar.
Do not carry cargo on the roof when the cross-
bars are removed. Luggage on the roof will be
thrown forward or backward in sudden stops or
rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous
road hazard.
NOTE
Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure
the four T-30 crossbar clamp screws have been
checked, and retightened if necessary to 35 lbf·in
(4.0 N·m, 0.41 kgf·m), as outlined in Step #5 above.
A
UB8216BB
8-27
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Trailer hitch (if equipped)
" Never exceed the maximum weight specified
for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident resulting in se-
rious personal injuries. Permissible trailer
weight changes depending on the situation. Re-
fer to the next section “Trailer towing” for pos-
sible recommendations and limitations.
" Trailer brakes are required when the towing
load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your
trailer has safety chains and that each chain
will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight.
Towing trailers without safety chains could cre-
ate a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates
from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch
ball damage.
" Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin
for positive locking placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch re-
ceiver, the trailer could get loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
" Use only the ball mount supplied with this
hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying
hitch. Do not use with any type of weight dis-
tributing hitch.
The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated
load. The maximum gross trailer weight and maximum
gross tongue weight are indicated in the following ta-
ble.
When you tow a trailer, follow the instructions in the
next section “Trailer towing”.
! Connecting a trailer
1. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver
tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver
tube.
Maximum gross
trailer weight
Maximum gross
tongue weight
3.0-liter models 3,000 lbs
(1,360 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
All models
other than
3.0-liter models
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
8-28
Driving tips
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the hitch receiv-
er tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin securely.
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does not come
off the hitch receiver.
UB8218BA UB8219BA
8-29
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
A) Hitch ball installation point
B) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball
mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely
installed on the ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains
that will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. The
chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent
the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it
should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac-
count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the
ground.
Do not connect safety chains to part of the ve-
hicle other than the safety chain hooks.
A
B
UB8220BB
UB8221BA
8-30
Driving tips
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black four-pin
wire connector to the towing trailer’s wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness
by individually activating the brake, right turn signal,
left turn signal, stop, and parking lights on the trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before
launching or retrieving a watercraft.
! When you do not tow a trailer
" Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube
and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver
tube.
" Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the
hitch wire harness to protect against possible damage.
" Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin con-
nector using the terminal grease.
HS8015BA
8-31
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used pri-
marily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trail-
er puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, driv-
etrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an ad-
verse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satis-
faction depend upon proper use of correct equipment
and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the ad-
vice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchas-
ing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment ap-
propriate for your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions on correct installation and use provid-
ed by the trailer and other towing equipment manufac-
turers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or ve-
hicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment,
or from any errors or omissions in the instructions ac-
companying such equipment or for your failure to fol-
low the proper instructions.
! Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage
or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your
vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will
be required due to the additional load. (Refer to “Main-
tenance schedule under severe driving conditions” in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with
a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain
component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving.
! Maximum load limits
Never exceed the maximum load limits ex-
plained below. Exceeding the maximum load
limits could cause personal injury and/or vehi-
cle damage.
" Adequate size trailer brakes are required
when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) total weight.
" Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total
weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make
sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle
8-32
Driving tips
and trailer are acceptable.
! Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
load) must never exceed the maximum weight shown
below.
3,0-liter models
HS8016AA
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer with-
out brakes.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with
brakes.
3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)
When towing a trailer on a
long uphill grade continu-
ously for over 5 miles (8 km)
with an outside temperature
of 104°F (40°C) or above.
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
8-33
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
All models other than 3.0-liter models
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of
the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage,
trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine
the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting
your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
GVWR is shown on the certification label located on
Model Conditions Maximum
total trailer
weight
MT models When towing a trailer with-
out brakes.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
When towing a trailer with
brakes.
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
AT models When towing a trailer with-
out brakes.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
When towing a trailer with
brakes.
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
When towing a trailer on a
long uphill grade continu-
ously for over 5 miles (8 km)
with an outside temperature
of 104°F (40°C) or above.
1,350 lbs
(612 kg)
UB8503AA
8-34
Driving tips
the driver’s door of your vehicle.
Certification label
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must nev-
er exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The
front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front
and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification la-
bel.
UB8222BA
UB8209BA
8-35
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Certification label
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that
the total weight and weight distribution are within safe
driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a
change in weight distribution while driving.
! Tongue load
Tongue load
If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the
back of trailer’s axle than in the front, the load
is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to skid, espe-
cially during braking or when vehicle speed is
reduced during cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
UB8222BA
HS8019AA
8-36
Driving tips
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 per-
cent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the
maximum value of 200 lbs (90 kg).
A) Jack
B) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom
scale as shown in the illustration below. When weigh-
ing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing cou-
pler at the height at which it would be during actual
towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution
of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with
more weight in the back than in the front; approximate-
ly 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front
and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distrib-
ute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and
right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a
change in weight distribution while driving.
A
B
UB8210BB
F
60%
40%
50%
50%
HS8021BB
8-37
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
! Trailer hitches
Never drill the frame or under-body of your ve-
hicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you
do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment through the
drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drill-
ing the frame or under-body of your vehicle
could cause deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled
hole.
" Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system,
brake system, or other systems when installing
a hitch or other trailer towing equipment.
" Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can
cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bear-
ings, wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
! OUTBACK wagon
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recom-
mended. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from
your SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure
the hitch is suited to your vehicle and trailer. Consult
with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in
choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure
to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper.
The bumper is not designed to handle that type of
load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch
mounting bolts and nuts are tight.
! All vehicles except OUTBACK wagon
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer hitches.
Consult with a professional hitch supplier to assist you
in choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be
sure to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper.
The bumper is not designed to handle that type of
load.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts
are tight.
8-38
Driving tips
! Connecting a trailer
! Trailer brakes
" Adequate size trailer brakes are required
when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) total weight.
" Do not directly connect your trailer’s hydrau-
lic brake system to the hydraulic brake system
in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause
the vehicle’s brake performance to deteriorate
and could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is re-
quired to be equipped with its own brake system. Elec-
tric brakes or surge brakes are recommended, and
must be installed properly. Check that your trailer’s
brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or
other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU’s brake
system is not designed to be tapped into the trailer’s
hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for more infor-
mation about the trailer’s brake system.
! Trailer safety chains
Always use safety chains between your vehicle
and the trailer. Towing trailer without safety
chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling
damage or hitch ball damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should
break or become disconnected, the trailer could get
loose and create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and
trailer with trailer safety chains. Pass the chains cross-
ing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the
trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer
tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow
sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations
into account; however, be careful not to let them drag
on the ground.
For more information about the safety chain connec-
tion, refer to the instructions for your hitch and trailer.
8-39
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
! Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the
standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of
view without significant blind spots. If significant blind
spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side mirrors,
use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/
province and/or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
Direct splicing or other improper connection of
trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electri-
cal system and cause a malfunction of your ve-
hicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical
system requires modifications to the vehicle’s lighting
circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wir-
ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected
properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check
for proper operation of the turn signals, the brake
lights and parking lights each time you hitch up.
! Tires
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare
tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not de-
signed to sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of
the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly
inflated.
The recommended cold tire pressure under trailer tow-
ing conditions is shown in chapter 12, “Specifications”
UB8501BA
8-40
Driving tips
and in “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at the end of
this manual. Adjust the rear tire pressure to the recom-
mended pressure when the tires are cold. Normal
pressure should be maintained in the front tires.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper infla-
tion pressure should be in accordance with the trailer
manufacturer’s specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a
trailer, ask a commercial road service to repair the flat
tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or
trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be
sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.
! Trailer towing tips
" Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing
a trailer in hilly country on hot days.
" When towing a trailer, steering, stability,
stopping distance and braking performance
will be different from normal operation. For
safety’s sake, you should employ extra caution
when towing a trailer and you should never
speed. You should also keep the following tips
in mind:
! Before starting out on a trip
" Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mount-
ing are in good condition. If any problems are appar-
ent, do not tow the trailer.
" Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trail-
er attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the
front and down at the rear, check the total trailer
weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then con-
firm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
" Check that the tire pressures are correct.
" Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected
properly. Confirm that.
– the trailer tongue is connected properly to the
hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is connected properly
and trailer’s brake lights illuminate when the vehi-
cle’s brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s
turn signal lights flash when the vehicle’s turn signal
lever is operated.
– the safety chains are connected properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured safety in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good rearward field of
view without a significant blind spot.
8-41
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
" Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of
the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a
trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping
and backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
" You should allow for considerably more stopping
distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking
because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and
loss of control.
" Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If
your vehicle has a manual transmission, always start
out in first gear and release the clutch at moderate en-
gine revolution.
" Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane
changes.
" Slow down before turning. Make a longer than nor-
mal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be
closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn.
In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
" Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of
your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds
can be due to weather conditions or the passing of
large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the
steering wheel and slow down immediately but gradu-
ally.
" When passing other vehicles, considerable dis-
tance is required because of the added weight and
length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
A) Left turn
B) Right turn
" Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes prac-
tice. When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate
or steer rapidly. When turning back, grip the bottom of
the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left
for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn.
" If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle
is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs
performed immediately by the nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
A
B
UB8502BB
8-42
Driving tips
! Driving on grades
" Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift
into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to
utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheat-
ing of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not make sudden
downshifts.
" When driving uphill in hot weather, the air condition-
er may turn off automatically to protect the engine from
overheating.
" When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to
the water temperature gauge pointer (for all vehicles)
and AT OIL TEMP warning light (for AT vehicles) since
the engine and transmission are relatively prone to
overheating under these conditions. If the water tem-
perature gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT
zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates,
immediately switch off the air conditioner and stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine
overheating” section in chapter 9, and “Warning and
indicator lights” section in chapter 3.
NOTE
With AT vehicles, the temperature of engine cool-
ant is less likely to rise to the OVERHEAT zone in
the “D” position than in the manual mode position.
" If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid
using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an
uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot
brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to over-
heat.
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer
when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You
should not park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the
following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the
vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the
regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the park-
ing brake; slowly release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission)
or “P” (automatic transmission) and shut off the en-
gine.
9-1
9
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency .. 9-2
Temporary spare tire .................................... 9-3
Flat tires ......................................................... 9-5
Changing a flat tire ........................................... 9-5
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) .................................................... 9-16
Jump starting ................................................ 9-17
How to jump start ............................................. 9-18
Engine overheating ....................................... 9-20
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment .................................................. 9-20
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment .................................................. 9-20
Towing ........................................................... 9-21
Towing and tie-down hooks ............................ 9-22
Using a flat-bed truck ....................................... 9-27
Towing with all wheels on the ground ............ 9-28
Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
unlocked ..................................................... 9-29
Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be
closed ......................................................... 9-30
Maintenance tools ......................................... 9-33
Jack .................................................................... 9-33
Jack handle ....................................................... 9-34
Other maintenance tools .................................. 9-35
9-2
In case of emergency
In case o f emergen cy
If you park your vehicle in an emer-
gency
The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or
night to warn other drivers when you have to park your
vehicle under emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off
the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regard-
less of the ignition switch position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard
warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the
switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn
signals do not work.
UB9500BA
9-3
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Temporary spare tire
" Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare
tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not de-
signed to sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of
the vehicle and may lead to an accident.
" When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim
is replaced without the original pressure sen-
sor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire
pressure warning light will flash. This indicates
the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is
unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/or system re-
setting.
Never use any temporary spare tire other than
the original. Using other sizes may result in se-
vere mechanical damage to the drive train of
your vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a
conventional tire and is designed for emergency use
only. Remove the temporary spare tire and re-install
the conventional tire as soon as possible because the
spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare
tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. The cor-
rect pressure is 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
).
When using the temporary spare tire, note the follow-
ing:
" Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
" Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire.
Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit
properly.
" Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the
same time.
" Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller
diameter, so road clearance is reduced.
9-4
In case of emergency
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
" When the wear indicator appears on the tread, re-
place the tire.
NOTE
If your vehicle is an AWD type with an automatic
transmission but is neither a Turbo model nor a
3.0-liter model, deactivate its all-wheel-drive capa-
bility as follows: Before driving your vehicle with
the temporary spare tire, put a spare fuse inside
the FWD connector located in the engine compart-
ment and confirm that the “ ” warning light
comes on. The all wheel drive capability of the ve-
hicle has now been deactivated. After re-installing
the conventional tire, remove the spare fuse from
the FWD connector in order to reactivate all wheel
drive.
1
2
US9525BB UBB501BA
9-5
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake sud-
denly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually re-
ducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
! Changing a flat tire
" Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a
loose road surface. The jack can come out of
the jacking point or sink into the ground and
this can result in a severe accident.
" Use only the jack provided with your vehicle.
The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed
only for changing a tire. Never get under the ve-
hicle while supporting the vehicle with this
jack.
" Always turn the engine off before raising the
flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never
swing or push the vehicle supported with the
jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point
due to a jolt and this can result in a severe acci-
dent.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible,
then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual
transmission vehicle in reverse or an automatic trans-
mission vehicle in the “P” (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have ev-
eryone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire di-
agonally opposite the flat tire.
HS9003BA
9-6
In case of emergency
Sedan
A) Jack handle
B) Spare tire
C) Jack and tool bucket
Station wagon
A) Jack handle
B) Jack and tool bucket
C) Spare tire
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and jack handle.
The spare tire and jack are stored under the floor of
the trunk or cargo area.
To remove the spare tire and jack, proceed as follows:
B
C
A
UB9211BB
A
C
B
UB9210BB
9-7
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Sedan:
1. Lift the handle of the floor cover and hook the han-
dle onto the trunk edge.
2. Remove the jack handle from the back of the floor
cover.
3. Take out the storage tray.
UB9222BA
UB6239BA
9-8
In case of emergency
4. Take out the jack and tool bucket.
A) Wheel nut wrench
B) Jack
5. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack out of the tool
bucket.
UB9209BA
A
B
UB9213BB
9-9
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
6. Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
Station wagon:
1. Open the lid and hang the hook provided on the
under side of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open.
UB9518BA
UB6522BA
9-10
In case of emergency
2. Remove the left hand part of the lid and take out the
jack handle.
3. Take out the storage tray.
UB9504BA UB6531BA
9-11
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
4. Take out the jack and tool bucket.
A) Wheel nut wrench
B) Jack
5. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack out of the tool
bucket.
UB9208BA
A
B
UB9213BB
9-12
In case of emergency
6. Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
spare tire out.
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is a temporary
spare tire, carefully read the section “Temporary spare
tire” in this chapter and strictly follow the instructions.
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated before using
it.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench
but do not remove the nuts.
UB9518BA
UB9203BA
9-13
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear
jack-up point closest to the flat tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engag-
es firmly into the jack-up point.
UB9514BA UB9522BA
9-14
In case of emergency
9. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn
the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise
the vehicle higher than necessary.
10.Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
11.Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting
UB9525BA HS9011BA
UB9220BA
9-15
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth.
12.Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts.
Tighten them by hand.
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or
nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could
cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
13.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
vehicle.
14.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tight-
ening order in the illustration.
The torque for tightening the nuts is 74 to 89 lbf·ft (100
to 120 N·m, 10 to 12 kgf·m). This torque is equivalent
to applying about 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top
of the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the
wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench
because you may exceed the specified torque. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automo-
tive service facility.
15.Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment.
Put the spacer and tighten the attaching bolt firmly.
Also store the jack and jack handle in their storage lo-
1
4
2
5
3
UG9511BB
UB9518CA
9-16
In case of emergency
cations.
Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the
passenger compartment after changing
wheels. In a sudden stop or collisions, loose
equipment could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper
place.
! Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driv-
er with a warning message indicated by sending a sig-
nal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when
tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only
when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure
(for example, a blow-out caused running over a sharp
object).
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on
while driving, never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradually reducing
speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place. Otherwise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust
the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown
on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still comes on while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may have significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
UB7507RA
9-17
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is
replaced without the original pressure sensor/
transmitter being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash. This indicates the
TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble for tire and sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire seal-
ant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunc-
tion of the tire pressure sensors.
If the light flashes, promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
Jump starting
" Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it
come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or
the vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the
exposed area with water immediately. Get med-
ical help if the fluid has entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme-
diately drink a large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical help.
Keep everyone including children away from
the battery.
" The gas generated by a battery explodes if a
flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke
or light a match while jump starting.
" Never attempt jump starting if the discharged
battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to
burst or explode.
" Whenever working on or around a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protectors, and remove
metal objects such as rings, bands or other
metal jewelry.
" Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on
them do not have loose or missing insulation.
9-18
In case of emergency
Do not jump start unless cables in suitable con-
dition are available.
" A running engine can be dangerous. Keep
your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools
away from the cooling fan, belts and any other
moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches
and ties is advisable.
" Jump starting is dangerous if it is done incor-
rectly. If you are unsure about the proper proce-
dure for jump starting, consult a competent me-
chanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a run down
(discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started
by connecting your battery to another battery (called
the booster battery) with jumper cables.
! How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the
negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let
the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence
illustrated.
9-19
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
UB9521BB
1)Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the dis-
charged battery.
2)Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) ter-
minal of the booster battery.
3)Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (–) terminal
of the booster battery.
4)Connect the other end of the ca-
ble to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not
near any moving parts and that the
cable clamps are not in contact
with any other metal.
9-20
In case of emergency
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster bat-
tery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the en-
gine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in
exactly the reverse order.
Engine overheating
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has fully
cooled down. When the engine is hot, the cool-
ant is under pressure. Removing the cap while
the engine is still hot could release a spray of
boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and
stop the vehicle in a safe place.
! If steam is coming from the engine
compartment
Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down.
! If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compart-
ment.
9-21
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not
turning, immediately turn the engine off and contact
your authorized dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped,
turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated
zone, turn the engine off.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the
coolant level in the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the “MIN” mark, add cool-
ant up to the “MAX” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add cool-
ant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap
and fill the radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first
wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn
the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing
down until it stops. Release the pressure from the ra-
diator. After the pressure has been fully released, re-
move the cap by pressing down and turning it.
Towing
Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with
the front wheels raised off the ground while the
rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear
wheels raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will cause the
vehicle to spin away due to the operation or de-
terioration of the center differential.
If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU
UG9013BA
9-22
In case of emergency
dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the
following procedures for safety.
! Towing and tie-down hooks
The towing hooks should be used only in an emergen-
cy (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or
snow).
" Use only the specified towing hooks and tie-
down hooks. Never use suspension parts or
other body parts for towing or tie-down purpos-
es.
" Never use the tie-down hook closest to the
muffler under the vehicle for towing purposes.
" To prevent deformation to the bumper and
the towing hook, do not apply excessive lateral
load to the towing hooks.
Front towing hook (OUTBACK models):
1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver and wheel
nut wrench from the on board tool bucket.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in a vinyl tape or
cloth, insert it into the gap between the cover and the
front bumper, and use it to lever the cover open.
3. Pull the entire fog light cover toward you.
UB9214BA
9-23
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
4. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until the
threads can no longer be seen.
5. Tighten the towing hook securely by a wheel nut
wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle
and stow it in the tool bag.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Front towing hook (except OUTBACK models):
1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver and wheel
nut wrench from the on board tool bag.
UB9215BA
UB9216BA
9-24
In case of emergency
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with cloth or vinyl.
Then, insert the screwdriver into the gap between the
fog light cover and the bumper, and pry out the cover.
3. Pull the entire fog light cover toward you.
4. Likewise, insert the screwdriver still wrapped with
cloth or vinyl into the cutout between the towing hook
cover and the bumper. Pry out the cover.
UB9204BA UB9205BA
9-25
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
5. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until the
threads can no longer be seen.
6. Tighten the towing hook securely by a wheel nut
wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle
and stow it in the tool bag.
Fit the fog light cover and towing hook cover on the
bumper.
" Do not use the towing hook except when tow-
ing your vehicle.
" Be sure to remove the towing hook after tow-
ing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with proper operation of
UB9206BA UB9207BA
9-26
In case of emergency
the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision.
Rear towing hook:
The rear towing hook is located below the center of the
rear bumper.
Never use the rear towing hook to tie the vehi-
cle down.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located between each of
the front tires and the front bumper.
UB9509BA
UB9202BA
9-27
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Rear tie-down hooks:
The rear tie-down hooks are located near each of the
jack-up reinforcements.
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for downward
anchoring. If they are used to anchor the vehi-
cle in any other direction, cables may slip off
the hooks, possibly causing a dangerous situa-
tion.
! Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the
following procedures to ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position for au-
tomatic transmission vehicles or “1st” for manual
transmission vehicles.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with
safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally
tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
UB9514DA
UB9530AA
9-28
In case of emergency
! Towing with all wheels on the ground
" Never turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position while the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the direction of
the wheels will be locked.
" Remember that the brake booster and power
steering do not function when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is turned off, it will
take greater effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
" If transmission failure occurs, transport your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
" Do not run the engine while being towed us-
ing this method. Transmission damage could
result if the vehicle is towed with the engine
running.
" For vehicles with automatic transmission,
the traveling speed must be limited to less than
20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling distance to
less than 31 miles (50 km). For greater speeds
and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels
and add oil to bring it to the upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmis-
sion in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the “ACC” position
while the vehicle is being towed.
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
UB9219BA
9-29
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
unlocked
In the event that you cannot unlock the rear gate by
operating the power door locking switches or the re-
mote keyless entry system, you can unlock it from in-
side the cargo area.
0
1. Remove the access cover at the bottom-center of
the rear gate trim using flat-head screwdriver.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever behind the
rear gate trim panel.
3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the lever inside
the trim downward.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by raising the rear
gate handle.
UB9511BA
UB9512BA
9-30
In case of emergency
Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be
closed
If the moonroof cannot be closed with the moonroof
switch, you can close the moonroof manually.
Sedan:
1. Take out the hex-headed wrench from the glove
compartment and screwdriver from the tool bucket.
2. Remove the spotlight lens by prying the edge of the
lens using flat-head screwdriver.
3. Remove the two screws that retain the moonroof
switch body. Then, remove the moonroof switch.
PASSENGER
UB9200BA
PASSENGER
UB9201BA
9-31
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
4. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.
To lower the moonroof, turn the wrench clockwise.
To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counterclock-
wise.
Have your vehicle checked and repaired by an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer.
Station wagon:
1. Take out the hex-headed wrench from the glove
box and screwdriver from the tool bag.
2. If the sun shade is completely open, slide the sun
shade toward the front of the vehicle by taking the fol-
lowing steps.
1)Push the slider at the rear of the rear moonroof
frame toward the rear of the vehicle.
UB9553BA UB9548BA
9-32
In case of emergency
2)Use a screwdriver or similar implement to sepa-
rate the slider and rod. Slide the sun shade toward
the front of the vehicle.
3. Remove the plug on the roof trim (located to the
rear of the moonroof) by inserting the end of the flad-
bladed screwdriver between the roof and plug and pry-
ing it off.
UB9549BA UB9223BA
9-33
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
4. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.
To close the moonroof, turn the wrench clockwise.
Have your vehicle checked and repaired by an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance tools
! Jack
A jack and other maintenance tools are stored in the
tool bucket in the center of the spare tire located in the
trunk or in the cargo area.
Sedan: To take out the jack and maintenance tools,
open the floor cover and remove the bucket from the
center of the spare tire. Then, take the jack out of the
bucket.
UB9533BA
UB9209BA
9-34
In case of emergency
Station wagon: To take out the jack and maintenance
tools, open the center lid and remove the bucket from
the center of the spare tire. Then, take the jack out of
the bucket.
! Jack handle
The jack handle is stowed on the back of the floor cov-
er of the trunk or on the back of the center lid of the
cargo area.
Sedan: Open the floor cover and remove the jack han-
dle from the back of the floor cover.
UB9208BA
UB9212BA
9-35
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Station wagon: Open the center lid, remove the left
hand part of the lid, and take out the jack handle.
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”.
! Other maintenance tools
In addition to a jack and a jack handle, the tool bucket
on your vehicle contains the following maintenance
tools.
Screwdriver
Towing hook
Wheel nut wrench
Hex-headed wrench (only for vehicles with moon-
roof)
UB9504BA
UB9217BA
9-36
In case of emergency
NOTE
When you first receive your vehicle from your
dealer, the hex-headed wrench is stored in the
glove box. We recommend that you take the
wrench out and store it in the tool bucket after you
have received your vehicle.
UB9218BA
10-1
10
Appearance care
Exterior care .................................................. 10-2
Washing ............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing ....................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels .............................. 10-4
Corrosion protection .................................... 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion ................ 10-4
To help prevent corrosion ............................... 10-5
Cleaning the interior ..................................... 10-6
Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-6
Leather seat materials ...................................... 10-6
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................... 10-6
Climate control panel, audio panel,
instrument panel, console panel, switches,
combination meter, and other plastic
surface ............................................................ 10-7
10-2
Appearance care
Appearan ce care
Exterior care
! Washing
" When washing the vehicle, the brakes may
get wet. As a result, the brake stopping dis-
tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the
vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
" Do not wash the engine compartment and ar-
eas adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air
intake, electrical parts or the power steering flu-
id reservoir, it will cause engine trouble or
faulty power steering respectively.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s beauty is fre-
quent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a
month to avoid contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of luke-
warm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot
water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings
should be washed off by using a light detergent, as re-
quired. If you use a light detergent, make certain that
it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or
chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be
promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to
dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a
chamois or soft cloth.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in an automatic
car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash
is of suitable type. Automatic car wash brushes or
other equipment may damage the rear wiper and
rear/roof spoiler (if equipped).
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road sur-
faces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corro-
sion of underbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the
fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent inter-
vals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components
may accelerate their corrosion.
After driving off-road or muddy or sandy roads, wash
10-3
Appearance care
– CONTINUED –
the mud and sand off the underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they
are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not
use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor har-
nesses, and other parts when washing suspen-
sion components.
! Using a warm water washer
" Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) or more be-
tween the washer nozzle and the vehicle.
" Do not wash the same area continuously.
" If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand.
Some warm water washers are of the high tempera-
ture, high pressure type, and they can damage or de-
form the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause wa-
ter to leak into the vehicle.
! Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and
polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them ac-
cording to the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or pol-
ish when the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as
the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface
leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens
the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended
that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or
whenever the surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the
point where the luster or tone cannot be restored,
lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained com-
pound. Never polish just the affected area, but include
the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only
one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recom-
mended. Never use a coarse-grained compound.
Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size
number and could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original
luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an in-
correct polishing technique will result in removing the
paint layer and exposing the undercoat. When in
doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU deal-
er or an auto paint specialist.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield washer noz-
zles with wax when waxing the vehicle.
10-4
Appearance care
! Cleaning aluminum wheels
" Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any
kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may
be difficult to clean off.
" Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels.
Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse
thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing
device.
" Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels)
with water as soon as possible when it has been
splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist
corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes
have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help
maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable oper-
ation.
! Most common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and de-
bris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings
caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals,
or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the
air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially
when temperatures range just above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains
for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle
may be dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of
the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of
10-5
Appearance care
– CONTINUED –
proper ventilation.
! To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the
body and suspension components. Also, wash the ve-
hicle promptly after driving on any of the following sur-
faces:
" roads that have been salted to prevent them from
freezing in winter
" mud, sand, or gravel
" coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the
underbody be given a very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of
underbody components, such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steer-
ing system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are
found to be rusted, they should be given an appropri-
ate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced.
Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of
maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you
find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt ac-
cumulation under the floor mats because that could
cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats
to make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a
damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, cor-
rosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage
when wet or covered with snow, that can cause damp-
ness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in ar-
eas where road salts and other corrosive materials are
used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and
hood latch should be inspected and lubricated period-
ically.
10-6
Appearance care
Cleaning the interior
Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust and dirt.
Wipe the vinyl areas with a clean, damp cloth.
! Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum
cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to re-
move with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft blush then
vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and
dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty,
wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water
then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-
available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden
place and make sure it does not affect the fabric ad-
versely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
! Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural
product which will retain its distinctive appearance and
feel for many years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can
cause the material to become brittle and to wear pre-
maturely. Regular cleaning with a soft, moist, natural
fiber cloth should be performed monthly, taking care
not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the
stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics
may be used to remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with
a soft, dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If your
SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sun-
light, it is recommended that the seats and headrests
be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treat-
ed with a commercial leather spray lacquer. You will
discover that each leather seat section will develop
soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of genu-
ine leather.
! Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU
may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and wa-
ter, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt.
Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type
cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may
be used when necessary.
10-7
Appearance care
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint
thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never
be used on leather or synthetic interior materials.
! Climate control panel, audio panel, in-
strument panel, console panel, switch-
es, combination meter, and other plas-
tic surface
Gently wipe away contamination using a clean, soft
cloth moistened with cold or lukewarm water.
NOTE
Do not use organic solvents such as paint thin-
ners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that
contain those solvents.
11-1
11
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ................................. 11-3
Maintenance precautions ............................ 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment .................................................. 11-4
When you do checking or servicing in the
engine compartment while the engine is
running ............................................................ 11-5
Engine hood .................................................. 11-5
Engine compartment overview ................... 11-8
2.5-liter non-turbo models ................................ 11-8
2.5-liter non-turbo California-spec. models .... 11-9
2.5-liter turbo models ....................................... 11-10
3.0-liter models .................................................. 11-11
Engine oil ...................................................... 11-12
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-12
Changing the oil and oil filter .......................... 11-13
Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-16
Recommended grade and viscosity under
severe driving conditions .............................. 11-17
Cooling system ............................................. 11-18
Hose and connections ...................................... 11-19
Engine coolant .................................................. 11-19
Air cleaner element ...................................... 11-24
Replacing the air cleaner element ................... 11-24
Spark plugs ................................................... 11-29
Recommended spark plugs ............................. 11-29
Drive belts ..................................................... 11-30
2.5-liter models .................................................. 11-30
3.0-liter models .................................................. 11-30
Manual transmission oil ............................... 11-31
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-31
Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-32
Automatic transmission fluid ...................... 11-33
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-33
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-35
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ...... 11-35
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-35
Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-36
Rear differential gear oil ............................... 11-37
Checking the gear oil level .............................. 11-37
Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-40
Power steering fluid ...................................... 11-41
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-41
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-42
Brake fluid ..................................................... 11-42
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-42
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-43
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................ 11-43
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-43
Recommended clutch fluid .............................. 11-44
Brake booster ................................................ 11-44
Brake pedal .................................................... 11-45
Checking the brake pedal free play ................ 11-45
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ... 11-45
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission
vehicles) ..................................................... 11-46
Checking the clutch function .......................... 11-46
Checking the clutch pedal free play ............... 11-46
Replacement of brake pad and lining ......... 11-47
11-2
Maintenance and service
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ... 11-47
Parking brake stroke .................................... 11-48
Tires and wheels .......................................... 11-49
Types of tires .................................................... 11-49
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) ................................................... 11-49
Tire inspection .................................................. 11-51
Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-52
Wheel balance ................................................... 11-54
Wear indicators ................................................. 11-55
Tire rotation ....................................................... 11-55
Tire replacement ............................................... 11-56
Wheel replacement ........................................... 11-57
Aluminum wheels ......................................... 11-57
Windshield washer fluid .............................. 11-58
Replacement of wiper blades ...................... 11-60
Windshield wiper blades assembly ................ 11-60
Windshield wiper blade rubber ....................... 11-61
Rear window wiper blade assembly ............... 11-63
Rear window wiper blade rubber .................... 11-64
Battery ........................................................... 11-67
Fuses ............................................................. 11-68
Main fuse ....................................................... 11-71
Installation of accessories .......................... 11-72
Replacing bulbs ............................................ 11-73
Headlight ........................................................... 11-74
Parking light ...................................................... 11-76
Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-76
Front fog light (if equipped) ............................. 11-76
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-76
Backup light (Station wagon) .......................... 11-79
License plate light ............................................ 11-80
Dome light ......................................................... 11-82
Map light ............................................................ 11-83
Door step light .................................................. 11-84
Cargo area light ................................................ 11-85
Trunk light ......................................................... 11-86
High mount stop light ...................................... 11-86
11-3
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance a nd service
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items required to be ser-
viced at regular intervals are shown in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is rec-
ommended that all work be done by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself,
you should familiarize yourself with the information
provided in this section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper
or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by
improper maintenance and service performed by you
are not eligible for warranty coverage.
" Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must
NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy-
namometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to
do so will result in transmission damage and in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause
an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
" Always select a safe area when performing
maintenance on your vehicle.
" Always be very careful to avoid injury when
working on the vehicle. Remember that some of
11-4
Maintenance and service
the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if
improperly used or handled, for example, bat-
tery acid.
" Your vehicle should only be serviced by per-
sons fully competent to do so. Serious person-
al injury may result to persons not experienced
in servicing vehicles.
" Always use the proper tools and make certain
that they are well maintained.
" Never get under the vehicle supported only
by a jack. Always use a safety stands to sup-
port the vehicle.
" Never keep the engine running in a poorly
ventilated area, such as a garage or other
closed areas.
" Do not smoke or allow open flames around
the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.
" Because the fuel system is under pressure,
replacement of the fuel filter should be per-
formed only by your SUBARU dealer.
" Wear adequate eye protection to guard
against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If
something does get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
" Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS air-
bag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or
attempt to take its connectors apart, as that
may activate the system or it can render it inop-
erative. The wiring and connectors of these
systems are yellow for easy identification. NEV-
ER use a circuit tester for these wiring.
If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner
needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Before checking or servicing in the en-
gine compartment
" Always stop the engine and set the parking
brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing.
" Always let the engine cool down. Engine
parts become very hot when the engine is run-
ning and remain hot for some time after the en-
gine is stopped.
" Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake
fluid or any other fluid on hot engine compo-
nents. This may cause a fire.
" Always remove the key from the ignition
switch. When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly
11-5
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
even when the engine is stopped.
! When you do checking or servicing in
the engine compartment while the en-
gine is running
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your
fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and any other mov-
ing engine parts. Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
Engine hood
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, re-
turn them to their original positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument
panel.
UBB212BA
11-6
Maintenance and service
3. Release the secondary hood release located under
the front grille by moving the lever toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its re-
tainer and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop
from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its re-
tainer.
2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 12 in (30
cm) from the closed position and let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely
locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly
higher position. Do not push the hood forcibly to close
UBB503BA UBB504BA
11-7
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
it. It could deform the metal.
Always check that the hood is properly locked
before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly
open while the vehicle is moving and block
your view, which may cause an accident and
serious bodily injury.
11-8
Maintenance and service
Engine compartment overview
! 2.5-liter non-turbo models
12 3456
7891011
13
12
UBB207BB
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-41)
2) Manual transmission oil level
gauge (MT) (page 11-31) or Dif-
ferential gear oil level gauge
(AT) (page 11-35)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-
43)
4) Automatic transmission fluid lev-
el gauge (page 11-33)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-
42)
6) Fuse box (page 11-68)
7) Battery (page 11-67)
8) Windshield washer tank (page
11-58)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-12)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page
11-19)
11) Radiator cap (page 11-19)
12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-
12)
13) Air cleaner element (page 11-
24)
11-9
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
! 2.5-liter non-turbo California-spec. models
123456
789101113 12
UBB202BB
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-41)
2) Manual transmission oil level
gauge (MT) (page 11-31) or Dif-
ferential gear oil level gauge
(AT) (page 11-35)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-
43)
4) Automatic transmission fluid lev-
el gauge (page 11-33)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-
42)
6) Fuse box (page 11-68)
7) Battery (page 11-67)
8) Windshield washer tank (page
11-58)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-12)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page
11-19)
11) Radiator cap (page 11-19)
12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-
12)
13) Air cleaner element (page 11-
24)
11-10
Maintenance and service
! 2.5-liter turbo models
12 4635
13 12 11 10 9 8 7
UBB203BB
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-41)
2) Manual transmission oil level
gauge (MT) (page 11-31) or Dif-
ferential gear oil level gauge
(AT) (page 11-35)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-
43)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-
42)
5) Automatic transmission fluid lev-
el gauge (page 11-33)
6) Fuse box (page 11-68)
7) Battery (page 11-67)
8) Windshield washer tank (page
11-58)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-12)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page
11-19)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-
12)
12) Radiator cap (page 11-19)
13) Air cleaner element (page 11-
24)
11-11
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
! 3.0-liter models
12 345
12 1011 9 8
76
UBB564BB
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-41)
2) Differential gear oil level gauge
(AT) (page 11-35)
3) Automatic transmission fluid lev-
el gauge (page 11-33)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-
42)
5) Fuse box (page 11-68)
6) Battery (page 11-67)
7) Windshield washer tank (page
11-58)
8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-12)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page
11-19)
10) Radiator cap (page 11-19)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-
12)
12) Air cleaner element (page 11-
24)
11-12
Maintenance and service
Engine oil
! Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it
again.
3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it
stops with the graphic symbol “ ” on its top ap-
pearing as shown in the illustration.
2.5-liter models
A) Notch
B) Upper level
C) Lower level
UBB505BA
A
B
C
UGB081BC
11-13
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
3.0-liter models
A) Upper level
B) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on
it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level
up to the upper level.
" Use only engine oil with the recommended
grade and viscosity.
" Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding
it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause
a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine,
wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan before checking the level.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any
additional oil above the upper level when the engine is
cold.
In 2.5-liter-engine models, the dipstick has a notch
above the upper level.
Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the en-
gine oil level reading may be in a range between the
upper level and the notch mark. This is caused by ther-
mal expansion of the engine oil.
! Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to the mainte-
nance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more fre-
quently than listed in the maintenance schedule when
driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently
made, or when driving in extremely cold whether.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for
about 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil.
A
B
UBB576BB
11-14
Maintenance and service
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
2.5-liter turbo models
Other models
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug
while the engine is still warm. The used oil should be
drained into an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine
oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a
clean cloth and tighten it securely with a new sealing
UBB200BA
UBB200CA
11-15
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
washer after the oil has completely drained out.
6. Remove the under cover.
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of
engine oil to the seal.
9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the bottom of
engine and install the oil filter by hand turning. Be
careful not to twist or damage the seal.
10.Tighten the oil filter by the amount indicated in the
following table after the seal makes contact with the
bottom of engine.
Never over tighten the oil filter because that can
result in an oil leak.
11.Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.
12.Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
Oil capacity (Guideline):
2.5-liter models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.0-liter models: 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)
The oil quantity indicated above is only a guideline.
The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity
of oil that has been drained. The quantity of drained oil
differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil
and the time the oil is left flowing out. After refilling the
engine with oil, therefore, you must use the dipstick to
confirm that the level is correct.
13.Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks ap-
pear around the filter’s rubber seal and drain plug.
14.Run the engine until it reaches the normal operat-
ing temperature. Then stop the engine and wait a few
minutes to allow the oil drain back. Check the oil level
again and if necessary, add more engine oil.
Model Oil filter color Part number Amount of
rotation
2.5-liter
non-turbo
models
Black 15208AA080 1 rotation
White 15208AA060
15208AA09A
2/3 – 3/4
rotation
2.5-liter
turbo models
Black 15208AA080 1 rotation
White 15208AA09A 2/3 – 3/4
rotation
3.0-liter
models
Black 15208AA031 3/4 rotation
11-16
Maintenance and service
! Recommended grade and viscosity
Use only engine oil with the recommended
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC GF-3, which can be identified with the new
API certification mark (Starburst mark)
or API classification SL with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING” (if you cannot obtain the oil with
SL grade, you may use SJ grade “ENERGY CON-
SERVING” oil).
These recommended oil grades can be identified by
looking for either or both of the following marks dis-
played on the oil container.
New API Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)
A
M
E
R
I
C
A
N
P
E
T
R
O
L
E
U
M
I
N
S
T
I
T
U
T
E
C
E
R
T
I
F
I
E
D
HSB023AA
11-17
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
API Service label
A) Indicates the oil quality by API designations
B) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade
C) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving capabilities
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and vis-
cosity, as well as one that will add to fuel economy.
The following table lists the recommended viscosities
and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be used togeth-
er as long as they are the same API classification and
SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.
SAE viscosity number and applicable temperature
*: 5W-30 is preferred.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy.
Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy.
However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is re-
quired to properly lubricate the engine.
! Recommended grade and viscosity
under severe driving conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very
high temperatures, or used for heavy-duty applica-
tions such as towing a trailer, use of oil with the follow-
ing grade and viscosities is recommended.
A
P
I
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
S
L
E
N
E
R
G
Y
C
O
N
S
E
R
V
I
N
G
SAE
5W-30
A
B
C
HSB022BC
5W-30*
10W-30, 10W-40
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20
06020 80 10040
HSB024BA
11-18
Maintenance and service
API classification SL (or SJ):
SAE viscosity No.:
30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
Cooling system
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has cooled
down completely. Since the coolant is under
pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re-
moved.
" The cooling system has been filled at the fac-
tory with a high quality, corrosion-inhibiting,
year-around coolant which provides protection
against freezing down to –33°F (–36°C). For
adding, use genuine SUBARU coolant or an
equivalent: a mixture of 50% soft water and 50%
ethylene-glycol basis coolant. Use of improper
coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling
system. It is important to maintain protection
against freezing and corrosion, even if freezing
temperatures are not expected. Never mix dif-
ferent kinds of coolant.
" Do not splash the engine coolant over paint-
11-19
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine
coolant may damage the paint surface.
! Hose and connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is
thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine
coolant reaches a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when
the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the
normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system
checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may
be a leak in the engine cooling system. It is recom-
mended that the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
! Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reser-
voir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the “LOW” level
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” level mark. If the
reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and re-
fill as required.
FULL
LOW
UBB508BB
11-20
Maintenance and service
A) Rubber gaskets
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, re-
install the caps and check that the rubber gaskets in-
side the radiator cap are in the proper position.
" Be careful not to spill engine coolant when
adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it
may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
" Do not splash the engine coolant over paint-
ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine
coolant may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
Always add genuine Subaru cooling system condition-
er whenever the coolant is replaced.
Change the engine coolant and add genuine Subaru
cooling system conditioner using the following proce-
dures according to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
1. Remove the under cover.
A) Drain plug
2. Place a proper container under the drain plug and
A
HSB026BC
A
UBB509CB
11-21
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
loosen the drain plug.
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from
the radiator. Then drain the coolant from the reserve
tank. Tighten the drain plug securely.
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has cooled
down completely. Since the coolant is under
pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re-
moved.
4. Install the under cover.
Non-turbo models
A) Fill up to here
A
UBB510BB
11-22
Maintenance and service
Turbo models
A) Fill up to here
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to just below the
filler neck, allowing enough room to add genuine Sub-
aru cooling system conditioner in the radiator. Add
genuine Subaru cooling system conditioner until the
coolant level reaches the filler neck. Do not pour the
coolant too quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air
bleeding and trapped air in the system.
Coolant capacity (Guideline):
2.5-liter non-turbo models:
MT. 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)
AT. 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo models:
MT. 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
AT. 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
3.0-liter models:
7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
" Be careful not to spill engine coolant when
adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it
may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
" Do not splash the engine coolant over paint-
ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine
coolant may damage the paint surface.
A
UBB511BB
11-23
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tank’s
“FULL” level mark.
A) Rubber gaskets
7. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At
this time, make sure that the rubber gasket in the radi-
ator cap is correctly in place.
8. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes
at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.
9. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools
down (122 to 140°F [50 to 60°C]). If there is any loss
of coolant, add coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and
to the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.
10.Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and
tighten firmly.
FULL
LOW
UBB508BB
A
HSB026BC
11-24
Maintenance and service
Air cleaner element
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner
element removed. The air cleaner element not
only filters intake air but also stops flames if the
engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is
not installed when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen.
When the element is perforated or removed, engine
wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is unnecessary
to clean or wash the element.
! Replacing the air cleaner element
Replace the air cleaner element according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”. Under extremely dusty conditions, re-
place it more frequently. It is recommended that you
always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! Non-turbo models
0
A) Connector
B) Duct
C) Clamp
1. Unplug the connector that is attached to the top of
the air cleaner case.
2. Remove the hose that is located at the bottom of
the side surface of the air cleaner case.
3. Undo the screw and pull the air duct out of the air
cleaner case.
4. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner
case cover.
A
C
B
UBB512CB
11-25
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
5. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air
cleaner element.
6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case
with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner ele-
ment.
7. To install the air cleaner case cover, insert the
three projections on the air cleaner case cover into the
slits on the air cleaner case and then snap the two
clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
UBB513BA UBB514BA
11-26
Maintenance and service
! Turbo models
0
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the air intake
duct, then remove the air intake duct.
2. Unplug the connector that is attached to the top of
the air cleaner case.
UBB586BA
UBB587CA
11-27
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
3. Use a screwdriver to remove the duct that is con-
nected to the air cleaner case cover.
4. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner
case cover.
At the same time, pull the hose from the clamp that
runs next to the case cover.
UBB204BA
UBB205BA
11-28
Maintenance and service
5. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air
cleaner element.
6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case
with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner ele-
ment.
7. To install the air cleaner case cover, insert the
three projections on the air cleaner case cover into the
slits on the air cleaner case and then snap the two
clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
UBB513BA UBB514BA
11-29
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Spark plugs
" When disconnecting the spark plug cables,
always grasp the spark plug cap, not the ca-
bles.
" Make sure the cables are replaced in the cor-
rect order.
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is rec-
ommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by
your SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”.
! Recommended spark plugs
2.5-liter non-turbo models:
FR5AP-11 (NGK)
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models:
ILFR6B (NGK)
HSB032BA
11-30
Maintenance and service
Drive belts
The alternator, power steering pump, and air condi-
tioner compressor depend on drive belts. Satisfactory
performance requires that belt tension be correct.
! 2.5-liter models
A) Power steering pump pulley
B) Air conditioner compressor pulley
C) Crank pulley
in (mm)
To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler)
across two adjacent pulleys and apply a force of 22 lbs
(98 N, 10 kg) midway between the pulleys by using a
spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount
specified.
! 3.0-liter models
It is unnecessary to check belt tension periodically be-
cause your engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of the belt
should be done according to the maintenance sched-
ule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact your SUB-
ARU dealer.
B
C
a
b
A
HSB033BC
Deflection
New belt Used belt
a 0.28 – 0.35 (7.0 – 9.0) 0.35 – 0.43 (9.0 – 11.0)
b 0.30 – 0.33 (7.5 – 8.5) 0.35 – 0.40 (9.0 – 10.0)
11-31
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Manual transmission oil
! Checking the oil level
Non-turbo models
A) Yellow handle
Turbo models
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it
again.
A
UBB515EB
UBB516BA
11-32
Maintenance and service
A) Upper level
B) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on
it. If it is below the lower level, add oil through the dip-
stick hole to bring the level up to the upper level.
! Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-
tives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
L
F
FL
A
B
A
B
USB526BC
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
11-33
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Automatic transmission fluid
! Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as
its temperature rises; the fluid level differs according to
fluid temperature. Therefore, there are two different
scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid
on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked without warm-
ing up the fluid on the “COLD” range, we recommend
checking the fluid level when the fluid is at operating
temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temper-
ature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating
temperature; 158 to 176°F (70 to 80°C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park-
ing brake.
3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then
shift it in the “P” position, and run the engine at idling
speed.
4 speed automatic transmission
A) Yellow handle
A
UBB515GB
11-34
Maintenance and service
5 speed automatic transmission
A) Yellow handle
A) HOT range
B) COLD range
C) Upper level
D) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the
gauge. If it is below the lower level on the “HOT”
range, add the recommended automatic transmission
fluid up to the upper level.
! Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked without time to
warm up the automatic transmission, check to see that
the fluid level is between the lower level and upper lev-
el on the “COLD” range. If it is below that range, add
A
UBB516DB
LF
LF
C
D
C
D
B
A
HGB061BC
11-35
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.
! Recommended fluid
Use one of the following types of automatic transmis-
sion fluid.
Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmission Fluid
IDEMITSU ATF HP
Castrol Transmax J
Pennzoil ATF-J*
* Available only in the USA (except Alaska and Ha-
waii)
NOTE
" Using any non-specified type of automatic
transmission fluid could result in damage inside
the transmission. When replacing the automatic
transmission fluid, be sure to use the kind speci-
fied above.
" If your vehicle has a four-speed automatic trans-
mission, you can use “Dexron III” Type Automatic
Transmission Fluid in addition to the recommend-
ed fluid types listed above.
Front differential gear oil (AT vehi-
cles)
! Checking the oil level
A) Yellow handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it
again.
A
UBB515FB
11-36
Maintenance and service
A) Upper level
B) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on
it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level
up to the upper level.
! Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-
tives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
L
F
A
B
HSB040BC
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
11-37
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Rear differential gear oil
! Checking the gear oil level
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there
may be an oil leak. If you suspect a problem,
have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU deal-
er.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential
protector. The differential protector provides protec-
tion to the rear differential assembly during off-road
use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not re-
quired when checking the oil level.
2.5i (AT)
A) Filler plug
B) Drain plug
A
B
USB531BB
11-38
Maintenance and service
2.5i (AT)
A) Filler hole
B) Drain hole
C) Oil level
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models (AT)
A) Filler plug
B) Drain plug
A
B
C
USB532BB
A
B
UBB517BB
11-39
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models (AT)
A) Filler hole
B) Drain hole
C) Oil level
Others
A) Filler plug
B) Drain plug
A
B
C
UBB518CB
B
A
HSB042BC
11-40
Maintenance and service
Others
A) Filler hole
B) Drain hole
C) Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil
level. The oil level should be kept even with the bottom
of the filler hole. If the oil level is below the bottom
edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise
the level.
! Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-
tives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
C
A
B
HSB043BC
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
11-41
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Power steering fluid
! Checking the fluid level
Be careful not to burn yourself because the flu-
id may be hot.
" When power steering fluid is being added,
use only clean fluid, and be careful not to allow
any dirt into the tank. And never use different
brands together.
" Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.
The power steering fluid expands greatly as its tem-
perature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid
temperature. Therefore, the reservoir tank has two dif-
ferent checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the en-
gine.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run:
Check that the oil level is between “HOT MIN” and
“HOT MAX” on the surface of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run: Check
that the oil level is between “COLD MIN” and “COLD
MAX” on the surface of the reservoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the applicable “MIN”
line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring
the level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible
leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
HOT MAX
COLD MAX
HOT MIN
COLD MIN
UBB519BB
11-42
Maintenance and service
! Recommended fluid
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake fluid
! Checking the fluid level
" Never let brake fluid contact your eyes be-
cause brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes.
If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately
flush them thoroughly with clean water. For
safety, when performing this work, wearing eye
protection is advisable.
" Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air.
Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous
loss of braking performance.
" If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there
may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have
the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
" Never use different brands of brake fluid to-
gether.
" When adding brake fluid, be careful not to al-
low any dirt into the reservoir.
" Never splash the brake fluid over painted sur-
11-43
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
faces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the
brake fluid may damage them.
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If
the level is below “MIN”, add the recommended brake
fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.
! Recommended brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)
! Checking the fluid level
Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes be-
cause clutch fluid can be harmful to your eyes.
If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immediately
flush them thoroughly with clean water. For
safety, when performing this work, wearing eye
protection is advisable.
" Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air.
Any absorbed moisture can cause improper
clutch operation.
" If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there
may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have
the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
" Never use different brands of clutch fluid to-
gether.
" When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to
allow any dirt into the tank.
UBB565BA
11-44
Maintenance and service
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If
the level is below “MIN” level mark, add the recom-
mended clutch fluid to “MAX” level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.
! Recommended clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as described be-
low, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal sever-
al times, applying the same pedal force each time. The
distance the pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine.
The pedal should move slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine
and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. The
pedal height should not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute
then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times
to check the brake booster. Brake booster operates
properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each de-
pression.
UBB566BA
11-45
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance
according to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
! Checking the brake pedal free play
A) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal
several times. Lightly pull the brake pedal up with one
finger to check the free play with a force of less than 2
lbs (10 N, 1 kg).
If the free play is not within proper specification, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
! Checking the brake pedal reserve dis-
tance
A) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lbs
(294 N, 30 kg) and measure the distance between the
upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than the specifica-
tion, or when the pedal does not operate smoothly,
contact with your SUBARU dealer.
A
HSB049BC
A
HSB050BC
11-46
Maintenance and service
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission
vehicles)
Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance
according to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
! Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there are no ab-
normal noises when the clutch pedal is depressed,
and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to
check that the engine and transmission smoothly cou-
ple without any sign of slippage.
! Checking the clutch pedal free play
A) 0.16 – 0.51 in (4.0 – 13.0 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger
until you feel resistance, and check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper specification, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
A
HSB049BC
11-47
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of brake pad and lining
If you continue to drive despite the scraping
noise from the audible brake pad wear indica-
tor, it will result in the need for costly brake ro-
tor repair or replacement.
The right front disc brake and the right rear disc brake
have an audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If
the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise
when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the
brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
! Breaking-in of new brake pads and lin-
ings
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only gen-
uine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts
must be broken in as follows:
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65
km/h), step on the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five
or more times.
! Parking brake lining
A safe location and situation should be select-
ed for break-in driving.
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully
HS7012BA
11-48
Maintenance and service
may cause the rear wheels to lock. To avoid
this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly and
gently.
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35
km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button pushed in,
pull the parking brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY.
(Pulling with a force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15
kg].)
3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters)
in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool
down. Repeat this procedure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking
brake stroke is out of the specified range, adjust it by
turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake
lever.
Parking brake stroke:
5 – 6 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”. When the parking brake is properly adjusted,
braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up
five to six notches gently but firmly (about 44 lbs, 196
N, 20 kg). If the parking brake lever stroke is not within
the specified range, have the brake system checked
and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
UBB568BA
11-49
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Tires and wheels
! Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires present on
your vehicle.
! All season tires
The factory-installed tires on your new vehicle are all
season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide an adequate
measure of traction, handling and braking perfor-
mance in year-round driving including snowy and icy
road conditions. However all season tires do not offer
as much traction performance as winter (snow) tires in
heavy or loose snow or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL SEASON” and/
or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suit-
ed for highway driving under dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery
roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads,
we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four
tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-cov-
ered and icy roads. However winter tires do not per-
form as well as summer tires and all season tires on
roads other than snow-covered and icy roads.
! Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driv-
er with a warning message indicating by sending a sig-
nal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when
tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure moni-
toring system will activate only when the vehicle is
driven. Also, this system may not react immediately to
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-
out caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm garage and
will then drive the vehicle in cold outside air, the result-
ing drop in tire pressures may cause the low tire pres-
sure warning light to come on. To avoid this problem
when adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage,
inflate the tires to pressures higher than those shown
on the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an ex-
tra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for every difference of
10°F (5.6°C) between the temperature in the garage
and the temperature outside. By way of example, the
11-50
Maintenance and service
following table shows the required tire pressures that
correspond to various outside temperatures when the
temperature in the garage is 60°F (15.6°C).
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on when
you drive the vehicle in cold outside air after adjusting
the tire pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tire
pressures using the method described above. Then,
increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/
h) and check to see that the low tire pressure warning
light goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire pres-
sure warning light does not go off, the tire pressure
monitoring system may not be functioning normally. In
this event, go to a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction between tires and
the road surface causes the tires to warm up. After il-
lumination of the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by an increase in
the outside air temperature or by an increase in the
temperature in the tires can cause the low tire pres-
sure warning light to go off.
System resetting is necessary when the wheels are
changed (for example, a switch to snow tires) and new
TPMS valves are installed on the newly fitted wheels.
Have this work performed by a SUBARU dealer fol-
lowing wheel replacement.
It may not be possible to install TPMS valves on cer-
tain wheels that are on the market. Therefore, if you
change the wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part number as
the standard-equipment wheels. Without four opera-
tional TPMS valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light in the instru-
ment panel will flash.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are necessary to
ensure continued normal operation of the tire pressure
monitoring system. As with wheel replacement, there-
Outside temperature Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
front rear
30°F (–1°C) 35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)
10°F (–12°C) 37 (255, 2.55) 35 (245, 2.45)
–10°F (–23°C) 39 (270, 2.7) 37 (260, 2.6)
11-51
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
fore, you should have the work performed by a SUBA-
RU dealer.
If the low tire pressure warning light does not
come on briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light is flashing, you should
have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light comes on while driving, never brake
suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off
the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident
involving serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still comes on while driving after ad-
justing the tire pressure, a tire may have signif-
icant damage and a fast leak that causes the
tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is
replaced without the original pressure sensor/
transmitter being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash. This indicates the
TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble for tire and sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting. If the light flashes, promptly con-
tact a SUBARU dealer to have the system in-
spected.
! Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from se-
rious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find
any problem.
NOTE
" When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are
subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle
is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer dam-
age that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This
type of damage does not become evident until
time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, pot-
holes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is un-
avoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed down to a
walking pace or less, and approach the curbs as
squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you park the
vehicle.
" If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find
11-52
Maintenance and service
it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one
of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive
slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer
and have the vehicle inspected.
! Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maxi-
mize the tires’ service lives and is essential for good
running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least
once a month (for example, during a fuel stop) and be-
fore any long journey.
Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use
a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the
values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is lo-
cated on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and
increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures
are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehi-
cle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands,
causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to
mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
" The air pressure in a tire increases by approxi-
mately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
) when the tire
becomes warm.
" The tires are considered cold when the vehicle
has been parked for at least three hours or has
been driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pres-
sure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.
UB8201BA
11-53
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and
ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnor-
mally.
" Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Roll-
ing resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also low-
er.
" Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at
shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also
higher.
HSB052AA
HSB053AA
11-54
Maintenance and service
" Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in cen-
ter)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the ef-
fects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly result-
ing in vehicle damage.
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire
pressures can cause the tires to deform severe-
ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase
in temperature could cause tread separation,
and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss
of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
! Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle
was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as
the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance
causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain
vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle’s
straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and
suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear.
If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly bal-
anced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUB-
ARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
NOTE
Loss of correct wheel alignment* causes the tires
to wear on one side and reduces the vehicle’s run-
ning stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you
notice abnormal tire wear.
*: The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at
a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering perfor-
mance.
HSB054AA
11-55
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
! Wear indicators
A) New tread
B) Worn tread
C) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which
becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves
decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be re-
placed when the tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes vis-
ible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately. With a tire
in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet
weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to
an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and re-
place the tires before their tread wear indicators
become visible.
! Tire rotation
A
C
B
HSB055BC
HSB056BA
11-56
Maintenance and service
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the
life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniform-
ly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles
(12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the
front and rear tires on the right hand side of the vehicle
and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the
left hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on
its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the
time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km),
check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that
has become loose.
! Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and integral parts
of your vehicle’s design; they cannot be changed arbi-
trarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are opti-
mally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and
were selected to give the best possible combination of
running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It
is essential for every tire to have a size and construc-
tion matching those shown on the tire placard and to
have a speed symbol and load index matching those
shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from con-
trollability, ride comfort, braking performance, speed-
ometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also cre-
ates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropri-
ately changes the vehicle’s ground clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufactur-
er, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You
are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends re-
placing all four tires at the same time.
" All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construc-
tion, degree of wear, speed symbol, load index
and size. Mixing tires of different types, sizes or
degrees of wear can result in damage to the ve-
hicle’s power train. Use of different types or siz-
es of tires can also dangerously reduce control-
lability and braking performance and can lead
to an accident.
" Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires
together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply
11-57
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce control-
lability, resulting in an accident.
! Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage,
make sure the replacement wheels match the specifi-
cations of the wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available from SUBA-
RU dealers.
Use only those wheels that are specified for
your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifica-
tions could interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub against the
wheel well housing during turns. The resulting
loss of vehicle control could lead to an acci-
dent.
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged
easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appear-
ance, performance, and safety.
" When any of the wheels is removed and replaced
for tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the
tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to
the specified torque.
" Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or
tapered surface of the wheel.
" Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or
curbs.
" Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely
around the tire, otherwise the chains may scratch the
wheel.
" When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center
cap is replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine
SUBARU parts designed for aluminum wheels.
11-58
Maintenance and service
Windshield washer fluid
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid be-
cause it could cause paint damage.
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield but the sup-
ply of washer fluid appears to diminish, check the level
of washer fluid in the tank.
Washer fluid level gauge
UBB515HA
Hi
Low
UBB557BB
11-59
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then check the fluid
level indicated by the level gauge (attached to the in-
side of the cap). If the level is near the “Low” mark, add
fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the level gauge or
the “Full” mark on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid
is unavailable use clean water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-
freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Wind-
shield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol
and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper-
ature varies according to how much it is diluted, as in-
dicated in the following table.
UBB522CA
Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature
30% 10.4°F (–12°C)
50% –4°F (–20°C)
100% –49°F (–45°C)
11-60
Maintenance and service
Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on the wind-
shield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper opera-
tion and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove
the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of
the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wind-
shield and wiper blades with clean water. The wind-
shield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the
windshield with water.
" Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline
or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene.
This will cause deterioration of the wiper
blades.
" When you wish to raise the passenger-side
wiper arm, first raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side wiper assembly
and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in scratches.
" Return the passenger-side wiper arm to its
original position before returning the driver-
side wiper arm to its original position. Other-
wise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and
driver-side wiper assembly will touch each oth-
er, possibly resulting in scratches.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after follow-
ing this method, replace the wiper blades using the fol-
lowing procedures:
! Windshield wiper blades assembly
1. Raise the windshield wiper arm on the driver’s side.
2. Next, raise the windshield wiper arm on the pas-
senger’s side.
11-61
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
A) Stopper
3. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its
pivot area and pushing it in the direction shown by the
arrow while depressing the wiper blade stopper.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm.
Make sure that it locks in place.
5. Lower the windshield wiper arm on the passenger’s
side slowly while supporting it by hand.
6. Next, lower the windshield wiper arm on the driver’s
side slowly while supporting it by hand.
! Windshield wiper blade rubber
A) Metal support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly
and pull it firmly until the stoppers on the rubber are
free of the metal support.
A
HSB058CC
A
HSB059BC
11-62
Maintenance and service
A) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two
metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old
blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the metal support with the
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade rubber as-
sembly into the metal support until it locks.
A
HSB060BC HSB061BA
11-63
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
A) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal
support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown.
If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper blade
may scratch the windshield.
! Rear window wiper blade assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.
A
HSB062BC
UBB554BA
11-64
Maintenance and service
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to re-
move it from the wiper arm.
! Rear window wiper blade rubber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly to un-
lock it from the plastic support.
UBB555BA
UBB523BA
11-65
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic
support.
A) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two
metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old
blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.
USB586BA
A
USB583BC
11-66
Maintenance and service
4. Align the claws of the plastic support with the
grooves in the blade rubber assembly, then slide the
blade rubber assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stop-
pers on the plastic support ends. If the rubber is not re-
tained properly, the wiper may scratch the rear win-
dow glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm.
Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in
position.
USB586CA USB584BA
11-67
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Battery
" Before beginning work on or near any bat-
tery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, match-
es, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off
a gas which is highly flammable and explosive.
" For safety, in case an explosion does occur,
wear eye protection or shield your eyes when
working near any battery. Never lean over a bat-
tery.
" Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin,
fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a cor-
rosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or
in your eyes, immediately flush the area with
water thoroughly. Seek medical help immedi-
ately if acid has entered the eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme-
diately drink a large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention immediately.
" To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings,
metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry.
Never allow metal tools to contact the positive
battery terminal and anything connected to it
WHILE you are at the same time in contact with
any other metallic portion of the vehicle be-
cause a short circuit will result.
" Keep everyone including children away from
the battery.
" Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
" Battery posts terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to case
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands af-
ter handling.
Never use more than 10 amperes when charg-
ing the battery because it will shorten battery
life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid
level or periodically refill with distilled water.
11-68
Maintenance and service
Fuses
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher
rating or with material other than a fuse be-
cause serious damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to
prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical
equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel behind the
fuse box cover on the driver’s seat side.
Open the lid that is located above the hood release
knob and pull it toward you to remove it.
UBB569BA
UBB584BA
11-69
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
The other one is housed in the engine compartment. The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover
in the engine compartment.
UBB527BA UBB528BA
11-70
Maintenance and service
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse box in the en-
gine compartment.
A) Good
B) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do
not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse
has blown, replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and
turn off all electrical accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
(For behind the coin tray: open the coin tray and pull it
horizontally to remove it.)
3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side
of each fuse box cover and the “Fuses and circuits”
section in chapter 12 in this manual show the circuit for
UB9569BA
AB
HSB067BB
11-71
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
each fuse.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a
spare fuse of the same rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its
system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for repairs.
Main fuse
Main fuse box
The main fuses are designed to melt during an over-
load to prevent damage to the wiring harness and
electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any elec-
trical component fails to operate (except the starter
motor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse
must be replaced. Use only replacements with the
same specified rating as the melted main fuse. If a
main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical
system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
UBB211BA
UBB527BA
11-72
Maintenance and service
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing
fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your ve-
hicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic sys-
tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if
they are not suited for the vehicle.
11-73
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Replacing bulbs
8109
45321
67
1817 16 1517
13 14
11 1218
UBB208BB
11-74
Maintenance and service
! Headlight
Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while
in use. If you touch the bulb surface with bare
hands or greasy gloves, finger prints or grease
on the bulb surface develop into hot spots,
causing the bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface, wipe them
away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
" If headlight aiming is required, consult your
SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the head-
light aim.
Wattage Bulb No.
1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
2) Low beam headlight 12V-55W H7
3) Front turn signal/Park-
ing and front side
marker light
12V-27/8W 3157A
4) Map light 12V-8W –
5) Dome light 12V-8W –
6) Door step light 12V-3.5W –
7) Fog light
Except OUTBACK 12V-55W H3
OUTBACK 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
8) Trunk room light
(Sedan)
12V-5W –
9) High mount stop light
(Sedan)
12V-21W (W21W)
10) Rear turn signal light
(Sedan)
12V-21W (W21W)
11) Backup light (Sedan) 12V-16W 921
12) Brake/tail and rear side
marker light (Sedan)
12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
13) Cargo area light 12V-13W –
14) Brake/tail light
(Station wagon)
12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
15) Rear side marker light
(Station wagon)
12V-5W 168
16) Rear turn signal light
(Station wagon)
12V-21W (W21W)
17) Backup light
(Station wagon)
12V-16W 921
18) Licence plate light 12V-5W 168
Wattage Bulb No.
11-75
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
" It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have
your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if neces-
sary.
! Low beam light bulbs
1. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it counterclock-
wise.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the retainer spring.
4. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer spring se-
curely.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Install the bulb cover.
UBB529BA
UBB530BA
11-76
Maintenance and service
! High beam light bulbs
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
2. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb with new one.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At this time,
use care not to touch the bulb surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight assembly, turn it
clockwise until it clicks.
! Parking light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUB-
ARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
! Front turn signal light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUB-
ARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
! Front fog light (if equipped)
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUB-
ARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
! Rear combination lights
! Sedan
1. Push the knobs of the cover to open the cover.
UBB531BA
UBB210BA
11-77
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
A) Rear turn signal light
B) Backup light
C) Brake/tail and rear side marker light
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination
light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and
turning counterclockwise. Install a new bulb.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light
assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.
5. Securely lock the cover against the trunk trim by
using the screwdriver to turn the top knob clockwise.
! Station wagon
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the upper and
lower screws.
A
B
C
UBB206BB
UBB533BA
11-78
Maintenance and service
2. Wrap tape around a flat-head screwdriver, then in-
sert the screwdriver into the gap A between the side
cover and rear combination lamp and use it as a lever
to undo the clip. Undo clips C and D in the same way,
then remove the side cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower screws. Then, slide
the rear combination lamp assembly to the rear and
remove it from the vehicle.
(C)
(B)
(A)
UBB588BB UBB534BA
11-79
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
A) Brake/tail light
B) Rear turn signal light
C) Rear side marker light
4. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination
light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and
turning counterclockwise. Install a new bulb.
6. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light
assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.
7. Close the cover and latch the lock.
8. Reinstall the rear combination light assembly and
its side cover.
! Backup light (Station wagon)
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove the light cov-
er from the top of the left hand rear gate trim.
C
A
B
UBB201BB
UBB536BA
11-80
Maintenance and service
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it
with a new one.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise. Install
the light cover on the rear gate.
! License plate light
! Sedan
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUB-
ARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
UBB590BA UBB538BA
11-81
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
! Station wagon
0
1. Remove the mounting screws using a Phillips
screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens and cover.
5. Tighten the mounting screws.
UBB547BA
UBB548BA
11-82
Maintenance and service
! Dome light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with
a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at its ends are
aligned vertically. Pull the bulb straight downward to
remove it. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
UBB541BA
UBB589BA
11-83
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
! Map light
0
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with
a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at its ends are
aligned vertically. Pull the bulb straight downward to
remove it.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
PASSENGER
UB9200BA
UBB580BA
11-84
Maintenance and service
! Door step light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with
a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
UBB545BA
UBB546BA
11-85
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
! Cargo area light
1. Remove the cargo area light assembly by prying
the edge of the light with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens from the cargo area light assem-
bly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
UBB543BA
UBB544BA
11-86
Maintenance and service
! Trunk light
1. Remove the cover by pulling it out.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the cover.
! High mount stop light
! Sedan
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUB-
ARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
UBB551BA
12-1
12
Specifications
Specifications ................................................ 12-2
Dimensions ....................................................... 12-2
Engine ................................................................ 12-3
Electrical system .............................................. 12-3
Capacities .......................................................... 12-4
Tires ................................................................... 12-5
Wheel alignment ............................................... 12-5
Fuses and circuits ........................................ 12-6
Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment .................................................. 12-6
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment .................................................. 12-8
Bulb chart ...................................................... 12-10
Vehicle identification .................................... 12-11
12-2
Specifications
Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
! Dimensions
in (mm)
Item Legacy OUTBACK
Sedan Station
wagon
Sedan Station wagon
Non-
turbo
Turbo
2.5-liter 3.0-liter 2.5-liter 3.0-liter
Non-
turbo
Turbo
Overall length 186.2 (4,730) 188.8 (4,795) 186.2 (4,730) 188.8 (4,795)
Overall width 68.1 (1,730) 68.1 (1,730) 69.7 (1,770) 69.7 (1,770)
Overall height 56.1 (1,425) 58.0 (1,475) 59.6 (1,515) 61.4 (1,560)
Wheel base 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670)
Tread Front 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495)
Rear 58.5 (1,485) 58.5 (1,485) 58.5 (1,485) 58.5 (1,485)
Ground clearance 5.9 (150) 5.9
(150)
6.1
(155)
8.44 (214.6) 8.39
(213.2)
8.68
(220.6)
8.44 (214.6)
12-3
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
! Engine
! Electrical system
Engine model EJ253
(2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo)
EJ255
(2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)
EZ30D
(3.0-liter, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled
6 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 150 (2,457) 183 (3,000)
Bore × Stroke in (mm) 3.92 × 3.11 (99.5 × 79.0) 3.51 × 3.15 (89.2 × 80.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.2 : 1 10.7 : 1
Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4 1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4
Battery type and capacity (5HR) 2.5-liter
models
MT 55D23L (12V-48AH)
AT 75D23L (12V-52AH)
3.0-liter models 75D23L (12V-52AH)
Alternator 2.5-liter models 12V-110A
3.0-liter models 12V-100A
Spark plugs 2.5-liter non-turbo models FR5AP-11 (NGK)
2.5-liter turbo models ILFR6B (NGK)
3.0-liter models ILFR6B (NGK)
12-4
Specifications
! Capacities
Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil 2.5-liter models 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.0-liter models 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)
Transmission oil (MT) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (AT) 2.5-liter non-turbo models 10.0 US qt (9.5 liters, 8.4 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo models 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)
3.0-liter models 10.3 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)
AT differential gear oil 2.5-liter non-turbo models 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo and 3.0-liter models 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering gear fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant 2.5-liter non-turbo
models
MT 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)
AT 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo mod-
els
MT 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
AT 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
3.0-liter models 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
12-5
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
! Tires
! Wheel alignment
Tire size P205/55R16 89H 215/45ZR17 P225/60R16 97H P225/55R17 95V
Wheel size 16 x 6.5JJ 17 x 7JJ 16 x 6.5JJ 17 x 7JJ
Pressure Front 32 psi
(220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
35 psi
(240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 30 psi
(210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
33 psi
(230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear at trailer
towing
– 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary
spare tire
Size T135/80R16 T135/70D17 T155/70D17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Item Legacy OUTBACK
Sedan Station wagon Sedan Station wagon
Toe Front 0 in (0 mm)
Rear 0 in (0 mm)
Camber Front –0°15’ 0°40’
Rear –0°40’ –0°30’ –0°10’
12-6
Specifications
Fuses and circuits
! Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment
27 28 29 30 31 32 33
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12345
UBC501BB
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 20 " Cargo fan
" Trailer hitch connector
2 Empty
3 15 " Door locking
4 15 " Front wiper deicer re-
lay
" Moonroof
5 15 " Combination meter
6 7.5 " Remote control rear
view mirrors
" Seat heater relay
" Vanity mirror light
7 15 " Combination meter
" Integrated unit
8 20 " Stop light
9 20 " Mirror heater
" Front wiper deicer
10 7.5 " Power supply (Battery)
12-7
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
11 7.5 " Turn signal unit
" Clock
12 15 " Automatic transmis-
sion unit
" SRS airbag system
(Sub)
" Engine control unit
" Integrated unit
13 20 " Cargo socket
14 15 " Position light
" Tail light
" Rear combination light
15 Empty
16 15 " Illumination
17 15 " Seat heaters
18 10 " Backup light
19 7.5 " Headlight right side re-
lay
20 10 " Cigarette lighter socket
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
21 7.5 " Starter relay
22 15 " Air conditioner
" Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 15 " Rear wiper
" Rear window washer
24 15 " Audio unit
" Clock
25 15 " SRS airbag system
(Main)
26 15 " Power window relay
27 15 " Blower fan
28 15 " Blower fan
29 15 " Fog light
30 30 " Front wiper
" Front wiper washer
31 7.5 " Auto air conditioner
unit
" Integrated unit
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
12-8
Specifications
! Fuse panel located in the engine com-
partment
A) FWD socket (AT vehicles – except Turbo models and
3.0-liter models)
B) Main fuse
32 7.5 " Headlight left side relay
33 7.5 " ABS/Vehicle dynamics
control unit
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1
2
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A
UBC500BB
12-9
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 30 " ABS unit
" Vehicle dynamics con-
trol unit
2 25 " Main fan
3 25 " Sub fan (Except 3.0-li-
ter models)
4 25 " Main fan (3.0-liter mod-
els)
5 20
6 15 " Headlight (right side)
7 15 " Headlight (left side)
8 20 " Backup light
9 15 " Horn
10 25 " Rear window defogger
11 15 " Fuel pump
12 15 " Automatic transmis-
sion control unit
13 7.5 " Engine control unit
14 15 " Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
15 20 " Parking switch
16 7.5 " Alternator
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
12-10
Specifications
Bulb chart
Description Wattage Bulb No.
Headlight
Low beam 12V-55W H7
High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
Fog light
Except OUTBACK 12V-55W H3
OUTBACK 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
Front turn signal/parking
and front side marker
12V-27/8W 3157A
Rear combination light
Rear turn signal light
(Sedan)
12V-21W (W21W)
Brake/tail and rear
side marker (Sedan)
12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
Brake/tail (Station
wagon)
12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
Rear side marker
(Station wagon)
12V-5W 168
Rear turn signal light
(Station wagon)
12V-21W (W21W )
Backup light 12V-16W 921
High mount stop light
(Sedan)
12V-21W (W21W)
License plate light 12V-5W 168
Trunk room light 12V-5W W5W
Cargo area light 12V-13W –
Front ashtray light 12V-1.4W –
Dome light 12V-8W –
Map light 12V-8W –
Door step light 12V-3.5W –
Description Wattage Bulb No.
12-11
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle identification
1
2
8
6
5
4
3
7
UBC200BB
1) Emission control label
2) Vehicle identification number
3) Certification and bar code label
4) Tire inflation pressure label
5) Vehicle identification number
plate
6) Model number plate
7) Radio noise label (Canada-
spec. models)
8) Fuel label
13-1
13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Tire information ............................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure ............ 13-6
Glossary of tire terminology ............................ 13-8
Tire care – maintenance and safety
practices ......................................................... 13-9
Vehicle load limit – how to determine ............. 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ............................................... 13-14
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........ 13-15
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ..... 13-15
Uniform tire quality grading standards ....... 13-16
Treadwear .......................................................... 13-16
Traction AA, A, B, C .......................................... 13-16
Temperature A, B, C ......................................... 13-17
Reporting safety defects (USA) ................... 13-18
13-2
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Consumer inf ormation and R eporting saf ety defects
For U.S.A.
The following information has been compiled accord-
ing to Code of Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
! Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification
Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a
tire by tire manufacturers. These marking can
provide you with useful information on the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with P-Metric tire
size. It is important to understand the sizing sys-
tem in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles.
Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system
with a breakdown of its individual elements.
" P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section Width is mea-
sured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into
inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Sec-
tion Height divided by Section Width) helps pro-
vide more dimensional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehi-
cles such as passenger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height ÷ section
width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
(6) ZR = Speed category above 149 mph (240
km/h)
" Load and Speed Rating Descriptions
The load and speed rating descriptions will ap-
pear following the size designation.
They provide two important facts about the tire.
P 225 / 60 R 16
(1)
(2)
(3) (4) (5)
215 / 45 ZR 17
(2)
(3) (6) (5)
13-3
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
First, the number designation is its load index.
Second, the letter designation indicates the tire’s
speed rating.
Example:
(7) Load Index: A numerical code which speci-
fies the maximum load a tire can carry at the
speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maxi-
mum inflation pressure.
For example, “97” means 1,609 lbs (730 kg), “90”
means 1,323 lbs (600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs
(580 kg)
Load indices apply only to the tire, not to
the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any
vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated load.
(8) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system de-
scribing a tire’s capability to travel at established
and predetermined speeds.
For example, “H” means 130 mph (210 km/h)
" Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not
to the vehicle. Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can
be operated at the tire’s rated speed.
" The speed rating is void if the tires are
worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or
otherwise altered from their original condi-
tion. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or oth-
erwise altered, they may not be suitable for
original equipment tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the
intended outboard sidewall. The TIN is com-
posed of four groups. Here is a brief review of the
TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.
P 225 / 60 R 16 97 H
Size designation
(6) (7)
13-4
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
(1) Manufacturer’s Identification Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the week, starting
with “01” to represent the first full week of the cal-
endar year; the second two figures represent the
year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of
2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also placed on the
sidewall.
" Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
this tire may be inflated. For example, “300 kpa
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
" Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum permissible
weight load for this tire. For example, “MAX.
LOAD 730 kg (1609 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
Maximum load rating applies only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehi-
cle can be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
" Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RA-
DIAL”
" Construction
The generic name of each cord material used in
the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this
tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 STEEL + 2
POLYESTER + 1 NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLY-
ESTER”
DOT XX XX XXX XXXX
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
13-6
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Recommended tire inflation pressure
! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,
Tire size P205/55R16
89H
215/45ZR17 P225/60R16
97H
P225/55R17
95V
Wheel size 16 x 6.5JJ 17 x 7JJ 16 x 6.5JJ 17 x 7JJ
Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa,
2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
35 psi (240 kPa,
2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 30 psi (210 kPa,
2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
33 psi (230 kPa,
2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear at
trailer
towing
– 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Tempo-
rary spare
tire
Size T135/80R16 T135/70D17 T155/70D17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
13-7
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
! Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the driver’s side
B-pillar.
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original tire size, rec-
ommended cold tire inflation pressure on each
tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating
capacity and loading information.
! Adverse safety consequences of under-in-
flation
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire
pressures can cause the tires to flex severely
and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread separation, and
failure of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss of ve-
UB8201BA
WG
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
SEATING CAPACITY : TOTAL5
ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
COLD TIRE
INFLATION PRESSRE
COLD TIRE
INFLATION PRESSRE
FRONT
REAR
220kPa,32PSI
210kPa,30PSI
P225/60R16
T155/70D17
420kPa, 60PSI
COMPACT SPARE TIRE
The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 408kg or 900lbs.
FRONT 2 : REAR 3
UBD200AA
13-8
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
hicle control could lead to an accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air pressure to
achieve proper inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of
each tire (including the spare) at least once a
month and before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a
pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a short distance
warms up the tires and increases the tire pres-
sures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire pres-
sure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a
tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands,
causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful
not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to
reduce its pressure.
! Glossary of tire terminology
" Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been driven less
than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours
or more.
" Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a
tire may be inflated.
" Recommended inflation pressure
The cold inflation pressure recommended by a
vehicle manufacturer.
" Intended outboard sidewall
1)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other
sidewall of the tire, or
2)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmet-
rical tire that has a particular side that must al-
ways face outward when mounting on a vehi-
cle.
" Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of floor mats,
leather seats and cross bars to the extent that
these items are available as factory-installed
equipment (whether installed or not).
" Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity of fu-
el, oil, and coolant and air conditioning.
13-9
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
" Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehi-
cle capacity weight and production options
weight.
" Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants (3
occupants).
" Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle, 2 in front,
1 in rear seat.
" Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed regular
production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg)
in excess of those standards items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb weight
or accessory weight.
" Vehicle capacity weight
The total weight of cargo, luggage and occu-
pants that can be added to the vehicle.
" Vehicle maximum load on a tire
Load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the maxi-
mum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
" Vehicle normal load on a tire
Load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant
weight and dividing by two.
! Tire care – maintenance and safety
practices
" Check on a daily basis that the tires are free
from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the
same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
" Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the
tires before their tread wear indicators become
visible. When a tire’s tread wear indicator be-
comes visible, the tire is worn beyond the ac-
ceptable limit and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving at even low
speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to
hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle
control can lead to an accident.
" To maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate
the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating
the tires involves switching the front and rear
tires on the right hand side of the vehicle and
similarly switching the front and rear tires on the
13-10
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
left hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be
kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace
any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of
rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correct-
ly tightened. A tightening torque specification
and a tightening sequence specification for the
wheel nuts can be found “Flat tires” in Chapter 9.
! Vehicle load limit – how to determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined
by weight, not by available cargo space. The
load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side B-pillar. Lo-
cate the statement “The combined weight of oc-
cupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity
of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the total weight
of driver and all passengers and their belong-
ings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as
a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and
the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo ca-
pacity can be calculated by the following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit – (total weight of oc-
cupants + total weight of optional equipment +
tongue load of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and weight lim-
its, refer to “Trailer towing” in Chapter 8.
! Calculating total and load capacities vary-
ing seating configurations
Calculate the available load capacity as shown in
the following examples:
Example 1A
UBD201BA
13-11
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs
(363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle plac-
ard with the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 363
kg or 800 lbs”.
For example, if the vehicle has one occupant
weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing
551 lbs (250 kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity by sub-
tracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 95 lbs
(43 kg) of cargo can be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80
kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the
Total weight
= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 551 lbs (250 kg)
= 705 lbs (320 kg)
(Occupant) (Cargo)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) – 705 lbs (320 kg)
= 95 lbs (43 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
UBD202BA
13-12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
number of occupants to two), the calculations
are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity
weight by 81 lbs (37 kg), so the cargo weight
must be reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs
(363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle plac-
ard with the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 363
kg or 800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one occupant
weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing
265 lbs (120 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to
which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs
(800 kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to
Total weight
= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
+ 551 lbs (250 kg)
= 881 lbs (400 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) 881 lbs (400 kg)
= 81 lbs ( 37 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
UBD203BA
13-13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80
kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 172
lbs (78 kg) of cargo can be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65
kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter
the same vehicle (bringing the number of occu-
pants to three), and a child restraint system
weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in the vehicle
for the child to use, the calculations are as fol-
lows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
Total weight
= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 628 lbs (285 kg)
(Occupant) (Cargo)
(Trailer hitch)
(Tongue load)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) – 628 lbs (285 kg)
= 172 lbs (78 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
UBD204BA
13-14
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity
weight by 22 lbs (10 kg), so the cargo weight
must be reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
! Determining compatibility of tire and
vehicle load capacities
The sum of four tires’ maximum load ratings
must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle
weight (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the maxi-
mum load ratings of two front tires and of two
rear tires must exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original equipment
tires are designed to fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred
to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And
each axle’s maximum loaded capacity is referred
to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The
GVWR and each axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to the driver’s
door.
The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are de-
termined by not only the maximum load rating of
tires but also loaded capacities of the vehicle’s
suspension, axles and other body parts.
Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot
necessarily be loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
Total weight
= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 143 lbs (65 kg) + 40 lbs (18 kg)
+ 11 lbs (5 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 822 lbs (373 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
(Trailer hitch)
(Child restraint)
(Tongue load)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) 822 lbs (373 kg)
= 22 lbs ( 10 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
13-15
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
! Adverse safety consequences of over-
loading on handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle handling, stop-
ping distance, vehicle and tire as shown below.
This could lead to an accident and possibly result
in severe personal injury.
" Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
" Heavy and/or high-mounted loads could in-
crease the risk of rollover.
" Stopping distance will increase.
" Brakes could overheat and fail.
" Suspension, bearings, axles and other body
parts could break or experience accelerated
wear that will shorten vehicle life.
" Tires could fail.
" Tread separation could occur.
" Tire could separate from its rim.
! Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs
(635kg). and there will be five- 150 lbs (68 kg)
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available car-
go and luggage load capacity calculated in Step
4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your vehi-
cle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
13-16
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Uniform tire quality grading stan-
dards
This information indicates the relative perfor-
mance of passenger car tires in the area of
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
This is to aid the consumer in making an in-
formed choice in the purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires
for use on passenger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires
with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less,
or to some limited production tires.
All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
! Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
! Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
13-17
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
! Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-
derinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
13-18
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To con-
tact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393
(or 366-0123 in the Washington D.C. area)
or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
14-1
14
Index
14-2
Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........................... 7-38
Warning light ........................................ 3-28, 7-39
Accessories ..................................................... 11-72
Accessory power outlet ..................................... 6-14
Active head restraint ............................................ 1-8
Air cleaner element ......................................... 11-24
Air conditioner ..................................................... 4-9
Air filtration system ............................................ 4-19
Air flow selection ................................................. 4-2
Alarm system ..................................................... 2-23
All-wheel drive warning light (AT vehicles) ........ 3-31
Aluminum wheels ............................................ 11-57
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 7-38
Arming the system ............................................. 2-24
Armrest .............................................................. 1-14
Ashtray .............................................................. 6-19
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ................... 3-27
Audio control button .......................................... 5-56
Audio set ............................................................. 5-3
Auto-dimming mirror/compass .......................... 3-59
Automatic climate control system ...................... 4-10
Automatic transmission
4 speed ......................................................... 7-16
5 speed ......................................................... 7-25
Capacities ..................................................... 12-4
Fluid ............................................................ 11-33
Manual mode ....................................... 7-20, 7-30
Selector lever ...................................... 7-17, 7-26
Shift lock release ................................. 7-24, 7-35
Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) .. 3-27
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) .......................................................... 1-18
B
Battery ............................................................. 11-67
Jump starting ................................................ 9-17
Replacement (Remote keyless entry
system) ...................................................... 2-16
Brake
Booster ....................................................... 11-44
Fluid ............................................................ 11-42
Pad and lining ............................................. 11-47
Pedal .......................................................... 11-45
Brake pedal
Free play .................................................... 11-45
Reserve distance ........................................ 11-45
Brake system .................................................... 7-37
Warning light ................................................ 3-29
Braking .............................................................. 7-37
Breaking-in of new brake pads and
linings ....................................................... 11-47
Tips ............................................................... 7-37
14-3
Index
Bulb
Chart ........................................................... 12-10
Replacing .................................................... 11-73
C
Capacities .......................................................... 12-4
Cargo area
Cover ............................................................ 6-23
Light ................................................................ 6-3
Tie-down hooks ............................................ 6-29
Catalytic converter ............................................... 8-4
Center
Console .......................................................... 6-8
Ventilators ....................................................... 4-3
Changing
Flat tire ............................................................ 9-5
Oil and oil filter ............................................ 11-13
Charge warning light ......................................... 3-26
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp ................................................ 3-25
Checking
Brake pedal free play .................................. 11-45
Brake pedal reserve distance ..................... 11-45
Clutch function ............................................ 11-46
Clutch pedal free play ................................. 11-46
Engine oil level ........................................... 11-12
Fluid level ................. 11-33, 11-41, 11-42, 11-43
Gear oil level ............................................... 11-37
Child restraint systems ...................................... 1-38
Installation with seatbelt ............................... 1-42
Lower and tether anchorages ....................... 1-49
Child safety ............................................................. 7
Locks ............................................................ 2-30
Chime
Key ................................................................. 3-6
Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-19
Cigarette lighter socket ...................................... 6-16
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ......................................... 10-4
Interior .......................................................... 10-6
Ventilator grille .............................................. 4-17
Climate control system
Automatic ...................................................... 4-10
Manual ............................................................ 4-4
Clock ................................................................. 3-36
Clutch
Fluid ............................................................ 11-43
Pedal .......................................................... 11-46
Coat hook .......................................................... 6-20
Cooling system ................................................ 11-18
Corrosion protection ................................. 8-14, 10-4
Cruise control .................................................... 7-53
Set indicator light .......................................... 3-35
14-4
Index
Cup holder
Front passenger’s ......................................... 6-12
Rear passenger’s ......................................... 6-13
D
Daytime running light system ............................ 3-46
Differential gear oil
Front ........................................................... 11-35
Rear ............................................................ 11-37
Dimensions ........................................................ 12-2
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-26
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............ 7-38
Dome light ................................................ 6-2, 11-82
Door locks ........................................................... 2-6
Door open warning light .................................... 3-31
Drive belts ....................................................... 11-30
Driving
All-wheel drive vehicle .................................. 3-31
Car phone/mobile phone ................................. 10
Drinking ............................................................. 9
Drugs ................................................................. 9
Foreign countries ............................................ 8-7
Pets ................................................................. 11
Snowy and icy roads .................................... 8-13
Tips ..................................... 7-15, 7-23, 7-33, 8-7
Tired or sleepy ................................................. 10
E
Electrical system ............................................... 12-3
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ........................................................... 7-41
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................ 1-18
Engine
Compartment overview ................................ 11-8
Coolant ....................................................... 11-19
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................ 8, 8-3
Hood ............................................................. 11-5
Oil ............................................................... 11-12
Overheating .................................................. 9-20
Starting ......................................................... 7-10
Stopping ....................................................... 7-12
Exterior care ...................................................... 10-2
F
Flat tires .............................................................. 9-5
Floor mat ........................................................... 6-22
Fluid level
Automatic transmission .............................. 11-33
Brake .......................................................... 11-42
Clutch ......................................................... 11-43
Power steering ........................................... 11-41
Fog light switch ................................................. 3-50
Front
Differential gear oil ..................................... 11-35
14-5
Index
Fog light ...................................................... 11-76
Seatbelt pretensioners .................................. 1-33
Seats .............................................................. 1-2
Fuel ..................................................................... 7-2
Economy hints ................................................ 8-2
Filler lid and cap ............................................. 7-4
Gauge ........................................................... 3-11
Requirements ................................................. 7-2
Fuses ............................................................... 11-68
Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-6
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ................... 8-20
Glove box ............................................................ 6-7
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .............. 8-20
H
Hazard warning flasher ....................................... 3-7
Head restraint adjustment (Front) ........................ 1-8
Headlight
Flasher .......................................................... 3-46
Indicator light ................................................ 3-35
Headlights .............................................. 3-45, 11-74
Heater operation .................................................. 4-7
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-35
High mount stop light ....................................... 11-86
Horn ................................................................... 3-64
Hose and connections ..................................... 11-19
I
Ignition switch ...................................................... 3-3
Light ................................................................ 3-6
Illuminated entry ................................................ 2-15
Illumination brightness control ........................... 3-47
Immobilizer system .............................................. 2-4
Indicator light ................................................ 3-33
Indicator light
Cruise control ............................................... 3-35
Cruise control set .......................................... 3-35
Front fog ....................................................... 3-35
Headlight ...................................................... 3-35
High beam .................................................... 3-35
Selector lever position .................................. 3-34
Turn signal .................................................... 3-34
Information display ............................................ 3-37
Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-59
Interior light .......................................................... 6-2
Internal trunk lid release handle ........................ 2-37
J
Jack ................................................................... 9-33
Jack handle ....................................................... 9-34
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-17
14-6
Index
K
Key
Keyless entry system .................................... 2-12
Number ........................................................... 2-3
Reminder chime ............................................. 3-6
Keys .................................................................... 2-2
L
Leather seat materials ....................................... 10-6
Light
Cargo area ..................................................... 6-3
Control switch ............................................... 3-44
Dome .............................................................. 6-2
Map ................................................................ 6-3
Light control switch ............................................ 3-44
Limited slip differential (LSD) ............................ 7-36
Loading your vehicle ......................................... 8-18
Low fuel warning light ...................... 3-13, 3-19, 3-30
LSD (Limited slip differential) ............................ 7-36
Lumbar support ................................................... 1-9
M
Main fuse ......................................................... 11-71
Maintenance
Precautions .................................................. 11-3
Schedule ...................................................... 11-3
Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-33
Tools ............................................................. 9-33
Manual
Climate control system ................................... 4-4
Mode ................................................... 7-20, 7-30
Seat ................................................................ 1-3
Transmission ................................................ 7-13
Transmission oil ......................................... 11-31
Map light ................................................... 6-3, 11-83
Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-31
Meters and gauges ........................................... 3-14
Mirrors ............................................................... 3-59
Moonroof .................................................. 2-41, 9-30
N
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000
miles (1,600 km) .............................................. 8-2
O
Odometer ............................................................ 3-9
Off road driving .................................................... 8-9
Oil filter ............................................................ 11-13
Oil level
Engine ........................................................ 11-12
Front differential gear (AT vehicles) ........... 11-35
Manual transmission .................................. 11-31
Rear differential .......................................... 11-37
14-7
Index
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-26
Outside mirrors .................................................. 3-61
Outside temperature indicator ........................... 3-37
Overheating engine ........................................... 9-20
P
Parking
Brake stroke ............................................... 11-48
Light switch ................................................... 3-49
Periodic inspection .............................................. 8-6
Power
Door locking switches ................................... 2-10
Seat ................................................................ 1-5
Steering fluid ............................................... 11-41
Windows ....................................................... 2-31
Precautions against vehicle modification .. 1-37, 1-92
Preparing to drive .............................................. 7-10
Printed antenna ................................................... 5-2
R
Rear
Combination lights ...................................... 11-76
Differential gear oil ...................................... 11-37
Gate .............................................................. 2-39
Seats ............................................................ 1-11
Rear seat
Folding down (Station wagon) ...................... 1-12
Rear window
Defogger button ............................................ 3-57
Wiper and washer switch .............................. 3-55
Recommended
Automatic transmission fluid ....................... 11-35
Brake fluid ................................................... 11-43
Clutch fluid .................................................. 11-44
OIL grade and viscosity ....... 11-16, 11-17, 11-32,
11-36, 11-40
Power steering fluid .................................... 11-42
Spark plugs ................................................. 11-29
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-12
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ................................... 11-47
Wiper blades ............................................... 11-60
Replacing
Air cleaner element ..................................... 11-24
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-16
Lost transmitters (keyless entry system) ...... 2-17
Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-73
Cargo area light .......................................... 11-85
Dome light .................................................. 11-82
Door step light ............................................ 11-84
Front fog light .............................................. 11-76
Front turn signal light .................................. 11-76
Headlight .................................................... 11-74
High mount stop light .................................. 11-86
14-8
Index
License plate light ....................................... 11-80
Map light ..................................................... 11-83
Parking light ................................................ 11-76
Rear combination light ................................ 11-76
Trunk light ................................................... 11-86
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-17
Roof rail and crossbar ....................................... 8-21
S
Safety
Precautions when driving .................................. 6
Symbol .............................................................. 3
Warnings ........................................................... 3
Seat
Fabric ........................................................... 10-6
Heater ........................................................... 1-10
Seatbelt .................................................................. 6
Maintenance ................................................. 1-33
Pretensioners ............................................... 1-33
Safety tips ..................................................... 1-16
Warning light and chime ............................... 1-19
Seatbelts ........................................................... 1-16
Selector lever ........................................... 7-17, 7-26
Position indicator .......................................... 3-34
Shift lock release ...................................... 7-24, 7-35
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-15
Sounding a panic alarm ..................................... 2-15
Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-29
Specifications .................................................... 12-2
Speedometer ....................................................... 3-9
SRS
Curtain airbag ............................................... 1-80
Frontal airbag ............................................... 1-65
Side airbag ................................................... 1-80
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag) ....................................................... 6, 1-59
SRS airbag system warning light ...................... 3-24
Starting the engine ............................................ 7-10
State emission testing (U.S. only) ....................... 7-8
Steering wheel
Power ........................................................... 7-36
Tilt ................................................................. 3-63
Stopping the engine .......................................... 7-12
Storage compartment .......................................... 6-7
Sun shades ....................................................... 2-43
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-5
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) .. 1-59
Synthetic leather upholstery .............................. 10-6
T
Tachometer ....................................................... 3-11
Temperature gauge ........................................... 3-13
Temporary spare tire ........................................... 9-3
Tie-down hooks ................................................. 9-22
14-9
Index
Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-63
Tire
Chains .......................................................... 8-17
Inspection ................................................... 11-51
Pressures and wear .................................... 11-52
Replacement .............................................. 11-56
Rotation ...................................................... 11-55
Tires .................................................................. 12-5
Types .......................................................... 11-49
Tires and wheels ............................................. 11-49
Top tether anchorages ...................................... 1-55
Towing ............................................................... 9-21
All wheels on the ground .............................. 9-28
Flat-bed truck ................................................ 9-27
Tie-down hooks ............................................ 9-22
Weight .......................................................... 8-31
Trailer
Hitch ............................................................. 8-27
Hitches .......................................................... 8-37
Towing .......................................................... 8-31
Towing tips ................................................... 8-40
Trip meter ................................................. 3-10, 3-16
Trunk lid ............................................................. 2-35
Release handle ............................................. 2-37
Trunk light ........................................................ 11-86
Turn signal
Indicator lights .............................................. 3-34
Lever ............................................................. 3-47
U
Under-floor storage compartment ..................... 6-30
V
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-27
Vanity mirror ........................................................ 6-6
Vehicle
Capacity weight ............................................ 8-19
Identification ............................................... 12-11
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light ........................................ 3-32
OFF switch ................................................... 7-48
Operation indicator light ................................ 3-31
System .......................................................... 7-43
Warning light ................................................. 3-32
Ventilator ............................................................. 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-20
Warning lights
ABS .............................................................. 3-28
All-wheel drive .............................................. 3-31
Anti-lock Brake system ................................. 3-28
AT OIL TEMPerature .................................... 3-27
14-10
Index
Brake system ................................................ 3-29
Charge .......................................................... 3-26
CHECK ENGINE .......................................... 3-25
Door open ..................................................... 3-31
Low fuel ...................................... 3-13, 3-19, 3-30
Oil pressure .................................................. 3-26
Seatbelt ........................................................ 3-21
SRS airbag system ....................................... 3-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control ................... 3-32, 7-46
Warranties and maintenance ............................ 8-31
Washing ............................................................ 10-2
Waxing and polishing ........................................ 10-3
Wear indicators ............................................... 11-55
Wheel
Alignment ..................................................... 12-5
Balance ...................................................... 11-54
Replacement .............................................. 11-57
Windows ............................................................ 2-31
Windshield
Washer fluid ................................................ 11-58
Wiper and washer switches .......................... 3-52
Wiper deicer ................................................. 3-56
Winter driving .................................................... 8-12
Wiper and washer ............................................. 3-51
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
11
12
13
HSF028AA
GAS STATION REFERENCE
Fuel:
! 2.5-liter non-turbo models
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI or higher.
! 2.5-liter turbo models and 3.0-liter models
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rat-
ing of 91 AKI or higher. For temporary purposes if
premium unleaded gasoline is not available, you
may use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 AKI or higher. For optimum engine per-
formance and driveability, it is required (for 2.5-liter
turbo models), and recommended (for 3.0-liter mod-
els) that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline.
! Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Research
Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly
referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Refer to
“Fuel” section in this manual.
Fuel capacity:
16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil:
Use only API classification SL with the words “EN-
ERGY CONSERVING” and the New API certification
mark (starburst mark) displayed on the container.
Engine oil capacity:
2.5-liter models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.0-liter models: 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)
Cold tire pressure:
Tire size P205/55R16 89H 215/45ZR17 P225/60R16 97H P225/55R17 95V
Wheel size 16 x 6.5JJ 17 x 7JJ 16 x 6.5JJ 17 x 7JJ
Pressure Front 32 psi
(220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
35 psi
(240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 30 psi
(210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
33 psi
(230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear at trail-
er towing
– 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary
spare tire
Size T135/80D16 T135/70D17 T155/70D17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
